5. 小双品显示巴利原文
5. Cūḷayamakavaggo
1. 《萨雷亚卡经》注显示巴利原文
1. Sāleyyakasuttavaṇṇanā
439 “大众聚集”:有些人为了“展示欢庆方式逗王子笑”,有些人为了“观看那游戏”,如此在大众中聚集。“天舞”:指天乾闼婆。“依‘善哉!善哉!’之言”:由于“善哉?善哉!”这样一问一答的交替,那些人从一开始便得到了“善哉”的名称。那些善哉者的主宰,也就是这位王子,是憍萨罗人,出生于憍萨罗。他们的住处等一切如前所述。因此他说“那个地方被称为憍萨罗”。显示巴利原文
439.Mahājanakāyesannipatiteti keci ‘‘pahaṃsanavidhiṃ dassetvā rājakumāraṃ hāsessāmā’’ti, keci ‘‘taṃ kīḷanaṃ passissāmā’’ti evaṃ mahājanasamūhe sannipatite. Devanaṭanti dibbagandhabbaṃ. Kusalaṃ kusalanti vacanaṃ upādāyāti ‘‘kacci kusalaṃ? Āma kusala’’nti vacanapaṭivacanavasena pavattakusalavāditāya te manussā ādito kusalāti samaññaṃ labhiṃsu. Tesaṃ kusalānaṃ issarāti rājakumārā kosalā. Kosale jātā. Tesaṃ nivāsoti sabbaṃ pubbe vuttanayameva. Tenāha ‘‘so padeso kosalāti vuccatī’’ti.
“游方时”:虽是一般性的说法,但由于“与大……到达”这段文句有特别的意义,所以解释为“进行不急不缓的游方”。“大”:既指功德大,也指数目大。因为在那个比丘众中,有些人依增上戒学而具足戒,同样地有些人具足戒与定,有些人具足戒、定与慧,由功德大故,这个比丘众是大的;如果不考虑这个,只显示数目之大,所以说“百位”等。“集会”:指依靠他村维持生活而进入此处;村是居住的村子,此处指沙喇婆罗门村。“住处”:就是世尊居住的地方。“此处”:指在这部《萨雷亚卡经》中。“未加限定”:指没有限定为某个园林、某座山或某棵树下,未以具体形态加以限定说明。因此,由于未加限定,以推想的方式阐明必然成立的义理,所以说“应该有一片树林”,意思是“肯定会有”。显示巴利原文
Cārikaṃ caramānoti sāmaññavacanampi ‘‘mahatā…pe… tadavasarī’’ti vacanato visesaṃ niviṭṭhamevāti āha ‘‘aturitacārikaṃ caramāno’’ti. Mahatāti guṇamahattenapi saṅkhyāmahattenapi mahatā. Tasmiñhi bhikkhusamūhe keci adhisīlasikkhāvasena sīlasampannā, tathā keci sīlasamādhisampannā, keci sīlasamādhipaññāsampannāti guṇamahattenapi so bhikkhusamūho mahāti. Taṃ anāmasitvā saṅkhyāmahattameva dassento ‘‘sataṃ vā’’tiādimāha. Aññagāmapaṭibaddhajīvikāvasena samosaranti etthāti samosaraṇaṃ, gāmo nivāsagāmo. Nti sālaṃ brāhmaṇagāmaṃ. Vihāroti bhagavato viharaṇaṭṭhānaṃ. Etthāti etasmiṃ sāleyyakasutte. Aniyamitoti asukasmiṃ ārāme pabbate rukkhamūle vāti na niyamito, sarūpaggahaṇavasena na niyamitvā vutto. Tasmāti aniyamitattā. Atthāpattisiddhamatthaṃ parikappanavasena dassento ‘‘vanasaṇḍo bhavissatī’’ti āha, addhā bhaveyyāti attho.
“他们得知”:为显示“他们通过耳门……得知”这一含义而说。由于限定词的作用,整个句子都包含了限定之义,因此说“只是用来填充句子的虚词而已”。而在“确定义”中,则是为了显示“kho”字取所乐之义的确定义。由于“听闻”一词与“kho”字结合时,就如繁花装饰般得以圆满,并使前后文句紧密相连,若不取该字则不能如此,因此说“仅是为了音节的流畅而已”。“matta”字是除特殊之外的意思,借此说明它不表示其他含义;而“eva”字则使音节的流畅成为必然。在沙喇村出生、长大的人称为“萨雷亚卡”,就如同“katteyyakā”、“ubbheyyakā”一样。显示巴利原文
Upalabhiṃsūti (sārattha. ṭī. 1.1.verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.255; a. ni. ṭī. 2.3.64) savanavasena upalabhiṃsūti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘sotadvāra…pe… jāniṃsū’’ti āha. Avadhāraṇaphalattā sabbampi vākyaṃ antogadhāvadhāraṇanti āha ‘‘padapūraṇamatte vānipāto’’ti. Avadhāraṇattheti pana iminā iṭṭhatthāvadhāraṇatthaṃ kho-saddaggahaṇanti dasseti. ‘‘Assosu’’nti padaṃ kho-sadde gahite tena phullitamaṇḍitavibhūsitaṃ viya hontaṃ pūritaṃ nāma hoti, tena ca purimapacchimapadāni saṃsiliṭṭhāni honti, na tasmiṃ aggahiteti āha ‘‘padapūraṇena byañjanasiliṭṭhatāmattamevā’’ti. Matta-saddo visesanivattiattho. Tenassa anatthantaradīpanataṃ dasseti, eva-saddena pana byañjanasiliṭṭhatāya ekantikataṃ. Sālāyaṃ jātā saṃvaḍḍhakā sāleyyakā yathā ‘‘katteyyakā ubbheyyakā’’ti.
“已平息罪恶”意指:究竟、无余、连同习气都已平息罪恶。如此便与外道离贪、有学与无学之息恶区分开来,世尊的息恶遂成最为殊胜。由于虚词有多义,此处意指“传闻”,故说“‘kho’是传闻义的虚词”。“仅是称呼”:即亲切的称呼语。因为“bho”“āvuso”“devānaṃpiyā”等,皆为亲切的言辞。“以种姓故”:此处“它救护”故名为“种姓”。当“乔达摩”这一称呼与觉知一同生起时,它使所缘成为确定而加以救护、守护,因此称为“乔达摩种姓”。正如觉知无有所缘境则不能生起,名称无有所诠义之境亦不能生起,故说它救护、守护它们。从义理上,应知此乃别族相续之外、由该族始祖传出、为该族成员共同所有之通名。显示高贵种姓,即说明此乃从尊贵、崇高、广大之刹帝利族类而来。因为从一切刹帝利之最初大选王以来,释迦王族便未曾混杂,最为殊胜。“不为任何衰损所及”:即不为亲属衰损、财富衰损等任何衰损、减损所征服、压倒。因为事实上,该族在任何时候都未曾有过那样的衰损,且在出家之时能显得极为圆满,此乃世间公认之事。显示巴利原文
Samitapāpattāti accantaṃ anavasesato savāsanaṃ samitapāpattā. Evañhi bāhirakavītarāgasekkhāsekkhapāpasamanato bhagavato pāpasamanaṃ visesitaṃ hoti. Anekatthattā nipātānaṃ idha anussavattho adhippetoti āha ‘‘khalūti anussavanatthe nipāto’’ti. Ālapanamattanti piyālāpavacanaṃ. Piyasamudāhārā hete ‘‘bho’’ti vā ‘‘āvuso’’ti vā ‘‘devānaṃpiyā’’ti vā. Gottavasenāti ettha taṃ tāyatīti gottaṃ. Gotamoti hi pavattamānaṃ abhidhānaṃ buddhiñca ekaṃsikavisayatāya tāyati rakkhatīti gotamagottaṃ. Yathā hi buddhi ārammaṇabhūtena atthena vinā na vattati, evaṃ abhidhānaṃ abhidheyyabhūtena, tasmā so tāni tāyati rakkhatīti vuccati. So pana atthato aññakulaparamparāsādhāraṇaṃ tassa kulassa ādipurisasamudāgataṃ taṃkulapariyāpannasādhāraṇaṃ sāmaññarūpanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Uccākulaparidīpanaṃ uditoditavipulakhattiyakulavibhāvanato. Sabbakhattiyānañhi ādibhūtamahāsammatamahārājato paṭṭhāya asambhinnaṃ uḷāratamaṃ sakyarājakulaṃ. Kenaci pārijuññenāti ñātipārijuññabhogapārijuññādinā kenacipi pārijuññena parihāniyā anabhibhūto anajjhotthaṭo. Tathā hi kadācipi tassa kulassa tādisapārijuññābhāvo, abhinikkhamanakāle ca tato samiddhatamabhāvo loke pākaṭo paññātoti. Sakyakulā pabbajitoti idaṃ vacanaṃ bhagavato saddhāpabbajitabhāvadīpanaṃ vuttaṃ mahantaṃ ñātiparivaṭṭaṃ mahantañca bhogakkhandhaṃ pahāya pabbajitabhāvadīpanato. Ettha ca samaṇoti iminā parikkhakajanehi bhagavato bahumatabhāvo dassito samitapāpatādīpanato, gotamoti iminā lokiyajanehi uḷāratamakulīnatādīpanato.
“现起”:此处“abhi”前缀表“如此这般地说明”,由于此种关系,原本为属格意义的“对尊贵的乔达摩”这一业格语,也因显示“如此这般的连接”而转为“如此这般说明”之义。故言:“其意为:对于这位尊贵的乔达摩先生”。“贤善”:即善良。而他的贤善又在于有殊胜的所缘境,故说“具足善好的功德”。因这里的“具足”,即以彼种对象为所缘。“最上”:此处亦然,如说“世尊一词即是‘最上’之义”。由于“世尊是阿拉汉”等仅是简略地列举、称赞这些功德,故“kitti”即声音、称誉,因此说“只是称誉而已”。而“sadda”一词亦同样有称誉之义,例如:“有大称誉的仙人们,具德、苦行”。“称赞之声”:即赞扬的称颂。“遍覆”:由于无有对立、不与他人共的缘故,而为征服、压倒。显示巴利原文
Abbhuggatoti ettha abhi-saddo itthambhūtākhyāne, taṃyogato pana ‘‘bhavantaṃ gotama’’nti upayogavacanaṃ sāmiatthepi samānaṃ itthambhūtayogadīpanato ‘‘itthambhūtākhyānatthe’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘tassa kho pana bhoto gotamassāti attho’’ti. Kalyāṇoti bhaddako. Sā cassa kalyāṇatā uḷāravisayatāyāti āha ‘‘kalyāṇaguṇasamannāgato’’ti. Taṃvisayatā hettha samannāgamo. Seṭṭhoti etthāpi eseva nayo yathā ‘‘bhagavāti vacanaṃ seṭṭha’’nti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā; visuddhi. 1.142; udā. aṭṭha. 1; itivu. aṭṭha. nidānavaṇṇanā; mahāni. aṭṭha. 50). ‘‘Bhagavā araha’’ntiādinā guṇānaṃ saṃkittanato saṃsaddanato ca kittisaddo vaṇṇoti āha ‘‘kittiyevā’’ti. Kittipariyāyopi hi sadda-saddo yathā taṃ ‘‘uḷārasaddā isayo guṇavanto tapassino’’ti. Thutighosoti abhitthavudāhāro. Ajjhottharitvāti paṭipakkhābhāvena anaññasādhāraṇatāya ca abhibhavitvā.
“彼世尊”:即圆满了三十波罗蜜,摧破了一切烦恼,证得无上正自觉,乃天神中最殊胜之天神,帝释中最殊胜之帝释,梵天中最殊胜之梵天,为世间怙主,因具足祥瑞等诸般缘故而得名为“世尊”者,就是这位世尊。因为“世尊”一名,是对导师的名号称扬。正如所说:“‘世尊’这个名字并非母亲所取”等。而下文则以“世尊”作功德的称扬。为显示用“阿拉汉”等词句,在含天神的世间中极为彰显、从各个方面显扬佛陀的功德,“iti pi”应当连接到每一个词上,故说:“以此因缘是阿拉汉,以此因缘是正自觉者……以此因缘是世尊”。正如在“Itipetaṃ bhūtaṃ, itipetaṃ tacchaṃ”等句中那样,此处的“iti”字表示近得现前之因义,“pi”字是聚集之义,由此显示这些功德的众多性。为了说明对于具足信慧之人,那些观察功德的诸因都是现前的,故说“就是因为这个和那个原因,这样说”等。此后,从《清净道论》可知。“这些”:指“阿拉汉”等词。其义理阐释,应当详尽了解。从《清净道论·大复注》所说:“以远离故为阿拉汉,以善远离故……”显示巴利原文
So bhagavāti yo so samatiṃsa pāramiyo pūretvā sabbakilese bhañjitvā anuttaraṃ sammāsambodhiṃ abhisambuddho devānaṃ atidevo sakkānaṃ atisakko brahmānaṃ atibrahmā lokanātho bhāgyavantatādīhi kāraṇehi bhagavāti laddhanāmo, so bhagavā. ‘‘Bhagavā’’ti hi idaṃ satthu nāmakittanaṃ. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘bhagavāti netaṃ nāmaṃ mātarā kata’’ntiādi (mahāni. 149, 198, 210; cūḷani. ajitamāṇavapucchāniddesa 2). Parato pana ‘‘bhagavā’’ti guṇakittanameva. Evaṃ ‘‘araha’’ntiādīhi padehi ye sadevake loke ativiya paññātā buddhaguṇā, te nānappakārato vibhāvitāti dassetuṃ paccekaṃ itipi-saddo yojetabboti āha ‘‘itipi arahaṃ, itipi samāsambuddho…pe… itipi bhagavā’’ti. ‘‘Itipetaṃ bhūtaṃ, itipetaṃ taccha’’ntiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.6) viya hi idha iti-saddo āsannapaccakkhakāraṇattho, pi-saddo sampiṇḍanattho tena tesaṃ guṇānaṃ bahubhāvadīpanato. Tāni guṇasallakkhaṇakāraṇāni saddhāsampannānaṃ viññujātikānaṃ paccakkhāni evāti dassento ‘‘iminā ca iminā ca kāraṇenāti vuttaṃ hotī’’tiādi. Tato visuddhimaggato. Tesanti ‘‘araha’’ntiādīnaṃ. Vitthāro atthaniddeso gahetabbo. Tato eva taṃsaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (visuddhi. mahāṭī. 1.130) vutto ‘‘ārakāti arahaṃ suvidūrabhāvato, ārakāti arahaṃ āsannabhāvato, rahitabbassa abhāvato, sayañca arahitabbato, natthi etassa rahogamanaṃ gatīsu paccājāti, pāsaṃsabhāvato vā araha’’ntiādinā ‘‘araha’’ntiādīnaṃ padānaṃ attho vitthārato veditabbo.
此处(《清净道论》大复注1.130;《真义》复注1·毗兰若篇注释)有偈颂说:显示巴利原文
Bhavanti cettha (visuddhi. mahāṭī. 1.130; sārattha. ṭī. 1.verañjakaṇḍavaṇṇanā) –
“那些心志卑下的人,不能正确地修行;
世尊远离他们,应供便因此被视为遥远。”
那些正确行道、志向殊胜的人,
世尊与他们亲近,因此也名为近处的应供与胜者。
「rahā」(隐秘):具恶法者被称为「隐秘」,因为善人应当远离他们。
「善逝」:对于他,在轮回中全然没有任何隐秘的出行,
他已舍断生与死,故被尊为阿拉汉、善逝。
「阿拉汉」:因为在含括天神的世间中,无有任何人的功德能与他相比;
「阿拉汉」:因此,即便从应受赞叹这一层面而言,他也是两足者中最殊胜的。
「阿拉汉」:他远离愚钝之人,亲近有智慧者;
「阿拉汉」:他因彻底断除了种种隐秘的烦恼,对智者而言便不再有所执取;
阿拉汉:由于在诸有中不存在隐秘的烦恼,因此应受称赞——阿拉汉、胜者。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Sammā nappaṭipajjanti, ye nihīnāsayā narā; Ārakā tehi bhagavā, dūre tenārahaṃ mato. Ye sammā paṭipajjanti, suppaṇītādhimuttikā; Bhagavā tehi āsanno, tenāpi arahaṃ jino. Pāpadhammā rahā nāma, sādhūhi rahitabbato; Tesaṃ suṭṭhu pahīnattā, bhagavā arahaṃ mato. Ye sacchikatasaddhammā, ariyā suddhagocarā; Na tehi rahito hoti, nātho tenārahaṃ mato. Raho vā gamanaṃ yassa, saṃsāre natthi sabbaso; Pahīnajātimaraṇo, arahaṃ sugato mato. Guṇehi sadiso natthi, yasmā loke sadevake; Tasmā pāsaṃsiyattāpi, arahaṃ dvipaduttamo. Ārakā mandabuddhīnaṃ, āsannā ca vijānataṃ; Rahānaṃ suppahīnattā, vidūnamaraheyyato; Bhavesu ca rahābhāvā, pāsaṃsā arahaṃ jino’’ti.
“美好的”即是善妙。见到它的人应知它能带来利益与安乐,故说“带来利益”和“带来安乐”。其中,“带来利益”指带来现法利益、来世利益以及与究竟义相关的利益。“带来安乐”指带来含摄于其中的三种安乐。“如是之人”即那样的人。为了显示世尊具足的众多功德,对于以四种量为标准的世间,在一切情况下都极令人敬信,所以说了“以众多的……”等。其中,“如实……阿拉汉”,是就那些以法为量、以粗涩为量的众生对世尊生起净信而言的;其余的则是就其他众生而言。仅仅见到也是善妙的,这里应讲猫头鹰的故事。能听到一句也好,更为善妙,这里应讲青蛙天子的故事。显示巴利原文
Sundaranti bhaddakaṃ. Tañca passantassa hitasukhāvahabhāvena veditabbanti āha ‘‘atthāvahaṃ sukhāvaha’’nti. Tattha atthāvahanti diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaparamatthasañhitahitāvahaṃ. Sukhāvahanti tappariyāpannatividhasukhāvahaṃ. Tathārūpānanti tādisānaṃ. Yādisehi pana guṇehi bhagavā samannāgato, tehi catuppamāṇikassa lokassa sabbathāpi accantāya pasādanīyoti dassetuṃ ‘‘anekehipī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yathābhūta…pe… arahatanti iminā dhammappamāṇānaṃ lūkhappamāṇānaṃ sattānaṃ bhagavato pasādāvahatamāha, itarena itaresaṃ. Dassanamattampisādhuhotīti ettha kosiyasakuṇassa vatthu kathetabbaṃ. Ekaṃ padampi sotuṃ labhissāma, sādhutaraṃyeva bhavissatīti ettha maṇḍūkadevaputtavatthu kathetabbaṃ.
同样,说“出现了在家众的提问”,这是就多数情况而言,因为多数在家众都这样问。对于非在家众的提问,道理也是如此。通过“如同他们不能……回答”这一段,显示了导师折伏那些婆罗门居士的方法。由于他们喜好简略,世尊便给予简略的教导;他们不理解其中的意义,于是请求详细解说。而他们那种喜好简略,源于自认为有智慧;当所教导的意义未能理解时,那种我慢便无处安立。如此,世尊思量了折伏他们我慢的方法后,便以简略的方式回答问题,而并非完全不观照教导。因此说“因为他们自认为有智慧”等。意思是:你们向我请问,却不理解我简略所说的意义。显示巴利原文
Iminā nayena agārikapucchā āgatāti idaṃ yebhuyyavasena vuttaṃ. Yebhuyyena hi agārikā evaṃ pucchanti. Anagārikapucchāyapi eseva nayo. Yathā na sakkonti…pe… vissajjentoti iminā satthu tesaṃ brāhmaṇagahapatikānaṃ niggaṇhanavidhiṃ dasseti. Tesañhi saṃkhittarucitāya saṅkhepadesanā, tāya atthaṃ ajānantā vitthāradesanaṃ āyācanti, sā ca nesaṃ saṃkhittarucitā paṇḍitamānitāya, so ca māno yathādesitassa atthassa ajānante appatiṭṭho hoti , iti bhagavā tesaṃ mānaniggahavidhiṃ cintetvā saṅkhepeneva pañhaṃ vissajjesi, na sabbaso desanāya asallakkhaṇatthaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘paṇḍitamānikā hī’’tiādi. Yasmā maṃ tumhe yācatha, saṃkhittena vuttamatthaṃ na jānitthāti adhippāyo.
440 如同《分别论》中“以一种方式为智事”等句,这里的“种”(vidha)一词有“部分”的意思。它通过格与数的变通,以主格单数说为“三种”,但意义应依工具格复数来理解,故说“三种”即是以三种部分。或者,“种”一词表示“方式”的意思。正因为表示方式,将可得的不如法行、非正行不存在的共性,或将身门性质的共性统合为一,故说为“三种”。如果着眼于方式的差别,则应说为“三种方式”。这里说“以身”,身是指能造作的身体,它是不如法行的门,因为没有它,不如法行便不能生起。“以身”是表示原因的具格。虽然由名为不如法行的思所发起的那种表色,并非《发趣论》中所说二十四缘里的任何一种缘而成为思的缘,但在那样转起时,它被称为身业之思的转起;因此,通过那个门可以了知它,犹如那是它的原因一样,这仅是通称。或者“以身门”,即是以身体为门、以身为门的方式,这是表示如此状态的具格。以此门而行非法,故为“不如法行”,即那样转起的思。而“不如法”,应看作是由此发起的加行。从法而不离的为“如法”,不是如法的为“不如法”,不如法而又为行,故为显示巴利原文
440. ‘‘Ekavidhena ñāṇavatthu’’ntiādīsu (vibha. 751) viya koṭṭhāsattho vidha-saddo, so ca vibhattivacanavipallāsaṃ katvā paccatte karaṇavacanavasena ‘‘tividha’’nti vutto. Attho pana karaṇaputhuvacanavasena daṭṭhabboti āha ‘‘tividhanti tīhi koṭṭhāsehī’’ti. Pakārattho vā vidha-saddo, pakāratthattāyeva labbhamānaṃ adhammacariyāvisamacariyābhāvasāmaññaṃ, kāyadvārikabhāvasāmaññaṃ vā upādāya ekattaṃ netvā ‘‘tividha’’nti vuttaṃ. Pakārabhede pana apekkhite ‘‘tividhā’’icceva vuttaṃ hoti. Kāyenāti ettha kāyoti copanakāyo adhippeto, so ca adhammacariyāya dvārabhūto tena vinā tassā appavattanato. Kāyenāti ca hetumhi karaṇavacanaṃ. Kiñcāpi hi adhammacariyāsaṅkhātacetanāsamuṭṭhānā sā viññatti, na ca sā paṭṭhāne āgatesu catuvīsatiyā paccayesu ekenapi paccayena cetanāya paccayo hoti, tassā pana tathāpavattamānāya kāyakammasaññitāya cetanāya pavatti hotīti tena dvārena lakkhitabbabhāvato tassā kāraṇaṃ viya ca sabbohāramattaṃ hoti. Kāyadvārenāti vā kāyena dvārabhūtena kāyadvārabhūtenāti taṃ itthambhūtalakkhaṇe karaṇavacanaṃ. Adhammaṃ carati etāyāti adhammacariyā, tathāpavattā cetanā. Adhammoti pana taṃsamuṭṭhāno payogo daṭṭhabbo. Dhammato anapetāti dhammā, na dhammāti adhammā, adhammā ca sā cariyā cāti adhammacariyā. Paccanīkasamanaṭṭhena samaṃ, samānaṃ sadisaṃ yuttanti vā samaṃ, sucaritaṃ. Samato vigataṃ, viruddhaṃ vā tassāti visamaṃ, duccaritaṃ. Sā eva visamā cariyāti visamacariyā. Sabbesu kaṇhasukkapadesūti ‘‘catubbidhaṃ vācāya adhammacariyāvisamacariyā hotī’’tiādinā uddesaniddesavasena āgatesu sabbesu kaṇhapadesu – ‘‘tividhaṃ kho gahapatayo kāyena dhammacariyāsamacariyā hotī’’tiādinā uddesaniddesavasena āgatesu sabbesu sukkapadesu ca.
“残忍”(rudda)是使人哭泣的意思:由于其粗暴的行为,让那些被他人执着的众生流下眼泪,所以称为残忍;将当中的r音变成l音,就成了“暴恶”(ludda)。“粗硬”就是暴恶。“残酷”就是粗恶。“凶恶者”就是行凶的人。即使不被染污,那样惯于杀害众生的性情,便被称为“血手”,正如惯于布施的人即使手没洗净而行布施,也仍被称为“净手”一样。“打击”仅指给予打击,而增上的打击就是杀害他人,为了显示“已杀……”等意义而这样说。其中,“耽着”是深深投入、热衷的意思。显示巴利原文
Rodeti kurūrakammantatāya parapaṭibaddhe satte assūni mocetīti ruddo, so eva luddo ra-kārassa la-kāraṃ katvā. Kakkhaḷoti luddo. Dāruṇoti pharuso. Sāhasikoti sāhassakārī. Sacepi na lippanti. Tathāvidho paresaṃ ghātanasīlo lohitapāṇītveva vuccati yathā dānasīlo paresaṃ dānatthaṃ adhotahatthopi ‘‘payatapāṇī’’tveva vuccati. Paharaṇaṃ pahāradānamattaṃ hataṃ, pavuddhaṃ paharaṇaṃ parassa māraṇaṃ pahatanti dassento ‘‘hate’’tiādimāha. Tattha niviṭṭhoti abhiniviṭṭho pasuto.
依此而言,“属于他人”是以属格来表述的,那即是指财产。因为通常所取的对象,正是由那个属格所表明的,故说“属于他人的”。或者,“属于他人的、他人的财物与用具”是一个复合词,意思是任何属于他人的东西,特别是他人的财物用具。“由那些他人”就是指由那些物品的主人。由于那个关系,一个人被称为“盗”,也就是偷,因此说“这是盗取心的名称”。即是就偷盗而说,不是依信任、暂时借用等方式。显示巴利原文
Yassa vasena ‘‘parassā’’ti sāminiddeso, taṃ sāpateyyaṃ. Yañhi sāmaññato gahitaṃ, taṃ teneva sāminiddesena pakāsitanti āha ‘‘parassa santaka’’nti. Parassaparavittūpakaraṇanti vā ekamevetaṃ samāsapadaṃ, yaṃ kiñci parasantakaṃ visesato parassa vittūpakaraṇaṃ vāti attho. Tehi parehīti yesaṃ santakaṃ, tehi. Yassa vasena puriso ‘‘theno’’ti vuccati, taṃ theyyanti āha ‘‘avaharaṇacittassetaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Theyyasaṅkhātena, na vissāsatāvakālikādivasenāti attho.
“或已死”中的“或”字,表示未说出的其他可能,由此也涵盖出家等情况。以此类推:若母亲已死或失踪,由父亲保护,则称为父护;若父母双亡,由兄弟保护,则称为兄护,等等,即针对这些情况而说。“同类家族”指通过迎娶而同类的家族。或者依盗贼法规,由国王等施设刑罚所判定。在《正见经》(中部注1.89)中,依邪行的相状而说为:“以非法意图,由身门所生,对不可行处的违犯之思。”显示巴利原文
Mate vāti vā-saddo avuttavikappattho. Tena pabbajitādibhāvaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Etenupāyenāti yaṃ mātari matāya, naṭṭhāya vā pitā rakkhati, sā piturakkhitā. Yaṃ ubhosu asantesu bhātā rakkhati, sā bhāturakkhitāti evamādiṃ sandhāyāha. Sabhāgakulānīti āvāhakiriyāya sabhāgāni kulāni. Dassukavidhiṃ vā uddissa ṭhapitadaṇḍārājādīhi. Sammādiṭṭhisutte (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.89) ‘‘asaddhammādhippāyena kāyadvārappavattā agamanīyaṭṭhānavītikkamacetanā’’ti evaṃ vuttamicchācāralakkhaṇavasena.
“手足等因”:即因手、脚等遭受残断等缘故。“财因”:为了求财或失财的缘故。“所得”:指能获得食物、衣物等,故名所得。“为些许何事”:为了任何少许微末的染着之物。因此说“或任何”等。“虽知而言”:对于那件事,明知其虚妄不实,却仍作如是说。显示巴利原文
Hatthapādādihetūti hatthapādādibhedanahetu. Dhanahetūti dhanassa lābhahetu jānihetu ca. Lābhoti ghāsacchādanāni labbhatīti lābho. Kiñcikkhanti kiñcimattakaṃ āmisajātaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘yaṃ vā’’tiādi. Jānantoyevāti musābhāvaṃ tassa vatthuno atthi, taṃ jānanto eva.
所谓“卵状”,是指树上类似卵形的节瘤。那些节瘤坚硬、不平、难以调伏,同样,以辱骂、轻蔑而转起的言语也被称为“卵状”。因此说“如对有病的树”等。“粗涩”即是粗暴;而它的这种粗涩,因为是嗔恚的近因,所以由此便成为腐败的。因此说“如同所谓”等。“辛辣”即不可意。“不可意”即不能令心生起喜悦,由此能引发嗔恨,是令内心产生染着的东西。“对于要害处”:因为一触及便生苦,所以针对像生、老等类似要害之处。“能作系着”:即对于这样说的人,内心存着“我就是要这么说”的意图而紧紧系缚,并非取文句的表面意思而系缚。“邻近于嗔”:因为是嗔恨的起因。“有过失之语”:由自身所起的过失,这些都是有过失之语的同义词。显示巴利原文
Aṇḍakāti vuccati rukkhe aṇḍasadisā gaṇṭhiyo. Yathā thaddhā visamā dubbinītā ca honti, evamevaṃ khuṃsanavambhanavasena pavattavācāpi hi ‘‘aṇḍakā’’ti vuttā. Tenāha ‘‘yathā sadose rukkhe’’tiādi. Kakkasāti pharusā eva, so panassā kakkasabhāvo byāpādanimittatāya tato pūtikāti. Tenāha ‘‘yathā nāmā’’tiādi. Kaṭukāti aniṭṭhā. Amanāpāti na manavaḍḍhanī, tato eva dosajananī, cittasandosuppattikārikā. Mammesūti ghaṭṭanena dukkhuppattito mammasadisesu jātiādīsu. Lagganakārīti evaṃ vadantassa evaṃ vadāmīti atthādhippāyena lagganakārī, na byañjanavasena. Kodhassa āsannā tassa kāraṇabhāvato. Sadosavācāyāti attano samuṭṭhāpakadosassa vasena sadosavācāya vevacanāni.
「非时」:指不适宜的时机。「非因所依」:即没有结果。因为果是不离因的,所以果才称为因所依。非因所依就是没有结果,它的意思是空虚无益。「不住真实」:即说话不如实。「关于不具律仪防护者」:是指说那没有律仪防护的言语,对于听者也不能带来律仪防护。「置于心箧中」:因为是不利所集,所以不应让它进入内心并安放于其中。「非适宜时」:说法者所应说的义理,若在此时间之前或之后宣说,便是对此义理而言的不适宜时,在那不适宜时去说。「无所引据」:缺少像世尊在某某经中如此说这样的经典依据。「无界限」:即缺乏限定。为了显示怎样的言语是缺乏限定的,故说「或经」等。「可得到」:即审查询问。「唯外部言论」:不依凭那些作为体系核心、已经安立的经或本生,只取那些从体系之外而来的言论。「令蔓延」:令其生长、茂盛。「唯传统本生」:只是那些沿袭传承、如同根株般安住的东西。「采来」:从已经安立的经典之外,依据审问、譬喻、事由,把那些不相应的东西拿过来。「令知」:能够让人明白“这是为了”。显示巴利原文
Akālenāti ayuttakālena. Akāraṇanissitanti nipphalaṃ. Phalañhi kāraṇanissitaṃ nāma tadavinābhāvato. Akāraṇanissitaṃ nipphalaṃ, samphanti attho. Asabhāvavattāti ayāthāvavādī. Asaṃvaravinayapaṭisaṃyuttassāti saṃvaravinayarahitassa, attano suṇantassa ca na saṃvaravinayāvahassa vattā. Hadayamañjūsāyaṃ nidhetunti ahitasaṃhitattā cittaṃ anuppavisetvā nidhetuṃ . Ayuttakāleti dhammaṃ kathentena yo attho yasmiṃ kāle vattabbo, tato pubbe pacchā tassa akālo, tasmiṃ ayuttakāle vattā hoti. Anapadesanti bhagavatā asukasutte evaṃ vuttanti suttāpadesavirahitaṃ. Aparicchedanti paricchedarahitaṃ . Yathā pana vācā paricchedarahitā hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘suttaṃ vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Upalabbhanti anuyogaṃ. Bāhirakathaṃyevāti yaṃ suttaṃ, jātakaṃ vā nikkhittaṃ, tassa sarīrabhūtaṃ kathaṃ anāmasitvā tato bahibhūtaṃyeva kathaṃ. Sampajjitvāti viruḷhaṃ āpajjitvā. Paveṇijātakāvāti anujātapārohamūlāniyeva tiṭṭhanti. Āharitvāti nikkhittasuttato aññampi anuyogaupamāvatthuvasena tadanupayoginaṃ āharitvā. Jānāpetunti etadatthamidaṃ vuttanti jānāpetuṃ yo sakkoti. Tassa kathetunti tassa tathārūpassa dhammakathikassa bahumpi kathetuṃ vaṭṭati. Na atthanissitanti attano paresañca na hitāvahaṃ.
「贪欲」的思惟大多是因看见他人的所有物而生起的,因此称为「因贪欲而观视者」。或者说,贪欲之人对于所贪欲的对象,不论它放在哪里,都好像亲眼看见一样地贪求,因此称为「因贪欲而观视者」。这时,还没有成就业道的差别,还仅仅只是贪的程度,因为还没有以决意为转向而转起。然而,为了显示如何成就业道的差别,所以说「然而若时」等。「决意为己有」:就是以“这是我的”的想法而执取,令心转向它。显示巴利原文
Abhijjhāyanaṃ yebhuyyena parasantakassa dassanavasena hotīti ‘‘abhijjhāya oloketā hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Abhijjhāyanto vā abhijjhāyitaṃ vatthuṃ yattha katthaci ṭhitampi paccakkhato passanto viya abhijjhāyatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘abhijjhāya oloketā hotī’’ti. Kammapathabhedo na hoti, kevalaṃ lobhamattova hoti pariṇāmanavasena appavattattā. Yathā pana kammapathabhedo hoti, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yadā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pariṇāmetīti attano santakabhāvena pariggayha nāmeti.
「心败坏者」:是因嗔恨而使心达到败坏程度的人。由此说「心已腐败的人」。嗔恨确实如同毒一样,能让血液和心产生腐败的状态。「以嗔而有瞋害心思」:就像因为毒而让酥油等变质一样,因为嗔恨而有被污染的心思。「令杀戮」:就是愿他们被杀。「令至杀戮」:就是愿他们达到死亡。「或愿其无有」:就是愿他们完全不存在。因此说「乃至些微也愿其无有」,它的意思就是愿他们达到无余的毁灭。「令被杀害」:就是以上述的思惟,也就是单纯地想要彻底毁灭的思惟。显示巴利原文
Vipannacittoti byāpādena vipattiṃ āpāditacitto. Tenāha ‘‘pūtibhūtacitto’’ti. Byāpādo hi visaṃ viya lohitassa cittaṃ pūtibhāvaṃ janeti. Dosena duṭṭhacittasaṅkappoti visena viya sappiādikopena dūsitacittasaṅkappo. Ghātīyantūti hanīyantu. Vadhaṃ pāpuṇantūti maraṇaṃ pāpuṇantu. Mā vā ahesunti sabbena sabbaṃ na hontu. Tenāha ‘‘kiñcipi mā ahesu’’nti, anavasesavināsaṃ pāpuṇantūti attho. Haññantūti ādicintanenevāti ekantato vināsacintāya eva.
「邪见者」:即非如理作意而生起邪见之人。且其见全然与善法对立,故说为「见不善者」。「颠倒见者」:即执取与法性相颠倒之见。「无施」:以所施物为代表而说布施,因此说为‘就布施无果而说’。而对于食物等物品的布施,他如何否定呢?此理于「已祠、已供」中亦同。「大施」:指一切人共通之大布施。「供客之礼敬」:即对宾客所应作之礼敬。「果」:指利益果与等流果。「异熟」:指同类之果报。所谓「对他世者,此世无」:即处于他世者,由业所得之此世是不存在的。「对此世者,他世无」:即处于此世者,由业所得之他世是不存在的。对此他说出原因:「一切于彼处即断灭」。这些有情无论处于有、胎、趣等何处,便于彼处断灭,以无间坏灭的方式毁坏。「依无果故」:即基于对父母的正确行为与错误行为无有果报,而说‘无母、无父’,并非说没有父母这个人,也不是说对他们所作的正行与邪行没有表现,因为父母是世间现量可见的。为了显示这些有情的生起犹如水泡,只是单独生起,并非死没之后再来投生,显示巴利原文
Micchādiṭṭhikoti ayoniso uppannadiṭṭhiko. So ca ekantato kusalapaṭipakkhadiṭṭhikoti āha ‘‘akusaladassano’’ti. Vipallatthadassanoti dhammatāya vipariyāsaggāhī. Natthi dinnanti deyyadhammasīsena dānaṃ vuttanti āha ‘‘dinnassa phalābhāvaṃ sandhāya vadatī’’ti. Dinnaṃ pana annādivatthuṃ kathaṃ paṭikkhipati. Esa nayo ‘‘yiṭṭhaṃ huta’’nti etthāpi. Mahāyāgoti sabbasādhāraṇaṃ mahādānaṃ. Paheṇakasakkāroti pāhunakānaṃ kattabbasakkāro. Phalanti ānisaṃsaphalañca nissandaphalañca. Vipākoti sadisaṃ phalaṃ. Paraloke ṭhitassa ayaṃ loko natthīti paraloke ṭhitassa kammunā laddhabbo ayaṃ loko na hoti. Idhaloke ṭhitassapi paraloko natthīti idhaloke ṭhitassa kammunā laddhabbo paraloko na hoti. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘sabbe tattha tattheva ucchijjantī’’ti . Ime sattā yattha yattha bhavayonigatiādīsu ṭhitā tattha tattheva ucchijjanti nirudayavināsavasena vinassanti. Phalābhāvavasenāti mātāpitūsu sammāpaṭipattimicchāpaṭipattīnaṃ phalassa abhāvavasena ‘‘natthi mātā, natthi pitā’’ti vadati, na mātāpitūnaṃ, nāpi tesu sammāpaṭipattimicchāpaṭipattīnaṃ abhāvavasena tesaṃ lokapaccakkhattā. Bubbuḷakassa viya imesaṃ sattānaṃ uppādo nāma kevalova, na cavitvā āgamanapubbakoti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘natthi sattā opapātikā’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘cavitvā upapajjanakasattā nāma natthīti vadatī’’ti. Samaṇena nāma yāthāvato jānantena kassaci kiñci akathetvā saññatena bhavitabbaṃ, aññathā ahopurisikā nāma siyā, kiṃ paro parassa karissati, tathā attano sampādanassa kassaci avasaro eva natthi tattha tattheva ucchijjanatoti āha ‘‘ye imañca…pe… pavedentī’’ti. Ettāvatāti ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādinā byapadesena. Dasavatthukāti paṭikkhipitabbāni dasa vatthūni etissāti dasavatthukā.
441 无贪等项,前文已从义理上阐明,故其义甚明。显示巴利原文
441.Anabhijjhādayo heṭṭhā atthato pakāsitattā uttānatthāyeva.
442 一起坏灭、一起行去,故称为共住者,即共同转起者;其状态即为共住性;即共同转起,故说‘达至共住’。梵天之身所成团体即为梵身;因属于彼团体、往生彼处,故为梵身天。此名称虽可通用于一切梵天众,然据‘光’等词,第二禅地等更高诸天已另作分类,犹如牛与黄牛之理,余者即用此称,故说‘梵身天:指初禅地之天’。光:并非别有独立一类名为‘光’的天,只因少光天等皆具‘有光明’之共性,故合而立此名称,称为‘光’,如同将梵辅天、梵众天、大梵天总称为梵身天一般。少光天等:此‘等’字即包含无量光天、光音天诸天——此为巴利语经文。不一总地取:即不将其总合为‘光’,亦不总合为‘一身、想之异等’而笼统称呼。分别地取:即依因缘有优劣等差别之故,而分别取少光天等名。如此,世尊在显示了法行、平等行,显示了随顺轮回的善趣之道,以及随顺还灭涅槃的漏尽之道后,以破除三有之方式显示了漏尽,以阿拉汉果为顶,圆满结束了此次教示。显示巴利原文
442. Saha byayati gacchatīti sahabyo, sahavattanako, tassa bhāvo sahabyatā, sahapavattīti āha ‘‘sahabhāvaṃ upagaccheyya’’nti. Brahmānaṃ kāyo samūhoti brahmakāyo, tappariyāpannatāya tattha gatāti brahmakāyikā. Kāmaṃ cetāya sabbassapi brahmanikāyassa samaññāya bhavitabbaṃ, ‘‘ābhāna’’ntiādinā pana dutiyajjhānabhūmikādīnaṃ upari gahitattā gobalībaddañāyena tadavasesānaṃ ayaṃ samaññāti āha ‘‘brahmakāyikānaṃ devānanti paṭhamajjhānabhūmidevāna’’nti. Ābhā nāma visuṃ devā natthi, parittābhādīnaṃyeva pana ābhāvantatāsāmaññena ekajjhaṃ gahetvā pavattaṃ etaṃ adhivacanaṃ, yadidaṃ ‘‘ābhā’’ti yathā ‘‘brahmapārisajjabrahmapurohitamahābrahmānaṃ brahmakāyikā’’ti. Parittābhānantiādi panāti ādi-saddena appamāṇābhānaṃ devānaṃ ābhassarānaṃ devānanti imaṃ pāḷiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Ekato aggahetvāti ābhāti vā, ekattakāyanānattasaññāti vā ekato aggahetvā. Tesaṃyevāti ābhāti vuttadevānaṃyeva. Bhedato gahaṇanti kāraṇassa hīnādibhedabhinnatādassanavasena parittābhādiggahaṇaṃ. Iti bhagavā āsavakkhayaṃ dassetvāti evaṃ bhagavā dhammacariyaṃ, samacariyaṃ, vaṭṭanissitaṃ sugatigāmipaṭipadaṃ, vivaṭṭanissitaṃ āsavakkhayagāmipaṭipadaṃ katvā tibhavabhañjanato āsavakkhayaṃ dassetvā arahattanikūṭena desanaṃ niṭṭhapesi.
「依此处住」:即在此法行、平等行的解说中而住立。「天界应等摄」:即二十六种天界皆应被等同统摄。「二十梵界」:即依各各有情的生存部类而有二十梵界,意为二十类梵天群体。「以十善业道」:即如其所应,以十善业道作为业亲依止缘,或仅作为亲依止缘,由此显示结生。显示巴利原文
Idha ṭhatvāti imasmiṃ dhammacariyāsamacariyāya niddese ṭhatvā. Devalokā samānetabbāti chabbīsatipi devalokā samodhānetabbā. Vīsati brahmalokāti taṃtaṃbhavapariyāpannanikāyavasena vīsati brahmalokā, vīsati brahmanikāyāti attho. Dasakusalakammapathehīti yathārahaṃ dasakusalakammapathehi kammūpanissayapaccayabhūtehi kevalaṃ upanissayabhūtehi ca nibbatti dassitā.
「三种善行」:指三种欲界的善行。此处之所以取欲界,是着眼于意善行。「唯以异熟」:这是为了显示结生正由此异熟的引生而发生,并非仅依亲依止之力。为阐明「依亲依止」这句话的涵义,故说「十善业道即戒」等。在「修习第二等」等处,也应将「立于戒」一句引来连结。可是,为何此处却说「依亲依止」呢?《无碍解道》中确实说道:「以初禅而言,断除诸盖即是戒,远离即是戒,思即是戒,律仪即是戒,不犯即是戒」等,于一切禅那中皆举出了戒;由此,上界诸天的结生理应也通过异熟来解说,不是吗?并非如此,因为那是为了遍知而作的教导;而「于其处断」等为了遍知的教说性质,在《清净道论大复注》中已阐明。同样,此处说「十善业道即是戒」等,也是为阐明戒对于色界、无色界的亲依止性,而非指其有引生结生的作用。然而,为何在如此具有修习特征的法行中,对有情进行各别分析时,却不包括无想有情呢?因此说「然而无想有情……未被解说」。因为外道不如实知见,将无想有情错误地执取为有情……显示巴利原文
Tiṇṇaṃ sucaritānanti tiṇṇaṃ kāmāvacarasucaritānaṃ. Kāmāvacaraggahaṇañcettha manosucaritāpekkhāya. Vipākenevāti iminā vipākuppādeneva nibbatti hoti, na upanissayatāmattenāti dasseti. ‘‘Upanissayavasenā’’ti vuttamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘dasa kusalakammapathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Dutiyādīni bhāvetvātiādīsupi ‘‘sīle patiṭṭhāyā’’ti padaṃ ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ. Kasmā panettha ‘‘upanissayavasenā’’ti vuttaṃ, nanu paṭisambhidāmagge (paṭi. ma. 1.41) – ‘‘paṭhamena jhānena nīvaraṇānaṃ pahānaṃ sīlaṃ, veramaṇi sīlaṃ, cetanā sīlaṃ, saṃvaro sīlaṃ, avītikkamo sīla’’ntiādinā sabbesupi jhānesu sīlaṃ uddhaṭanti tassa vasena uparidevalokānampi vipākena nibbatti vattabbāti? Na, tassa pariññāya desanattā, pariññāya desanatā cassa ‘‘yattha ca pahāna’’ntiādinā visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāyañca (visuddhi. mahāṭī. 2.837, 839) pakāsitā eva. Tathā hi idhāpi ‘‘dasa kusalakammapathā hi sīla’’ntiādinā sīlassa rūpārūpabhavānaṃ upanissayatā vibhāvitā, na nibbattakatāya. Kasmā panettha bhāvanālakkhaṇāya dhammacariyāya bhavavisese vibhajiyamāne asaññabhavo na gahitoti āha ‘‘asaññabhavopana…pe… na niddiṭṭho’’ti. Bāhirakā hi ayathābhūtadassitāya asaññabhavaṃ bhavavippamokkhaṃ maññamānā tadupagajjhānaṃ bhāvetvā asaññesu nibbattanti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ brahmajālaṭṭhakathāyaṃ taṃsaṃvaṇṇanāyañca (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 1.68-73; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.68-73) vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ.
二、《毗兰若经》注疏显示巴利原文
2. Verañjakasuttavaṇṇanā
444 「毗兰若住者」指住在毗兰若村的人。不过有一些人说:「住在种种地域的人称为毗兰若人。」依他们的见解,圣典中应读作「verajjakā」。而「未确定之事」指未以「此即是某」的方式明确指定的事情。此处的差别是:这两部经中,开示的方式有依补特伽罗增上(以人为中心)与依法增上(以法为中心)的差别,然而其义理与开示理路,却如同中间断裂的金币,并无差别。这是为了显示此道理。那么,为何世尊有时作依补特伽罗增上的开示,有时作依法增上的开示呢?这是由于开示的自在变化及所应调伏者的意乐。因为证得开示自在变化的诸佛世尊,随其所乐,有时依补特伽罗增上说法,有时依法增上说法。再者,对于那些尚未进入教法次第的应调伏者,便为其开示依补特伽罗增上;对已进入者,则为其开示依法增上。依补特伽罗增上的开示以世俗谛为境,而依法增上的开示则以究竟义谛为境。前者随顺悲悯,后者随顺智慧。或者,前者是为随信行种姓者而说,因为他们以补特伽罗为衡量……显示巴利原文
444.Verañjavāsinoti verañjagāmavāsino. Keci pana ‘‘vividharaṭṭhavāsino verañjakā’’ti etamatthaṃ vadanti, tesaṃ matena ‘‘verajjakā’’ti pāḷiyā bhavitabbanti. Aniyamitakiccenāti ‘‘iminā nāmā’’ti evaṃ na niyamitena kiccena. Ayaṃ visesoti ayaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānadhammādhiṭṭhānakato imesu dvīsu suttesu desanāya viseso, attho pana desanānayo ca majjhe bhinnasuvaṇṇaṃ viya avisiṭṭhoti dasseti. Kasmā pana bhagavā katthaci puggalādhiṭṭhānadesanaṃ deseti, katthaci dhammādhiṭṭhānanti? Desanāvilāsato veneyyajjhāsayato ca. Desanāvilāsappattā hi buddhā bhagavanto, te yathāruci katthaci puggalādhiṭṭhānaṃ katvā, katthaci dhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ katvā dhammaṃ desenti. Ye pana veneyyā sāsanakkamaṃ anotiṇṇā, tesaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānadesanaṃ desenti. Ye otiṇṇā, tesaṃ dhammādhiṭṭhānaṃ. Sammutisaccavisayā puggalādhiṭṭhānā, itarā paramatthasaccavisayā. Purimā karuṇānukūlā, itarā paññānukūlā. Saddhānusārigottānaṃ vā purimā. Te hi puggalappamāṇā, pacchimā dhammānusārīnaṃ. Saddhācaritatāya vā lokādhipatīnaṃ vasena puggalādhiṭṭhānā, paññācaritatāya dhammādhipatīnaṃ vasena dhammādhiṭṭhānā. Purimā ca neyyatthā, pacchimā nītatthā. Iti bhagavā taṃ taṃ visesaṃ avekkhitvā tattha tattha duvidhaṃ desanaṃ desetīti veditabbaṃ.
三、《大吠陀罗经》注疏显示巴利原文
3. Mahāvedallasuttavaṇṇanā
449 「恭敬」指尊重的状态,犹如石伞一般,是应当被敬重的。「具恭敬」即与恭敬俱行。对于尊者所说的任何话语,因恭敬而随顺回应,此名「随顺」;与随顺俱行即是「具随顺」。凡是随顺或与随顺同分的敬重,皆归于随顺。具恭敬者所说的具随顺之语,称为「具恭敬具随顺语」;或谓,敬重的行为即是恭敬,具恭敬者之具随顺语,即具恭敬具随顺语。由此显示:具恭敬者由其自性,自然会有如是之语生起。在余处,“du”音亦可表谴责,如“痛苦”“恶子”等。但在此处不然,因无低劣之智慧,故说“并无所谓慧之恶劣”。在“恶戒者”等词中,“du”音表“无”义,故说“意为无慧、无有智慧”。「多少」是指以何为标准。此标准即对所衡量的意义加以限定,而“nu”音是表疑问之词,故于说“‘多少’是原因的限定之问”后,又言“意思是:以多少而如是称呼”。藉“原因的限定之问”一语,显示“多少”是总体发问,非从具体差别方面而问。显示巴利原文
449. Garubhāvo gāravaṃ, pāsāṇacchattaṃ viya garukaraṇīyatā. Saha gāravenāti sagāravo, garunā kismiñci vutte gāravavasena patissavanaṃ patissavo, saha patissavena sappatissavo, patissavabhūtaṃ taṃsabhāgañca yaṃ kiñci garukaraṇaṃ. Sagārave sappatissavacanaṃ sagāravasappatissavacanaṃ. Garukaraṇaṃ vā gāravo, sagāravassa sappatissavacanaṃ sagāravasappatissavacanaṃ. Etena sabhāveneva sagāravassa tathāpavattaṃ vacananti dasseti. Aññattha du-saddo garahatthopi hoti ‘‘dukkhaṃ dupputto’’tiādīsu viya, idha pana so na sambhavati kucchitāya paññāya abhāvatoti āha ‘‘paññāya duṭṭhaṃ nāma natthī’’ti. ‘‘Dussīlo’’tiādīsu viya abhāvattho du-saddoti vuttaṃ ‘‘appañño nippaññoti attho’’ti. Kittakenāti kena parimāṇena. Taṃ pana parimāṇaṃ yasmā parimeyyassa atthassa paricchindanaṃ hoti, nu-saddo ca pucchāya jotako, tasmā ‘‘kittāvatā nu khoti kāraṇaparicchedapucchā’’ti vatvā ‘‘kittakena nu kho evaṃ vuccatīti attho’’ti āha. ‘‘Kāraṇaparicchedapucchā’’ti iminā ‘‘kittāvatā’’ti sāmaññato pucchābhāvo dassito, na visesato, tassa pucchāvisesabhāvañāpanatthaṃ mahāniddese āgatā sabbāva pucchā atthuddhāranayena dasseti ‘‘pucchā ca nāmā’’tiādinā. Adiṭṭhaṃ jotīyati etāyāti adiṭṭhajotanā, pucchā. Diṭṭhasaṃsandanā sākacchāvasena vinicchayakaraṇaṃ. Vimati chijjati etāyāti vimaticchedanā. Anumatiyā pucchā anumatipucchā. ‘‘Taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave’’tiādipucchāya hi ‘‘kiṃ tumhākaṃ anumatī’’ti anumati pucchitā hoti. Kathetuṃ kamyatāya pucchā kathetukamyatāpucchā.
「相」指任何想要被了知的自性。「未了知」是说以任何智慧审视,仍处于未了知的状态。「未见」即以见的特质而言,如同现前事物一般,却未被见到。「未称量」意为未被以“此有多少”的方式称量。「未审定」指以审定而言,未达成智慧作用的圆满。「未明显」指于智慧中不显现。「未显了」即未被智慧所揭示。此处所说提问,乃属「已见和合探讨问」,而非「昭示未见问」或「断疑问」。显示巴利原文
Lakkhaṇanti ñātuṃ icchito yo koci sabhāvo. Aññātanti yena kenaci ñāṇena aññātabhāvaṃ āha. Adiṭṭhanti dassanabhūtena paccakkhaṃ viya adiṭṭhataṃ. Atulitanti ‘‘ettakaṃ ida’’nti tulanabhūtena atulitataṃ. Atīritanti tīraṇabhūtena akatañāṇakiriyāsamāpanataṃ. Avibhūtanti ñāṇassa apākaṭabhāvaṃ. Avibhāvitanti ñāṇena apākaṭīkatabhāvaṃ. Idha diṭṭhasaṃsandanāpucchā adhippetā, na adiṭṭhajotanā vimaticchedanā cāti.
如何了知此义?为说明此,故有“长老……”等语。「自行决断」即自己逐一详细决断那些问题的意义。「此经」是指这部由二十五个问题所庄严的经,非泛指其他经。「无余到达究竟」意为毫无遗留地达到了顶点。为阐明“自己发问之后又自行决断”这句话中有四类情况,故说“有些人……”等语。「仅能发问」指仅知发问的方法。「不能决断」即不能决断,不知解答的方法。「殊胜之处」指不同于其余声闻弟子的不共之处。「与长老相似」意为没有与长老相似的声闻弟子。显示巴利原文
Kathamayaṃ attho viññāyatīti āha ‘‘thero hī’’tiādi. Sayaṃ vinicchinantoti sayameva tesaṃ pañhānaṃ atthaṃ visesena nicchinanto. Idaṃ suttanti idaṃ pañcavīsatipañhapaṭimaṇḍitasuttaṃ, na yaṃ kiñci anavaseseneva matthakaṃ pāpesīti. ‘‘Sayameva pañhaṃ samuṭṭhāpetvā sayaṃ vinicchinanto’’ti ettha catukkoṭikaṃ bhavatīti dassento ‘‘ekacco hī’’tiādimāha. Pañhaṃ samuṭṭhāpetuṃyeva sakkotīti pucchanavidhiṃyeva jānāti. Na nicchetunti nicchetuṃ na sakkoti, vissajjanavidhiṃ na jānātīti attho. Visesaṭṭhānanti aññehi asadisaṭṭhānaṃ. Therena sadisoti therena sadiso sāvako natthi.
“合和”意为将两者连接、合为一体,即如同一切知智在那里运作一般,全然不违越它。“游舞”即作游舞。由于达到了说法第一的究竟地位,且于此拥有无碍智,故能如佛陀游舞一般,善知四众弟子的心行而宣说佛法。显示巴利原文
Saṃsanditvāti saṃyojetvā samānaṃ katvā, yathā tattha sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ pavattaṃ, tathā taṃ avilometvāti attho. Līḷāyantoti līḷaṃ karonto. Dhammakathikatāya aggabhāvappattiyā tattha appaṭihatañāṇatāya buddhalīḷāya viya catunnaṃ parisānaṃ gamanaṃ gaṇhanto dhammakathaṃ katheti.
“由此处或彼处次第”是说,从所领受的教法路径出发,即使只是稍稍向前推进,也完全依照所领受的固定法则而行,因此说“杖端”等语。“单句”指仅安立一句经文。“单杖桥”指仅用一根木杖搭成的桥。通过将经文上下句彼此牵动,使三藏佛语上下贯通。世尊先安放一句如天然湖般的偈颂或经文,再从中引出种种譬喻与道理,又将这些譬喻、道理与那些经文互相配合,令其被唤醒、激发,因此被形容为“如在天然湖中绽放五彩花,又如于须弥山顶点亮千盏灯芯”。显示巴利原文
Ito vā etto vā anukkamitvāti uggahitakathāmaggato yattha katthaci īsakampi anukkamitvā uggahitaniyāmenevāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘yaṭṭhikoṭi’’ntiādi. Ekapadikanti ekapadanikkhepamattaṃ. Daṇḍakasetunti ekadaṇḍakamayaṃ setuṃ. Heṭṭhā ca upari ca suttapadānaṃ āharaṇena tepiṭakaṃ buddhavacanaṃ heṭṭhupariyaṃ karonto. Jātassarasadisañca gāthaṃ, suttapadaṃ vā nikkhipitvā tattha nānāupamākāraṇāni āharanto tāni ca tehi suttapadehi bodhento samuṭṭhāpento ‘‘jātassare pañcavaṇṇāni kusumāni phullāpento viya sinerumatthake vaṭṭisahassaṃ jālento viyā’’ti vutto.
“一次提起”指于一句被提起的刹那。以词计,有六百万言;以偈计,有一万五千颂。如同不是逐朵摘花,而是抓住藤蔓,将花一并聚拢取走,故说“一击提取”。“具足智慧者”是指具有卓越智慧行持的圣者;“具足坚定者”是指具有坚固执持力的圣者。显示巴利原文
Ekapaduddhāreti ekasmiṃ paduddhāraṇakkhaṇe. Padavasena saṭṭhi padasatasahassāni gāthāvasena pannarasa gāthāsahassāni. Ākaḍḍhitvā gaṇhanto viyāti paccekaṃ pupphāni anocinitvā vallimeva ākaḍḍhitvā ekajjhaṃ pupphāni katvā gaṇhanto viya. Tenāha ‘‘ekappahārenevā’’ti. Gatimantānanti atisayāya ñāṇagatiyā yuttānaṃ. Dhitimantānanti dhāraṇabalena yuttānaṃ.
“具有无量理趣与充实”是指:由于所缘之生起、所说之义、涅槃、果报、唯作等类的差别,所缘境具有无量种类,故以无量的理趣而积聚充实。这里相关的譬喻是:如同为欲渡越四种瀑流者,在渡口安置的船只。经中所说的“具有千轭之良骏车乘”,是特指韦迦亚塔车乘而言。显示巴利原文
Anantanayussadanti paccayuppannabhāsitatthanibbānavipākakiriyādivasena anantapabhede visaye pavattiyā anantanayehi ussannaṃ upacitaṃ. Caturoghanittharaṇatthikānaṃ titthe ṭhapitanāvā viyāti yojanā. Sahassayuttaājaññarathoti vejayantarathaṃ sandhāya vadati.
因为在提问中,是以寻求释义的方式,用叠词说“劣慧者、劣慧者”,所以法将(舍利弗尊者)在回答所问之义时,也以与提问相应的方式,用叠词说“不了知、不了知”。在此,为了显示“iti”一词是表示原因,所以说:“因为不了知,所以被称为劣慧者。”所谓“此是苦”,是指这五取蕴是苦圣谛。而那五取蕴,简言之,不过就是“被恼害、被感受、被感知、被造作、被了别”这些;除此之外,再没有任何法能称为苦圣谛。他无法以圣道之慧如实了知——既不能从真实自性的特征(即逼迫、造作、热恼、变异的特征)来了知,也不能从生起的次第来了知。“在其余诸缘和合时”,就是生起、产生;而这个生起即是集(谛),因其属于流转轮回的体性,故说“是流转之苦的能生者”,意为能令苦谛生起者。所谓以真实自性的特征如实了知,即是从“无间断”的作用,以及从“结集、作为因、结合、障碍”这些特征来如实了知。显示巴利原文
Yasmā pucchāyaṃ byāpanicchānayena ‘‘duppañño duppañño’’ti āmeḍitavasena vuttaṃ, tasmā dhammasenāpati pucchitamatthaṃ vissajjento pucchāsabhāgena ‘‘nappajānāti nappajānātī’’ti āmeḍitavasenevāha. Tattha iti-saddo kāraṇatthoti dassento ‘‘yasmā nappajānāti, tasmā duppaññotivuccatī’’ti āha. Idaṃ dukkhanti idaṃ upādānakkhandhapañcakaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ. Tañca kho ruppanaṃ vediyanaṃ sañjānanaṃ abhisaṅkharaṇaṃ vijānananti saṅkhepato ettakaṃ. Ito uddhaṃ kiñci dhammajātaṃ dukkhaṃ ariyasaccaṃ nāma natthīti yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇato pavattikkamato ceva pīḷanasaṅkhatasantāpavipariṇāmalakkhaṇato ca yathābhūtaṃ ariyamaggapaññāya nappajānāti. Avasesapaccayasamāgame udayati uppajjati, svāyaṃ samudayo saṃsārapavattibhāvenāti āha ‘‘pavattidukkhapabhāvikā’’ti, dukkhasaccassa uppādikāti attho. Yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇatoti yathābhūtaṃ anupacchedakaraṇarasato ceva sampiṇḍananidānasaṃyogapalibodhalakkhaṇato ca.
“达到名为如此的状态”是指依靠这个名为“不再转起”的因。“寂灭”是指通过不再生起的寂灭而止息,因此说“这两者都不再转起”。所谓以真实自性的特征如实了知,就是从“不离去”的作用,以及从“出离、远离、无为、不死”这些特征来如实了知。“此是道”:这是以正见等为开端、以和合为特征的道,因为循着它前行,所以称为“道”。“导向苦灭”:通过作证现观的方式,朝着苦灭——也就是涅槃——而去,并为此而发动修行。所谓以真实自性的特征如实了知,就是从“断除烦恼”的作用,以及从“出离、见因、增上”这些特征来如实了知。在紧接着的一轮,即第二轮中。依此理趣,即是按照第一轮所说“这是苦,这有这许多苦”等那样的方式。因为在那里,是说明劣慧者的情形,以否定了知的方式而宣说;而在这里,则是说明具慧者的情形,以肯定了知的方式而宣说,这就是两者之间的差别。在此处,指的就是这第二轮。显示巴利原文
Idaṃ nāma ṭhānaṃ patvāti idaṃ nāma appavattikāraṇaṃ āgamma. Nirujjhatīti anuppādanirodhavasena nirujjhati, tenāha ‘‘ubhinnaṃ appavattī’’ti. Yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇatoti yathābhūtaṃ accutirasato ceva nissaraṇavivekāsaṅkhatāmatalakkhaṇato ca. Ayaṃ paṭipadāti ayaṃ sammādiṭṭhiādikā samodhānalakkhaṇā paṭipajjati etāyāti paṭipadā. Dukkhanirodhaṃ gacchatīti dukkhanirodhaṃ nibbānaṃ sacchikiriyābhisamayavasena gacchati ārabbha pavattati. Yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇatoti yathābhūtaṃ kilesappahānakaraṇasarasato ceva niyyānahetudassanādhipateyyalakkhaṇato ca nappajānāti. Anantaravāreti dutiyavāre. Imināva nayenāti ‘‘idaṃ dukkhaṃ, ettakaṃ dukkha’’ntiādinā paṭhamavāre vuttanayena. Tattha hi duppaññaniddesattā pajānanapaṭikkhepavasena desanā āgatā, idha paññavantaniddesattā pajānanavasenāti ayameva viseso. Etthāti dutiyavāre.
“听闻”是指通过听闻业处而学习,亦即以教典的听闻为入门,领会其义理。“除却渴爱”等语句,便是显示这种学习方式的一个例子。“专注”是指依内观投入的方式专一心志,从而确立内观业处。它并不朝向“转起”去专注,因为在转起上的专注不属于其领域,故不会发生。“这位”即是指修习四圣谛业处的那位。显示巴利原文
Savanatoti kammaṭṭhānassa savanato uggaṇhāti. Ganthasavanamukhena hi tadatthassa uggahaṇaṃ. Ṭhapetvā taṇhantiādi tassa uggahaṇākāranidassanaṃ. Abhinivisatīti vipassanābhinivesavasena abhinivisati vipassanākammaṭṭhānaṃ paṭṭhapeti. No vivaṭṭeti vivaṭṭe abhiniveso na hoti avisayattā. Ayanti catusaccakammaṭṭhāniko.
“五蕴”即五取蕴。尽管可以从眼门、受门等多种角度对蕴进行内观投入,但为了让人们容易修习、容易理解,所以说“通过界业处之门而入”,以四界为入门方法来显示它。“确定了色”,就是以“被恼坏”的含义,认定它为“色”,将它与其他不同性质的事物区分开来。“以彼为所缘而转起者”是指那些以色为所缘而生起的心理活动。“确定了名”,就是以“朝向、弯曲”的含义,认定受、想、行、识这四类法为“名”。如同劈开一对多罗树干那样,将这个成对的东西劈开之后,便能确定:“这是非色,这是色”——唯有这二类法,其中不存在任何所谓的“我”或“我所”。如此来确定、分离、彻知名色。至此,便显示了见清净。然而,这个名色并非没有原因。因为一切法在一切处、一切时都不是恒常存在的,所以它是有因的。那么,是由怎样的因造成的呢?并非由大自在天等不正确的因造成。至于此处应进一步说明的内容,应依据《清净道论注》中所说的道理来理解。正因为它是有因的,所以它也是有缘的。那些缘即是无明等,也就是无明、渴爱、取、业、食这些缘。如此,按照前面所说……显示巴利原文
Pañcakkhandhāti pañcupādānakkhandhā. Khandhavasena vipassanābhinivesassa cakkhādivasena vedanādivasena ca satipi anekavidhatte sukaraṃ suviññeyyanti catudhātumukhena taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘dhātukammaṭṭhānavasena otaritvā’’ti āha. Rūpanti vavatthapetīti ruppanaṭṭhena rūpanti asaṅkarato paricchindati. Tadārammaṇāti taṃ rūpaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattanakā. Nāmanti vedanādicatukkaṃ namanaṭṭhena nāmanti vavatthāpeti. Yamakatālakkhandhaṃ bhindanto viya yamakaṃ bhinditvā ‘‘arūpaṃ, rūpañcā’’ti dveva ime dhammā, na ettha koci attā vā attaniyaṃ vāti nāmarūpaṃ vavatthapeti paricchindati pariggaṇhāti. Ettāvatā diṭṭhivisuddhi dassitā. Taṃ panetaṃ nāmarūpaṃ na ahetukaṃ. Yasmā sabbaṃ sabbattha sabbadā ca natthi, tasmā sahetukaṃ. Kīdisena hetunā? Na issarādivisamahetunā. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (visuddhi. mahāṭī. 2.447) vuttanayena gahetabbaṃ. Sahetukattā eva sapaccayaṃ. Avijjādayoti avijjātaṇhupādānakammāhārādayo. Evanti ‘‘taṃ paneta’’ntiādinā vuttappakārena avijjādike paccaye ceva rūpavedanādike paccayuppannadhamme ca vavatthapetvā paricchinditvā pariggahetvā. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘avijjāsamudayā rūpasamudayo, taṇhāsamudayā rūpasamudayo’’ti (paṭi. ma. 1.50). Ettāvatā kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhiṃ dasseti.
“存在之后”是指在因缘和合中生起之后。“以非有之义”,是指随即坏灭的意义。“无常”即是无常、不稳固。所谓“将无常相安置”,就是将名为“无常性”的共相安立在那些五蕴之上。从那之后,是指从安置无常相之后;或者,从那种无常的状态之后。“以生灭相逼恼之行相”,是以生生灭灭屡屡逼恼的行相为因,而成为苦、不可爱,或者其本身就是苦。“以不受操控之行相”,是指不随任何人的意愿而运作的行相。“无我”,意指五蕴不是我,五蕴中也没有我,故称无我。“安置三相后”即是如此——因为无常者是苦,苦者又是无我——在五蕴上安立了这三种共相之后。“如理作意者”,即因生灭智的生起,舍弃了已生起的内观随烦恼,确立了道与非道的区别,随后依循生灭智等内观修习的次第,对诸行作如理作意,在种姓智之后,证得出世间道。显示巴利原文
Hutvāti hetupaccayasamavāye uppajjitvā. Abhāvaṭṭhenāti tadanantarameva vinassanaṭṭhena. Aniccāti aniccā addhuvā. Aniccalakkhaṇaṃ āropetīti tesu pañcasu khandhesu aniccatāsaṅkhātaṃ sāmaññalakkhaṇaṃ niropeti. Tatoti aniccalakkhaṇāropanato paraṃ, tato vā aniccabhāvato. Udayabbayappaṭipīḷanākārenāti uppādanirodhehi pati pati abhikkhaṇaṃ pīḷanākārena hetunā dukkhā aniṭṭhā, dukkhamā vā. Avasavattanākārenāti kassaci vasena avasavattanākārena. Anattāti na sayaṃ attā, nāpi nesaṃ koci attā atthīti anattāti. Tilakkhaṇaṃāropetvāti evaṃ aniccassa dukkhabhāvato, dukkhassa ca anattabhāvato khandhapañcake tividhampi sāmaññalakkhaṇaṃ āropetvā. Sammasantoti udayabbayañāṇuppattiyā uppanne vipassanupakkilese pahāya maggāmaggaṃ vavatthapetvā udayabbayañāṇādivipassanāpaṭipāṭiyā saṅkhāre sammasanto gotrabhuñāṇānantaraṃ lokuttaramaggaṃ pāpuṇāti.
「单凭一通彻而通彻」是指以同一智慧而通达。「通彻」即因无所障碍,故于所缘境中无执而行,是谓透彻通达。「现观」指无错谬地证得,即是觉悟。如理了知“这是苦,这些就是苦,没有比此更超出的”并加以确定,即是如前所说的「了知通彻」,也就是遍知通彻。这是就智慧生起之后,对苦等自性的确定不再有迷乱的运行方式而言的,并非说道智有“这是苦”等的运行,故说“而在他那个刹那……”。对于已断除的,不再有可断除性,即把烦恼彻底断除、舍弃、根绝,这就是「断除」;断除本身依前述方式即是通彻,故称「断除通彻」。这也是指,若某一烦恼不被断除,道之修习便不可能存在;若道之修习不存在,彼烦恼就可能生起;智慧在打击它、使其成为不再生起之法的运行中,由于无所障碍而无所执著地运作,依此而言。「体证」是现量的亲证,指舍弃传闻、思构等方式之后,纯粹以自性作为所缘,确定“彼即是此”,即如其真实状态而得把握;体证本身依前述显示巴利原文
Ekapaṭivedhenāti ekeneva ñāṇena paṭivijjhanena. Paṭivedho paṭighātābhāvena visaye nissaṅgacārasaṅkhātaṃ nibbijjhanaṃ. Abhisamayo avirajjhitvā adhigamanasaṅkhāto avabodho. ‘‘Idaṃ dukkhaṃ, ettaṃ dukkhaṃ, na ito bhiyyo’’ti paricchinditvā yāthāvato jānanameva vuttanayena paṭivedhoti pariññāpaṭivedho, idañca yathā ñāṇe pavatte pacchā dukkhassa sarūpādiparicchede sammoho na hoti, tathā pavattiṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ, na pana maggañāṇassa ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’ntiādinā pavattanato. Tenāha ‘‘tasmiñcassa khaṇe’’tiādi. Pahīnassa puna apahātabbatāya pakaṭṭhaṃ hānaṃ cajanaṃ samucchindanaṃ pahānaṃ, pahānameva vuttanayena paṭivedhoti pahānapaṭivedho. Ayampi yena kilesena appahīyamānena maggabhāvanāya na bhavitabbaṃ, asati ca maggabhāvanāya yo uppajjeyya, tassa padaghātaṃ karontassa anuppattidhammataṃ āpādentassa ñāṇassa tathāpavattiyā paṭighātābhāvena nissaṅgacāraṃ upādāya evaṃ vutto. Sacchikiriyā paccakkhakaraṇaṃ anussavākāraparivitakkādike muñcitvāva sarūpato ārammaṇakaraṇaṃ ‘‘idaṃ ta’’nti yāthāvasabhāvato gahaṇaṃ, sā eva vuttanayena paṭivedhoti sacchikiriyāpaṭivedho. Ayampi yassa āvaraṇassa asamucchindanato ñāṇaṃ nirodhaṃ ālambituṃ na sakkoti, tassa samucchindanato taṃ sarūpato vibhāvitameva pavattatīti evaṃ vutto.
「修习」即是令生起与令增长。在初道,以令生起之义称为修习;在第二道等,以令增长之义称为修习;当知二种情况中亦可二义兼具。因为初道也能随宜地使至出起观中的遍知等得到增长,故于此亦可理解为增长为义的修习。在第二道等中,由于断除了尚未断除的烦恼,以及对其他修行者而言修习得以生起,故也有以令生起为义的修习。修习本身依前述方式即是通彻,故称「修习通彻」。这也是就智慧生起之后,对道法自性的确定不再有迷乱的运行方式而说的。且不说那些已被证得的道法,即使在如其运行的果上,这位尚在有学位的圣者,也如同于所证得的谛法一般,完全离于迷乱。因此说:“他见法、得法、知法、入法”。正如其法被阐明一般,依于所证得的谛法,在道心路过程之后,对道、果、已断烦恼、余烦恼以及涅槃的省察便即运作。因为苦谛法即是身见等烦恼。此义在“以遍知现观”等处应当详说。从作用上说,即从无迷乱之义而言。关于“以灭为所缘”,这里的显示巴利原文
Bhāvanā uppādanā vaḍḍhanā ca. Tattha paṭhamamagge uppādanaṭṭhena bhāvanā, dutiyādīsu vaḍḍhanaṭṭhena, ubhayatthāpi vā ubhayaṃ veditabbaṃ. Paṭhamamaggopi hi yathārahaṃ vuṭṭhānagāminiyaṃ pavattaṃ parijānanādiṃ vaḍḍhento pavattoti tatthāpi vaḍḍhanaṭṭhena bhāvanāti sakkā viññātuṃ. Dutiyādīsupi appahīnakilesappahānato puggalantarasādhanato ca uppādanaṭṭhena bhāvanā, sā eva vuttanayena paṭivedhoti bhāvanāpaṭivedho. Ayampi yathā ñāṇe pavatte pacchā maggadhammānaṃ sarūpaparicchede sammoho na hoti, tathā pavattiṃ gahetvā vutto. Tiṭṭhantu tāva yathādhigatā maggadhammā, yathāpavattesu phalesupi ayaṃ yathādhigatasaccadhammesu viya vigatasammohova hoti sekkhopi samāno. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘diṭṭhadhammo pattadhammo viditadhammo pariyogāḷhadhammo’’ti (mahāva. 27). Yathā cassa dhammā tāsaṃ jotitā yathādhigatasaccadhammāvalambiniyo maggavīthito parato maggaphalapahīnāvasiṭṭhakilesanibbānānaṃ paccavekkhaṇā pavattanti. Dukkhasaccadhammā hi sakkāyadiṭṭhiādayo. Ayañca atthavaṇṇanā pariññābhisamayenātiādīsupi vibhāvetabbā. Kiccatoti asammohato. Nirodhaṃ ārammaṇatoti ettha ‘‘ārammaṇatopī’’ti pi-saddo luttaniddiṭṭho daṭṭhabbo nirodhepi asammohapaṭivedhassa labbhanato. Etassāti catusaccakammaṭṭhānikassa puggalassa.
此处所说的「有慧者」,是依其无歧义地具足智慧之特质而如此简别的。就「文句」而言,指经典文本;就「义理」而言,指注疏的解释;就「连结」而言,指每一经中各部分的关联;就「前后关系」而言,是以前分与后分相互协调。于此,可依结集之次序来理解前后关系,或于一一教示中,以它前分与后分相协调的方式来理解。「识行者」是指以识为行、以审察为行之人,即对三藏佛语广泛推度并行持者。若人未具备由圣道所生的智慧,就不应真实地被称为「有慧者」。“今日今时就证得阿拉汉果”,意指短暂、极其迅速,这是此处的意旨。然而,因其尚有“有学”这一同义语,故仍可归于「有慧者」这一方。不过,经中只说通彻,因为经文是依谛的现观而说的。显示巴利原文
Paññavāti niddiṭṭho nippariyāyato paññavantatāya idha adhippetattā. Pāḷitoti dhammato. Atthatoti aṭṭhakathāto. Anusandhitoti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ sutte taṃtaṃanusandhito. Pubbāparatoti pubbenāparassa saṃsandanato. Saṅgītikkamena cettha pubbāparatā veditabbā. Taṃtaṃdesanāyameva vā pubbabhāgena aparabhāgassa saṃsandanato. Viññāṇacaritoti vijānanacarito vīmaṃsanacarito tepiṭake buddhavacane vicāraṇācāravepullato. Paññavāti na vattabbo maggenāgatāya paññāya abhāvato. Ajja ajjeva arahattanti ittaraṃ atikhippamevāti adhippāyo. Paññavāpakkhaṃ bhajati sekkhapariyāyasabbhāvato. Sutte pana paṭivedhova kathito saccābhisamayavasena āgatattā.
“此”是指紧接着所说的那位圣者。“造业之心”:指能够生起修行业的心。“他也了知乐受”——是谁在感受?这是谁的受?为何有受?他正是透过把握“无有受者”的角度,如实从自相、集、灭、味、过患等方面来辨别、把握乐受,这才称为“了知乐受”。其余两句(苦受、不苦不乐受)的解说方式也是如此。由于“念处”一词已标示了念处的论题,因此应借着那个论题来理解此处的意义;所以这部复注中所说的道理,也应当依这样的方式去理解。虽然此识也能了知受以外的所缘,但紧接着的段落已显示观是缘色而入的;因此,此处是为显示缘无色而入,又或者依于提问者的意乐,而用“他也了知乐受”等语句来加以说明。显示巴利原文
Esāti anantare vutto ariyapuggalo. Kammakārakacittanti bhāvanākammassa pavattanakacittaṃ . Sukhavedanampi vijānātīti ko vediyati, kassa vedanā, kiṃkāraṇā vedanā, sopi kassaci abhāvaggahaṇamukhena sukhaṃ vedanaṃ sabhāvato samudayato atthaṅgamato assādato ādīnavato ca yathābhūtaṃ paricchindanto pariggaṇhanto sukhaṃ vedanaṃ vijānāti nāma. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Yasmā ‘‘satipaṭṭhāne’’ti iminā satipaṭṭhānakathaṃ upalakkheti. Tāya hi tadattho veditabbo, tasmā taṃsaṃvaṇṇanāyampi (dī. ni. ṭī. 2.380) vuttanayena tassattho veditabbo . Kāmañcetaṃ viññāṇaṃ vedanāto aññampi ārammaṇaṃ vijānāti, anantaravāre pana rūpamukhena vipassanābhinivesassa dassitattā idha arūpamukhena dassetuṃ ‘‘sukhantipi vijānātī’’tiādinā niddiṭṭhaṃ, pucchantassa vā ajjhāsayavasena.
“相结合”:即相应。因此说“以同生等特征,即结合之义”。“不结合”:即不相应。“破坏后”:即以见一地对另一地的方式破坏后,或混合后。问结合性:即问包含在该心生起中的五种识的结合性。若如此,对不结合性既无怀疑,又何来提问的余地?并非如此,因为在不同心生起中的道慧与道识、观慧与观识等,有混合式的结合性可得。“令脱离”:即使它们彼此分离。说“无法显示其差别”,是就结合性本身而言,并非指自性上的差别;若从自性差别来看,它们的差别是极为明显的。因此说“或从所缘,或从依处,或从生起,或从灭”。接着,为了以境的差别清楚地显示那自性差别,而说“然而他们”等。“境”:即活动之处、为主的范围,因此心与慧在处处被称为先行者。显示巴利原文
Saṃsaṭṭhāti sampayuttā. Tenāha ‘‘ekuppādādilakkhaṇena saṃyogaṭṭhenā’’ti. Visaṃsaṭṭhāti vippayuttā. Bhinditvāti aññabhūmikassa aññabhūmidassaneneva vināsetvā, saṃbhinditvā vā. Saṃsaṭṭhabhāvaṃ pucchatīti taṃcittuppādapariyāpannānaṃ pañcaviññāṇānaṃ saṃsaṭṭhabhāvaṃ pucchati. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ pucchāya avasaro visaṃsaṭṭhabhāvāsaṅkāya eva abhāvato? Na, cittuppādantaragatānaṃ maggapaññāmaggaviññāṇānaṃ vipassanāpaññāvipassanāviññāṇānañca vomissakasaṃsaṭṭhabhāvassa labbhamānattā. Vinivaṭṭetvāti aññamaññato vivecetvā. Nānākaraṇaṃ dassetuṃ na sakkāti idaṃ kevalaṃ saṃsaṭṭhabhāvameva sandhāya vuttaṃ, na sabhāvabhedaṃ, sabhāvabhedato pana nānākaraṇaṃ nesaṃ pākaṭameva. Tenāha ‘‘ārammaṇato vā vatthuto vā uppādato vā nirodhato vā’’ti. Idāni tameva sabhāvabhedaṃ visayabhedena suṭṭhu pākaṭaṃ katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘tesaṃ tesaṃ panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Visayoti pavattiṭṭhānaṃ issariyabhūmi, yena cittapaññānaṃ tattha tattha pubbaṅgamatā vuccati.
虽然观也是以慧之力而作用,道也与识俱行,并非单独;然而,在世间法中,心是主要的,因为它以承担重荷的形态而存在。正是如此,心被称为“六门之主、王”(《法句经注》)。同样地,在出世间法中,慧是主要的,因为摧破敌对法特别依赖慧,正如在道法中,正见首先被标举出来。而且,这是依它们于境上的现行差别而如此安立的。这种安立方式不仅由长老们所显示,也由世尊所显示。为阐明这一点,他说:“正自觉者也是如此”等。在没有慧的地方,以心提问是无可言说的,如“比丘,你以何心”等。然而,在有慧的地方,也有以心阐明的情况,如“他将心安住于内、令寂止、令专一、令等持”,以及“在何时,欲界善心生起”等。但在注疏中,为了以对比的方式显示——世间法中以心策励,出世间法中以慧策励,而说“比丘,你证得了什么慧”等。应知这是依多数情况而说。的确,有些地方世间法也以慧为首而解说,如“初禅获得者,与欲俱之想、作意现前,是退分慧”等;也有以想为首而解说,如“肿胀想,或其余色界、无色界想,这些法是同义还是异义”等。同样地,出世间法在某些地方也以心为首而解说。显示巴利原文
Kāmañca vipassanāpi paññāvaseneva kiccakārī, maggopi viññāṇasahitova, na kevalo, yathā pana lokiyadhammesu cittaṃ padhānaṃ tatthassa dhorayhabhāvena pavattisabbhāvato. Tathā hi taṃ ‘‘chadvārādhipati rājā’’ti (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 2.181) vuccati, evaṃ lokuttaradhammesu paññā padhānā paṭipakkhavidhamanassa visesato tadadhīnattā. Tathā hi maggadhamme sammādiṭṭhi eva paṭhamaṃ gahitā. Ayañca nesaṃ visayavasena pavattibhedo, tathā ca paññāpanavidhi na kevalaṃ thereheva dassito, apica kho bhagavatāpi dassitoti vibhāvento ‘‘sammāsambuddhopī’’tiādimāha. Yattha paññā na labbhati, tattha cittavasena pucchane vattabbameva natthi yathā ‘‘kiṃcitto tvaṃ bhikkhū’’tiādīsu (pārā. 132-135). Yattha pana paññā labbhati, tatthāpi cittavasena jotanā hoti yathā – ‘‘ajjhattameva cittaṃ saṇṭhapeti sannisādeti ekodiṃ karoti samādahati (saṃ. ni. 4.332), yasmiṃ samaye kāmāvacaraṃ kusalaṃ cittaṃ uppannaṃ hotī’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 1). Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana lokiyadhammesu cittavasena, lokuttaradhammesu paññāvasena codanaṃ byatirekamukhena dassetuṃ ‘‘katamā te bhikkhu paññā adhigatā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yebhuyyavasena cetaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā hi katthaci lokiyadhammā paññāsīsenapi niddisīyanti – ‘‘paṭhamassa jhānassa lābhino kāmasahagatā saññāmanasikārā samudācaranti hānabhāginī paññā’’tiādīsu (paṭi. ma. 1.1). Saññāsīsenapi – ‘‘uddhumātakasaññāti vā sesarūpārūpasaññāti vā ime dhammā ekatthā, udāhu nānatthā’’tiādīsu (pārā. aṭṭha. 45.padabhājanīyavaṇṇanā). Tathā lokuttaradhammāpi katthaci cittasīsena niddisīyanti – ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye lokuttaraṃ cittaṃ bhāvetī’’ti (dha. sa. 277), tathā phassādisīsenapi – ‘‘yasmiṃ samaye lokuttaraṃ phassaṃ bhāveti, vedanaṃ saññaṃ cetanaṃ bhāvetī’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 277).
“于四入流支中”:即亲近善士、听闻正法、如理作意、法随法行这四种入流道的因中。虽在这些支中,念等法也同样必要——离了它们,这些支便无法成立;然而在此,应知信的作用尤为突出。正是由于信,才亲近善士、听闻正法、如理作意、随顺圣道而修行,故说“此处应见信根”。依此理,其余诸根之义也应如此理解。“于四正勤中”,即修习四种正勤时。“于四念处中”等,亦同此理。于此,正如于入流支中信那般,于修习正勤中精进那般,于修习念处时——“具念者,于世间的贪与忧得以调伏”——在前行阶段,从作用上说,念应被视为更主要。同样地,对以定为业处者,定更为主要;依“修习圣谛即修习慧”之说,于彼处,慧于前行阶段更为主要——此义明显。然而,在证得刹那,如同定与慧,信等一切根都须达到平衡状态。正如“此处信根”等,处处使用了“此处”一词。“如是”,即指诸根平衡等状态。“唯于各自的境中”,即各各于自己的所缘中。“世间、出世间法已被解说”,即世间法与出世间法依各自的现行差别而得到阐明。也就是说:当信等五根共同运作时。显示巴利原文
Catūsu sotāpattiyaṅgesūti sappurisasevanā, saddhammassavanaṃ, yonisomanasikāro, dhammānudhammapaṭipattīti imesu catūsu sotāpattimaggassa kāraṇesu. Kāmaṃ cetesu satiādayopi dhammā icchitabbāva tehi vinā tesaṃ asambhavato, tathāpi cettha saddhā visesato kiccakārīti veditabbā. Saddo eva hi sappurise payirupāsati, saddhammaṃ suṇāti, yoniso ca manasi karoti, ariyamaggassa ca anudhammaṃ paṭipajjati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘ettha saddhindriyaṃ daṭṭhabba’’nti. Iminā nayena sesindriyesupi attho daṭṭhabbo. Catūsu sammappadhānesūti catubbidhasammappadhānabhāvanāya. Catūsu satipaṭṭhānesūtiādīsupi eseva nayo. Ettha ca sotāpattiyaṅgesu saddhā viya sammappadhānabhāvanāya vīriyaṃ viya ca satipaṭṭhānabhāvanāya – ‘‘satimā vineyya loke abhijjhādomanassa’’nti (dī. ni. 2.373; ma. ni. 1.106; saṃ. ni. 5.384, 407) vacanato pubbabhāge kiccato sati adhikā icchitabbā. Evaṃ samādhikammikassa samādhi, ‘‘ariyasaccabhāvanā paññābhāvanā’’ti katvā tattha paññā pubbabhāge adhikā icchitabbāti pākaṭoyamattho, adhigamakkhaṇe pana samādhipaññānaṃ viya sabbesampi indriyānaṃ saddhādīnaṃ samarasatāva icchitabbā. Tathā hi ‘‘ettha saddhindriya’’ntiādinā tattha tattha etthaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Evanti yaṃ ṭhānaṃ, taṃ indriyasamattādiṃ paccāmasati. Savisayasmiṃyevāti attano attano visaye eva. Lokiyalokuttarā dhammā kathitāti lokiyadhammā lokuttaradhammā ca tena tena pavattivisesena kathitā. Idaṃ vuttaṃ hoti – saddhāpañcamesu indriyesu saha pavattamānesu tattha tattha visaye saddhādīnaṃ kiccādhikatāya tassa tasseva daṭṭhabbatā vuttā, na sabbesaṃ. Evaṃ aññepi lokiyalokuttarā dhammā yathāsakaṃ visaye pavattivisesavasena bodhitāti.
今为以譬喻阐明信等诸根在各自场合的增上作用,而说“犹如有”等。此处譬喻与法义的结合如此:五根犹如以国王为第五位的同伴,是令解脱成熟的因素。如同他们为嬉戏而一起走上街道,诸根也一起进入观的道。如同同伴中第一位等仅在自己家中走动,信等诸根在证得入流支等后,成为先行者。如同其余同伴在各处保持沉默,其余诸根也仅随顺而行——此即随顺作为先行者的根的作用。因为那时,它们的作用不会像具备了必要成分的地大等对于水大等的作用那般明显,反倒是只有信等根的作用鲜明地保持着,由于此前的心相续已被那样的因缘所塑造。而且于此,为显示修观者的修行特以慧为最上,故以国王为例说明“慧根”。“如是”等语,是对所证得意义的总结。显示巴利原文
Idāni saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ tattha tattha atirekakiccataṃ upamāya vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tatridaṃ upamāsaṃsandanaṃ rājapañcamā sahāyā viya vimuttiparipācakāni pañcindriyāni. Nesaṃ kīḷanatthaṃ ekajjhaṃ vīthiotaraṇaṃ viya indriyānaṃ ekajjhaṃ vipassanāvīthiotaraṇaṃ. Sahāyesu paṭhamādīnaṃ yathāsakageheva vicāraṇā viya saddhādīnaṃ sotāpattiaṅgādīni patvā pubbaṅgamatā. Sahāyesu itaresaṃ tattha tattha tuṇhībhāvo viya sesindriyānaṃ tattha tattha tadanvayatā. Tassa pubbaṅgamabhūtassa indriyassa kiccānugatatā. Na hi tadā tesaṃ sasambhārapathavīādīsu āpādīnaṃ viya kiccaṃ pākaṭaṃ hoti, saddhādīnaṃyeva pana kiccaṃ vibhūtaṃ hutvā tiṭṭhati puretaraṃ tathāpaccayehi cittasantānassa abhisaṅkhatattā. Ettha ca vipassanākammikassa bhāvanā visesato paññuttarāti dassanatthaṃ rājānaṃ nidassanaṃ katvā paññindriyaṃ vuttaṃ. Itītiādi yathādhigatassa atthassa nigamanaṃ.
“道识亦”:即与圣道俱行、趋向舍离的识,也同样如此。“它也那样了知它”:即依“这是苦”等方式如实了知谛法,因为它是同一心识刹那所含摄,且随顺于道。“它所了知”一句中,这里所指的了知与遍知,是观的心识刹那所含摄的,而非如“它所遍知”那句那样,是道的心识刹那所含摄的。因此,注释说:“凡是行所摄”等。“也一样”:即以“无常”等方式。由于被同一心识刹那所含摄,且在观修状态下,它们以相同的缘一起生起,这就是“同生”;也正因此,它们一起在同一处同时灭去,这就是“同灭”;依止同一依处而生起,这就是“同依处”;缘取同一所缘而生起,这就是“同所缘”。这里的“以”是表原因的工具格。藉由“以同生等状态”,来证成它们“相结合”的状态。而且,这是一种无余的涵盖,除此之外,其他三种相应的特征自然也完全具备。显示巴利原文
Maggaviññāṇampīti ariyamaggasahagataṃ apacayagāmiviññāṇampi. Tatheva taṃ vijānātīti saccadhammaṃ ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’ntiādinā nayeneva vijānāti ekacittuppādapariyāpannattā maggānukūlattā ca. Yaṃ vijānātīti ettha vijānanapajānanāni vipassanācittuppādapariyāpannāni adhippetāni, na ‘‘yaṃ pajānātī’’ti ettha viya maggacittuppādapariyāpannāti āha ‘‘yaṃ saṅkhāragata’’ntiādi. Tathevāti ‘‘anicca’’ntiādinā nayena. Ekacittuppādapariyāpannattā vipassanābhāvato ca samānapaccayehi saha pavattikatā ekuppādatā, tato eva ekajjhaṃ saheva nirujjhanaṃ ekanirodhatā, ekaṃyeva vatthuṃ nissāya pavatti ekavatthukatā, ekaṃyeva ārammaṇaṃ ārabbha pavatti ekārammaṇatā. Hetumhi cetaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ. Tena ekuppādāditāya saṃsaṭṭhabhāvaṃ sādheti. Anavasesapariyādānañcetaṃ, ito tīhipi sampayuttalakkhaṇaṃ hotiyeva.
这是就道慧而说。道慧确实应当修习,不应对它作遍知;然而,由于慧是应修习的,与它相应的法也随之成为同一趣向,故说“然而与彼相应”等。虽然观慧依修习而生起时,与它相应的识也同样生起,但该识并未超越应被遍知的性质,所以称它为应被遍知的。由此而说:“凡是法住智,它也是灭法、坏灭法、离染法、灭尽法。”显示巴利原文
Maggapaññaṃsandhāya vuttaṃ, sā hi ekantato bhāvetabbā, na pariññeyyā, paññāya pana bhāvetabbatāya taṃsampayuttadhammāpi taggatikāva hontīti āha ‘‘taṃsampayuttaṃ panā’’tiādi. Kiñcāpi vipassanāpaññāya bhāvanāvasena pavattanato taṃsampayuttaviññāṇampi tatheva pavattati, tassa pana pariññeyyabhāvānativattanato pariññeyyatā vuttā. Tenevāha – ‘‘yampi taṃ dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ, tampi khayadhammaṃ vayadhammaṃ virāgadhammaṃ nirodhadhamma’’nti.
450 虽然如此(即以受的通称来统摄),但此处所说的“三地遍审察行之受”,是指属于三地的受——也就是成为遍审察智行境的受。如此说明,是为了利益同梵行者而作教说。因此才说“为欲度四瀑流者”等。对于慧,也是同样的道理。此处“乐”等词是以彼所缘为对象的;为依经证成此义,故说“而色”等。所谓“纯苦”,是指纯粹不可意的;正因为它具有苦的性质,所以称为苦。由于被执为所缘而追随苦受、沉入于苦,故说“苦所追随”、“苦所侵入”。应理解为“若不被乐所侵入”。此中“此非”的“非”只是一个助词。“当染著”的意思,是生起贪染。所谓“乐”,是指自性上是可意的。“由染著而结缚”,是说由于渴爱很浓,便会相应地以十种结而被结缚。“由结缚而染污”,是指由于这样的结缚,以渴爱等染污而受到染污、逼迫和热恼。“所缘”,是指依次将可意的、不可意的和中庸的所缘称为乐、苦和不苦不乐。如此无差别地显示了五取蕴作为乐等所缘之后,为了显示唯有受才是乐等所缘,所以又说“再者”等。这是根据大多数普通人的情况而说的,故说“以前面的乐受为所缘”。显示巴利原文
450.Evaṃ santepīti vedanāti evaṃ sāmaññaggahaṇe satipi. Tebhūmikasammasanacāravedanāvāti bhūmittayapariyāpannā, tato eva sammasanañāṇassa gocarabhūtā vedanā eva adhippetā sabrahmacārīnaṃ upakārāvahabhāvena desanāya āraddhattā. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘caturoghanittharaṇatthikāna’’ntiādi . Esa nayo paññāyapi. Idha sukhādisaddā tadārammaṇavisayāti imamatthaṃ suttena sādhetuṃ ‘‘rūpañca hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ekantadukkhanti ekanteneva aniṭṭhaṃ, tato eva dukkhamatāya dukkhaṃ. Ārammaṇakaraṇavasena dukkhavedanāya anupatitaṃ, otiṇṇañcāti dukkhānupatitaṃ, dukkhāvakkantaṃ. Sukhena anavakkantaṃ abhavissāti yojanā. Nayidanti ettha idanti nipātamattaṃ. Sārajjeyyunti sārāgaṃ uppādeyyuṃ. Sukhanti sabhāvato ca iṭṭhaṃ. Sārāgā saṃyujjantīti bahalarāgahetu yathārahaṃ dasahipi saṃyojanehi saṃyujjanti. Saṃyogā saṃkilissantīti tathā saṃyuttatāya taṇhāsaṃkilesādivasena saṃkilissanti, vibādhīyanti upatāpīyanti cāti attho. Ārammaṇanti iṭṭhaṃ, aniṭṭhaṃ, majjhattañca ārammaṇaṃ yathākkamaṃ sukhaṃ, dukkhaṃ, adukkhamasukhanti kathitaṃ. Evaṃ avisesena pañcapi khandhe sukhādiārammaṇabhāvena dassetvā idāni vedanā eva sukhādiārammaṇabhāvena dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pākatikapacurajanavasenāyaṃ kathitāti katvā ‘‘purimaṃ sukhaṃ vedanaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Visesalābhī pana anāgatampi sukhaṃ vedanaṃ ārammaṇaṃ karoteva. Vuttametaṃ satipaṭṭhānavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.380; ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.79). Vedanāya hi ārammaṇaṃ vediyantiyā taṃsamaṅgīpuggalo vedetīti vohāramattaṃ hoti.
所谓“一切想”,是指所有四地之想。“一切处想”,是指在一切心生起中活动的想。“或依处”中的“或”字,是含摄色界的意思。“令生起”,是指引导修习、近行或安止的生起。“生起的想”,也是指“青色是色,色所缘是青”这样生起的想。显示巴利原文
Sabbasaññāyāti sabbāyapi catubhūmikasaññāya. Sabbatthakasaññāyāti sabbasmiṃ cittuppāde pavattanakasaññāya. Vatthe vāti vā-saddena vaṇṇadhātuṃ saṅgaṇhāti . Pāpentoti bhāvanaṃ upacāraṃ vā appanaṃ vā upanento. Uppajjanakasaññāpīti ‘‘nīlaṃ rūpaṃ, rūpārammaṇaṃ nīla’’nti uppajjanakasaññāpi.
所谓“由不摄于一切”,即不被一切受、想、识所包含。“随转”,是指在纺成的线中,或在绕成的线团中,以缠绕的方式而住。“轮转等随转”,则是指如同线缠绕而成的轮转等那样随转。由于是散乱的,故不被执取;因为从此处开始,慧与识相应,受与想也相应。正是因为与它们相应结合,所以它们才了知同一个所缘。显示巴利原文
Asabbasaṅgāhikattāti sabbesaṃ vedanāsaññāviññāṇānaṃ asaṅgahitattā. Takkagatanti suttakantanakatakkamhi, suttavattanakatakkamhi vā veṭhanavasena ṭhitaṃ. Parivaṭṭakādigatanti suttaveṭhanaparivaṭṭakādigataṃ. Vissaṭṭhattāva na gahitā, yadaggena paññā viññāṇena saddhiṃ sampayogaṃ labhāpitā, tadaggena vedanāsaññāhipi sampayogaṃ labhāpitā evāti. Tadeva sañjānāti saṃsaṭṭhabhāvato.
在“想”(sañjānāti)、“识”(vijānāti)等词中,也应当把“慧”(pajānāti)一词引来讨论,因为后文将以了知的方式说明其差别。而“知”(jānāti)一词在此处虽已作为共相使用,但从义理上仍然应寻求其差别。因为词根有多义性,所以前缀词是以显明的方式,来界定动词与名词所表达的意义,而并非以能诠的方式。因此说“于彼知义中,亦当知有差别”。由此指出,想、识、慧这些词,在共同的知义中,各自依其特有的领域而安立。所以又说“想只是……”等。在“唯以了知为性”(sañjānanamattameva)中,“唯”(matta)一词以简别之义,排除了识与了知之相;“即”(eva)一词则决定:在任何时候,想中都没有这些差别。因此说“无常、苦”等。在那里,想连识的作用也不能达成,哪里能成办慧的作用呢?因此只说“不能达到相通达”,而并未说“不能令道现前”。显示巴利原文
Sañjānāti vijānātīti ettha ‘‘pajānātī’’ti padaṃ ānetvā vattabbaṃ pajānanavasenapi visesassa vakkhamānattā. Jānātīti ayaṃ saddo ca laddatoyevettha aviseso, atthato pana visesato icchitabbo. Anekatthattā hi dhātūnaṃ tena ākhyātapadena nāmapadena ca vuttamatthaṃ upasaggapadaṃ jotakabhāvena viseseti, na vācakabhāvena. Tenāha ‘‘tassapi jānanatthe viseso veditabbo’’ti . Etena saññāviññāṇapaññāpadāni antogadhajānanatthe yathāsakaṃ visiṭṭhavisaye ca niṭṭhānīti dasseti. Tenevāha ‘‘saññā hī’’tiādi. Sañjānanamattamevāti ettha matta-saddena visesanivattiatthena vijānanapajānanākāre nivatteti, eva-saddena kadācipi imissā te visesā natthevāti avadhāreti. Tenevāha ‘‘aniccaṃ dukkha’’ntiādi. Tattha viññāṇakiccampi kātuṃ asakkontī saññā kuto paññākiccaṃ kareyyāti ‘‘lakkhaṇapaṭivedhaṃ pāpetuṃ na sakkoti’’cceva vuttaṃ, na vuttaṃ ‘‘maggapātubhāva’’nti.
于所缘中生起的识,并不像想那样,仅以了知“蓝”、“黄”等粗略部分的方式生起,而是能够了知其中其他类似的差别,所以才说“识”(viññāṇa)等。那么,识如何能达到相通达呢?通过慧所指示的道路。因为,以相为所缘的观,在多次通达诸相之后,由于纯熟而变得熟悉,此时即使以智不相应的世间心也能生起观,犹如熟练背诵典籍的人,各处段落自然浮现,不须刻意留意一般。这里所说的“相通达”,只是指以相为所缘,并非真正的通达。“奋力后”(ussakkitvā),是指从生灭智等智的次第开始。“不能达到道现前”,是由于识具有不觉悟的性质。识也能了知所缘,但那是以觉知的方式,并非像想那样单纯地了知;同样,它也能达到相通达,但并非单纯地识别,而是在藉由自己与其他法共同的力量奋力之后,也能达到道现前。显示巴利原文
Ārammaṇe pavattamānaṃ viññāṇaṃ na saññā viya nīlapītādimattasañjānanavasena pavattati, atha kho tattha aññampi tādisaṃ visesaṃ jānantameva pavattatīti āha ‘‘viññāṇa’’ntiādi. Kathaṃ pana viññāṇaṃ lakkhaṇapaṭivedhaṃ pāpetīti? Paññāya dassitamaggena. Lakkhaṇārammaṇikavipassanāya hi anekavāraṃ lakkhaṇāni paṭivijjhitvā pavattamānāya paguṇabhāvato paricayavasena ñāṇavippayuttacittenapi vipassanā sambhavati, yathā taṃ paguṇassa ganthassa ajjhayane tattha tattha gatāpi vārā na upadhārīyanti. ‘‘Lakkhaṇapaṭivedha’’nti ca lakkhaṇānaṃ ārammaṇakaraṇamattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na paṭivijjhanaṃ. Ussakkitvāti udayabbayañāṇādiñāṇapaṭipāṭiyā ārabhitvā. Maggapātubhāvaṃ pāpetuṃ na sakkoti asambodhasabhāvattā. Ārammaṇampi sañjānāti avabujjhanavaseneva, na sañjānanamattena. Tathā lakkhaṇapaṭivedhampi pāpeti, na vijānanamattena, attano pana aññāsādhāraṇena ānubhāvena ussakkitvā maggapātubhāvampi pāpeti.
现在,为了用譬喻阐明上述义理,所以说“犹如……”等。其中,“稚慧者”(ajātabuddhī)是指尚未生起世间分别智慧的人。“受用与资具”(upabhogaparibhoga)指适合受用的物品,也就是有能力获得受用物与资具的众生。“伪币”(kūṭa)是指伪造的迦阿波那,以铜、青铜等制成。“精明者”(cheka)指大商人。“贸易者”(karata)指中等商人。“柔和者”(saṇha)指性格温和的商人。“以”(iti)字是等取词,由此包含了步行商人、小商人、中等商人等。当他鉴别货币时,即使见到形状……乃至……知道是某位师傅所造,这都因为他善巧掌握了金匠的学问。这些是对应譬喻的关联。因为想不作详细分别,只是以总体的方式执取对象,所以说它如同孩童看迦阿波那。识有能力执取对象中的部分差别,所以说它如同乡下人看迦阿波那。慧则能毫无遗漏地觉知对象的一切,所以说它如同金匠看迦阿波那。“这些”(nesa)指的是想、识、慧。“差别”是指自性上的差别。“甚深难通达”是指以本性的智慧难以通达,由此显示出它们的极其微细。显示巴利原文
Idāni yathāvuttamatthaṃ upamāya vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ajātabuddhīti asañjātabyavahārabuddhi. Upabhogaparibhoganti upabhogaparibhogārahaṃ, upabhogaparibhogavatthūnaṃ paṭilābhayogganti attho. Kūṭoti kahāpaṇapatirūpako tambakaṃsādimayo. Chekoti mahāsāro. Karatoti aḍḍhasāro. Saṇhoti mudujātiko samasāro. Iti-saddo ādiattho. Tena pādasāraparopādasāraaḍḍhasārādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Jānanto ca pana naṃ rūpaṃ disvāpi…pe… asukācariyena katotipi jānāti tathā heraññikaganthassa suggahitattā. Evamevantiādi upamāsaṃsandanaṃ. Saññāvibhāgaṃ akatvā piṇḍavaseneva ārammaṇassa gahaṇato dārakassa kahāpaṇadassanasadisā vuttā. Tathā hi sā yathāupaṭṭhitavisayapadaṭṭhānā vuccati. Viññāṇaṃ ārammaṇe ekaccavisesaggahaṇasamatthabhāvato gāmikapurisakahāpaṇadassanasadisaṃ vuttaṃ. Paññā pana ārammaṇe anavasesāvabodhato heraññikakahāpaṇadassanasadisā vuttā. Nesanti saññāviññāṇapaññānaṃ . Visesoti sabhāvaviseso. Duppaṭivijjho pakatipaññāya. Imināva nesaṃ accantasukhumataṃ dasseti.
“于同一所缘中转起者”,意思是它们都在同一个所缘中生起。以此通过显示它们不异境、不异时等,来阐明它们不可分离的特质,从而凸显其难通达性。“安立”是指不混杂地予以安置。“这是触……这是心”只是举例。或者,“以”(iti)字是等取词,由此应知摄受了其余诸法。“此”(ida)是对无色法的安立。“从彼”(tato)是指从所说的榨取芝麻油等方法。“如果还有更难的呢?那又如何?”这是一个提问,因此回答“然而,世尊……”等。显示巴利原文
Ekārammaṇe pavattamānānanti ekasmiṃyeva ārammaṇe pavattamānānaṃ. Tena abhinnavisayābhinnakālatādassanena avinibbhogavuttitaṃ vibhāvento duppaṭivijjhataṃyeva ulliṅgeti. Vavatthānanti asaṅkarato ṭhapanaṃ. Ayaṃ phasso…pe… idaṃ cittanti nidassanamattametaṃ. Iti-saddo vā ādiattho. Tena sesadhammānampi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Idanti arūpīnaṃ dhammānaṃ vavatthānakaraṇaṃ. Tatoti yaṃ vuttaṃ tilatelādiuddharaṇaṃ, tato. Yadi dukkarataraṃ, kathaṃ tanti āha ‘‘bhagavā panā’’tiādi.
451 “已脱离”(nissaṭa)指已经出离,不再相关联。“已弃舍”(pariccatta)指如同已弃舍一般,不再进入缘的状态,因为由缘而生起的关联已不存在。从格用来显示脱离,具格用来显示作者的含义。对于欲界意门心识,无法确切地说“这个属于某种五门所关联的心”;但色界心识并非如此,因此说它脱离了五种根门,故而说“以色界第四禅心”。之所以举出第四禅,是因为它正是无色界的近因。“清净”(parisuddha)指由于殊胜而无杂染。因为此心已远离随烦恼,所以特别清净。因此说“无随烦恼”。“应了知”(jānitabba)的“应知”(neyya),是指在自他相续中的这种殊胜功德,应当被了知、应当被觉悟,也应当令他人觉悟。或者,“应知”(neyya)是指应当在自身相续中将它引入、令它生起。因此说“能令它生起。因为安住于此者,其成就便能圆满”。“各别”(pāṭiyekka)指一一分别,是就逐一法而言。“由于没有执取”(abhinivesābhāvato)指在修观时不产生执取。“以聚行观”(kalāpato naya)指显示巴利原文
451.Nissaṭenāti nikkhantena ataṃsambandhena. Pariccattenāti pariccattasadisena paccayabhāvānupagamanena paccayuppannasambandhābhāvato. Nissakkavacanaṃ apādānadīpanato. Karaṇavacanaṃ kattuatthadīpanato. Kāmāvacaramanoviññāṇaṃ na niyamato ‘‘idaṃ nāma pañcadvārikāsambandhā’’ti sakkā vattuṃ, rūpāvacaraviññāṇaṃ pana na tathāti, tasseva pañcahi indriyehi nissaṭatā vuttāti āha ‘‘rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānacittenā’’ti. Catutthajjhānaggahaṇaṃ tasseva arūpāvacarassa padaṭṭhānabhāvato. Parisuddhenāti visesato asaṃkilesikattāva. Tañhi vigatūpakkilesatāya visesato parisuddhaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘nirupakkilesenā’’ti. Jānitabbaṃ neyyaṃ, saparasantānesu idaṃ atisayaṃ jānitabbato bujjhitabbaṃ bodhetabbaṃ vāti attho. Neyyanti vā attano santāne netabbaṃ pavattetabbanti attho. Tenāha ‘‘nibbattetuṃ sakkā hoti. Ettha ṭhitassa hi sā ijjhatī’’ti. Pāṭiyekkanti visuṃ visuṃ, anupadadhammavasenāti attho. Abhinivesābhāvatoti vipassanābhinivesassa asambhavato. Kalāpato nayatoti kalāpasammasanasaṅkhātato nayavipassanato. Bhikkhunoti sāvakassa. Sāvakasseva hi tatra anupadadhammavipassanā na sambhavati, na satthu. Tenāha ‘‘tasmā’’tiādi. Vissajjesīti tappaṭibaddhachandarāgappahānena pajahati.
「如在掌中」(hatthagata):犹如置于手掌之中,意为极近。当世尊在菩提树下,结跏趺坐于不坏金刚座上,依缘起门径开始修观,思惟:“此世间实陷于苦……”等;为了证得应证的一切知智,他转起名为大金刚智的大菩萨胜解观察,以三十六万种方式展开。当他如此广泛地对诸等至法作胜解时,也依次、相续地对非想非非想处的诸法作胜解。因此说“然而世尊……”等。「另有一百零二」(paropaññāsa):即一百零二。此处虽有一些法——如受等——在前面“触第五支”等处已说,亦摄入禅支等分类中,但由于它们在各自为缘的状况中具有特定的殊胜义理,故如别别之法,再作此说。犹如在说明出世间心生起时,亦说“九根”那样。「以支分拣出」(aṅguddhārena):指从中拣出可得的禅支、觉支、道支。或“支”(aṅga)亦有“部分”之义,因此说“以支分拣出”。显示巴利原文
Hatthagatattāti hatthagatasadisattā, āsannattāti attho. Yadā hi lokanātho bodhimūle aparājitapallaṅke nisinno – ‘‘kicchaṃ vatāyaṃ loko āpanno’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.57; saṃ. ni. 2.4, 10) paṭiccasamuppādamukhena vipassanābhinivesaṃ katvā adhigantabbasabbaññutaññāṇānurūpaṃ chattiṃsakoṭisahassamukhena mahāvajirañāṇaṃ nāma mahābodhisattasammasanaṃ pavattento anekākārasamāpattidhammasammasane anupadameva nevasaññānāsaññāyatanadhammepi aparāparaṃ sammasi. Tenāha ‘‘bhagavā panā’’tiādi. Paropaññāsāti dvepaññāsaṃ. Kāmañcettha keci dhammā vedanādayo phassapañcamakādīsu vuttāpi jhānakoṭṭhāsādīsupi saṅgahitā, taṃtaṃpaccayabhāvavisiṭṭhena pana atthavisesena dhammantarāni viya hontīti evaṃ vuttaṃ. Tathā hi lokuttaracittuppādesu navindriyatā vuccati. Aṅguddhārenāti tattha labbhamānajhānaṅgabojjhaṅgamaggaṅgānaṃ uddharaṇena. Aṅga-saddo vā koṭṭhāsapariyāyo, tasmā aṅguddhārenāti phassapañcamakādikoṭṭhāsānaṃ samuddharaṇena. Yāvatā saññāsamāpattiyoti yattakā saññāsahagatā jhānasamāpattiyo, tāhi vuṭṭhāya adhigandhabbattā tāvatikā veneyyānaṃ aññāpaṭivedho arahattasamadhigamo.
「以见为导引的含义」:如同盲人抓住杖端,有引路者为其引导,智慧亦以“如实见诸法自性”而成为导引。又如那人成为他的眼目,智慧对于有情也是如此,故说“以作为眼睛的智慧”。「定慧」:与定相应的智慧。此处,有人说“定”指无色定,但另有说法认为:思惟加行伴随某种禅定,方才合理。「观慧」:即作为观的智慧。「定慧」在入等至的状态中,从作用上了知;而依据“得定者能如实了知”(《相应部》等)这句经文,则从不痴了知。其中,“从作用”指在所行境中随转时,执行取所缘的作用;“从不痴”指于相应法中摧破痴暗,如同在感受喜等时那样。「有什么意义」即“有何用途”,因此说“这个有什么用呢?”。「于应遍知的诸法」:指应依如实把握自味与特相而正对、了知的蕴、处、界等诸法。「遍知」:从自相与共相两方面,正向、无偏离地了知。以此说明了“知遍知”的作用。「于应度知的诸法」:指应被判别为“无常、苦……”显示巴利原文
Dassanapariṇāyakaṭṭhenāti andhassa yaṭṭhikoṭiṃ gahetvā maggadesako viya dhammānaṃ yathāsabhāvadassanasaṅkhātena pariṇāyakabhāvena. Yathā vā so tassa cakkhubhūto, evaṃ sattānaṃ paññā. Tenāha ‘‘cakkhubhūtāya paññāyā’’ti. Samādhisampayuttā paññā samādhipaññā. Samādhi cettha āruppasamādhīti vadanti, sammasanapayogo pana koci jhānasamādhīti yuttaṃ. Vipassanābhūtā paññā vipassanāpaññā. Samādhipaññāya antosamāpattiyaṃ kiccato pajānāti, ‘‘samāhito yathābhūtaṃ pajānātī’’ti pana vacanato (saṃ. ni. 3.5; 4.99-100; 3.5.1071-1072; netti. 40; mi. pa. 2.1.14) asammohato pajānāti. Tattha kiccatoti gocarajjhatte ārammaṇakaraṇakiccato. Asammohatoti sampayuttadhammesu sammohavidhamanato yathā pītipaṭisaṃvedanādīsu. Kimatthiyāti kiṃpayojanāti āha ‘‘ko etissā attho’’ti. Abhiññeyye dhammeti yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇāvabodhavasena abhimukhaṃ ñeyye jānitabbe khandhāyatanādidhamme. Abhijānātīti salakkhaṇato sāmaññalakkhaṇato ca abhimukhaṃ avirajjhanavasena jānāti. Etena ñātapariññābyāpāramāha. Pariññeyyeti aniccātipi dukkhātipi anattātipi paricchijja jānitabbe. Parijānātīti ‘‘yaṃ kiñci rūpaṃ…pe… aniccaṃ khayaṭṭhenā’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.48) paricchinditvā jānāti. Iminā tīraṇapariññābyāpāramāha. Pahātabbe dhammeti niccasaññādike yāva arahattamaggavajjhā sabbe pāpadhamme. Pajahati pakaṭṭhato jahati, vikkhambheti ceva samucchindati cāti attho. Iminā pahānapariññābyāpāramāha. Sā panesā paññā lokiyāpi tippakārā lokuttarāpi, tāsaṃ visesaṃ sayamevāha. Kiccatoti abhijānanavasena ārammaṇakiccato. Asammohatoti yathābalaṃ abhiññeyyādīsu sammohavidhamanato. Nibbānamārammaṇaṃ katvā pavattanato abhiññeyyādīsu vigatasammohato evāti āha ‘‘lokuttarā asammohato’’ti.
452 业自作正见及依附于轮回的世间正见,此处非所论,因这是有关“还灭”的论题,故说“指观正见与道正见”。「从他而闻的声音」:指从别人——或从导师,或从声闻弟子——那里获得的法音。因此说“适宜的听法”。唯有这种适宜的听法才能成为正见的缘,并非任何从他而来的声音皆可。「如理作意」:指依之能成就对名色的把握等工作的那种最初作意。这种如理作意也是正见的缘,但只是决定性的那一部分,并非统括一切的缘;为表此义,故说“然而对于独觉佛……”等。「只有在如理作意中」这一确定性的强调,其“唯有”一词的作用,只是为了排除“从他音声”这一条件,并非排除其他特定的近因差别;因为这一决定词的用意,在于把相对立的对象排除出去。显示巴利原文
452. Kammassakatā sammādiṭṭhi ca vaṭṭanissitattā idha nādhippetā, vivaṭṭakathā hesāti vuttaṃ ‘‘vipassanāsammādiṭṭhiyā ca maggasammādiṭṭhiyā cā’’ti. Parato ghosoti parato satthuto, sāvakato vā labbhamāno dhammaghoso. Tenāha ‘‘sappāyadhammassavana’’nti. Tañhi sammādiṭṭhiyā paccayo bhavituṃ sakkoti, na yo koci paratoghoso. Upāyamanasikāroti yena nāmarūpapariggahādi sijjhati, tādiso pathamanasikāro. Ayañca sammādiṭṭhiyā paccayoti niyamapakkhiko, na sabbasaṃgāhakoti dassento ‘‘paccekabuddhānaṃ panā’’tiādimāha. Yonisomanasikārasmiṃyevāti avadhāraṇena paratoghosameva nivatteti, na padaṭṭhānavisesaṃ paṭiyogīnivattanatthattā eva-saddassa.
「已得帮助者」指的是那些人,他们根据合适的方式,以依止等为缘而获得了资具。因为观正见是以未被道正见所摄持的方式而被把握的,所以此处是在道正见中,专指阿拉汉道正见;这是就无间缘的规则或遮止而言的。在最胜果定及其资具法中,心的随转方式完全固定于正见,因此‘正见’即指阿拉汉道正见。‘在果的刹那’,是指无间与等无间两种果的刹那。‘心解脱’即是:依靠它——除最胜果慧外的其余果法——通过一切杂染的止息,心得以解脱。因此说‘心解脱即是它具有此果,所谓心解脱的果即是其利益’,意思是:以止息一切杂染而使心解脱的称为‘断’者,即是果,也就是利益——应当这样来连接文意。而且在这里,‘心解脱’一词只是就‘断’这一面来说的,因为前面已经说明了能断的诸法;否则,如果在说明利益时只取果法,那就成了重复而无意义的话。显示巴利原文
Laddhupakārāti (a. ni. ṭī. 3.5.25) yathārahaṃ nissayādivasena laddhapaccayā. Vipassanāsammādiṭṭhiyā anuggahitabhāvena gahitattā maggasammādiṭṭhīsu ca arahattamaggasammādiṭṭhi, anantarassa hi vidhi, paṭisedho vā. Aggaphalasamādhimhi tapparikkhāradhammesuyeva ca kevalo cetopariyāyo niruḷhoti sammādiṭṭhīti arahattamaggasammādiṭṭhi. Phalakkhaṇeti anantare kālantare cāti duvidhe phalakkhaṇe. Paṭippassaddhivasena sabbasaṃkilesehi ceto vimuccati etāyāti cetovimutti, aggaphalapaññaṃ ṭhapetvā avasesā phaladhammā. Tenāha ‘‘cetovimutti phalaṃ assāti. Cetovimuttisaṅkhātaṃ phalaṃ ānisaṃso’’ti, sabbasaṃkilesehi cetaso vimuccanasaṅkhātaṃ paṭippassambhanasaññitaṃ pahānaṃ phalaṃ ānisaṃso cāti yojanā. Idha ca cetovimutti-saddena pahānamattaṃ gahitaṃ, pubbe pahāyakadhammā, aññathā phaladhammā eva ānisaṃsoti gayhamāne punavacanaṃ niratthakaṃ siyā.
在「慧解脱的果与利益」一句中,其意义也应如此理解。正语、正业、正命,因其戒的自性,对定有特别的助益;同样,正思惟也因其禅那的自性而有助益,所以它被称作「安止」。而正念与正精进,本身就是定的相应部分,因此说「其余诸法应知为心解脱」。其中,「四遍净戒」意指那些作为证得圣道之近因的四遍净戒。对于「闻」等,道理也相同。以展示自己心之运转状态的方式共同言语,称为「共语」;共语即是「讨论」。但在这里,它专指系属于业处的讨论,因此说「在业处上的……谈论」。其中,对于业处,一次在路中未能进入,称为「蹶」;多次如此,则称为「屡蹶」;能够断除这两种情况的谈论,即是‘断蹶断屡蹶之论’。‘圆满的行持者’,是指以还灭为所依而守护、令其增广的人。‘正在聆听者’,即这样听着:「如所把握的业处将会增长」,因此才说‘合宜的听法’。‘正在作务者’,则是指从事于修习加行工作的人。显示巴利原文
Paññāvimuttiphalānisaṃsāti etthāpi evameva attho veditabbo. Sammāvācākammantājīvā sīlasabhāvattā visesato samādhissa upakārā, tathā sammāsaṅkappo jhānasabhāvattā. Tathā hi so ‘‘appanā’’ti niddiṭṭho. Sammāsatisammāvāyāmā pana samādhipakkhiyā evāti āha ‘‘avasesā dhammā cetovimuttīti veditabbā’’ti. Catupārisuddhisīlanti ariyamaggādhigamassa padaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ catupārisuddhisīlaṃ. Sutādīsupi eseva nayo. Attano cittappavattiārocanavasena saha kathanaṃ saṃkathā, saṃkathāva sākacchā. Idha pana kammaṭṭhānapaṭibaddhāti āha ‘‘kammaṭṭhāne…pe… kathā’’ti. Tattha kammaṭṭhānassa ekavāraṃ vīthiyā appaṭipajjanaṃ khalanaṃ, anekavāraṃ pakkhalanaṃ, tadubhayassa vicchedanīkathā khalanapakkhalanachedanakathā. Pūrentassāti vivaṭṭanissitaṃ katvā pālentassa brūhentassa ca. Suṇantassāti ‘‘yathāuggahitakammaṭṭhānaṃ phātiṃ gamissatī’’ti evaṃ suṇantassa. Teneva hi ‘‘sappāyadhammassavana’’nti vuttaṃ. Kammaṃ karontassāti bhāvanānuyogakammaṃ karontassa.
在这五处中,「边际」一词都应视为揭示原因之义。唯有如此,下文将说的「正如……一样」等水喻才能相应。「水槽」是指围堰。「牢固地绑紧」,即是不松散、坚固、既不太大也不太小地把它围好。「把它弄坚固」,是指在浇水时,为了不让水从各方流失渗漏,而将围堰做得更加坚固。「干枝」,是指那棵小芒果树的干枯枝梢。「蚁巢」是一种铜色白蚁所筑的巢。「锄头」就是锄。修筑围堰,就如同戒,因为戒是令正见增长的方便法中的根本。浇水,就如同听法,因为它能滋养修习。将边界弄坚固,就如同止,因为它能令如前所述、作为修习所依的戒界更加坚固;确实,心得安定者,其戒也会更加稳固。移除附近的蔓藤等,就如同断除在业处上的蹶与屡蹶,因为这能排除那些障碍应成就之修习的事物。挖掘树根,就如同修习七随观,因为这是对障碍之根——即贪、慢、见——的彻底刨挖。在此应当了知:当一位戒行极为清净的人专心修习业处时,他应当渴望听闻合宜的法;听闻之后,应对所闻的义理与人进行讨论交流;如此,通过清理业处,成就了奢摩他;继而,安住于定中、已经开启了……显示巴利原文
Pañcasupi ṭhānesu anta-saddo hetuatthajotano daṭṭhabbo. Evañhi ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādinā vuccamānā ambupamā ca yujjeyya. Udakakoṭṭhakanti ālavālaṃ. Thiraṃ katvā bandhatīti asithilaṃ daḷhaṃ nātimahantaṃ nātikhuddakaṃ katvā yojeti. Thiraṃ karotīti udakasiñcanakāle tato tato vissaritvā udakassa anikkhamanatthaṃ ālavālaṃ thirataraṃ karoti. Sukkhadaṇḍakoti tasseva ambagacchakassa sukkho sākhāsīsako. Kipillikapuṭoti tambakipillikakuṭajaṃ. Khaṇittinti kudālaṃ. Koṭṭhakabandhanaṃ viya sīlaṃ sammādiṭṭhiyā vaḍḍhanupāyassa mūlabhāvato. Udakasiñcanaṃ viya dhammassavanaṃ bhāvanāya paribrūhanato. Mariyādāya thirabhāvakaraṇaṃ viya samatho yathāvuttabhāvanādhiṭṭhānāya sīlamariyādāya daḷhabhāvāpādanato. Samāhitassa hi sīlaṃ thirataraṃ hoti. Samīpe valliādīnaṃ haraṇaṃ viya kammaṭṭhāne khalanapakkhalanacchedanaṃ ijjhitabbabhāvanāya vibandhāpanayanato. Mūlakhaṇanaṃ viya sattannaṃ anupassanānaṃ bhāvanā tassā vibandhassa mūlakānaṃ taṇhāmānadiṭṭhīnaṃ palikhaṇanato. Ettha ca yasmā suparisuddhasīlassa kammaṭṭhānaṃ anuyuñjantassa sappāyadhammassavanaṃ icchitabbaṃ, tato yathāsute atthe sākacchāsamāpajjanaṃ, tato kammaṭṭhānavisodhanena samathanipphatti, tato samāhitassa āraddhavipassakassa vipassanāpāripūri. Paripuṇṇavipassano maggasammādiṭṭhiṃ paribrūhetīti evametesaṃ aṅgānaṃ paramparāya sammukhā ca anuggaṇhanato ayamānupubbī kathitāti veditabbaṃ.
453 此处,他究竟在问什么?在这已导至证得阿拉汉果的教说中,当那人问“朋友,有多少种‘有’?”时,这位问‘有’者是依于怎样的联结而发问的呢?这便是此句的用意所在。因此,在说了“此联结已回到根本”之后,为了说明那人心中所念,便说“他是劣慧者”等。因为这里所说的“劣慧者”,是指尚未彻见圣谛的人,并非单纯指那种愚钝、如痴人一般的人。在论及“欲有”等时,为了显示此处所指是由业与结生两种不同而加以区分的“有”,故说“往趣欲有的业”等。其中应明了的义趣,可依《清净道论》及其复注中已解释的方式来理解。所谓“后有的”(punabbhavassa),是指因一次又一次、无间而有的存在与出生,而被称为“后有”的那一系列轮转。因此说“此处我问轮转”。“再生、转起”(abhinibbatti)是指以有、生、趣等方式显现、出生。说“处处”(tahiṃ tahiṃ),即于各种“有”等境界中。“欢喜、乐着”(abhinandanā)是指以渴爱而欢喜。显示巴利原文
453.Idha kiṃ pucchatīti idha evaṃ arahattaphalaṃ pāpitāya desanāya ‘‘kati panāvuso, bhavā’’ti bhavaṃ pucchanto kīdisaṃ anusandhiṃ upādāya pucchatīti attho. Teneva hi ‘‘mūlameva gato anusandhī’’ti vatvā adhippāyaṃ pakāsento ‘‘duppañño’’tiādimāha. Duppaññoti hi idha appaṭividdhasacco adhippeto, na jaḷo eva. Kāmabhavotiādīsu kammopapattibhedato duvidhopi bhavo adhippetoti dassento ‘‘kāmabhavūpagaṃ kamma’’ntiādimāha. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ visuddhimaggetaṃsaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (visuddhi. 2.647; visuddhi. mahāṭī. 2.646-647) vuttanayena veditabbaṃ. Punabbhavassāti punappunaṃ aparāparaṃ bhavanato jāyanato punabbhavoti laddhanāmassa vaṭṭapabandhassa. Tenāha ‘‘idha vaṭṭaṃ pucchissāmī’’ti. Abhinibbattīti bhavayonigatiādivasena nibbatti. Tahiṃ tahiṃ tasmiṃ tasmiṃ bhavādike. Abhinandanāti taṇhāabhinandanahetu. Gamanāgamanaṃ hotītiādinā bhavādīsu sattānaṃ aparāparaṃ cutipaṭisandhiyo dasseti. Khayanirodhenāti accantakhayasaṅkhātena anuppādanirodhena. Ubhayametaṃ na vattabbaṃ pahānābhisamayabhāvanābhisamayānaṃ accāsannakālattā. Vattabbaṃ taṃ hetuphaladhammūpacāravasena. Yathā hi padīpujjalanahetuko andhakāravigamo, evaṃ vijjuppādahetuko avijjānirodho, hetuphaladhammā ca samānakālāpi pubbāparakālā viya voharīyanti yathā – ‘‘cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇa’’nti (ma. ni. 1.204, 400; ma. ni. 3.420, 425, 426; saṃ. ni. 2.43-45; 2.4.60; kathā. 465, 467) paccayapaccayuppannakiriyā. Gamanaṃ upacchijjati idha kāmabhave parinibbānena. Āgamanaṃ upacchijjati tattha rūpārūpesu parinibbānena. Gamanāgamanaṃ upacchijjati sabbaso aparāparuppattiyā abhāvato.
454 为了显示:初禅于还灭之阐说后,对于安住还灭者,以最胜开示阐明俱分解脱者的灭尽成就,故说“贤友,什么是……?”等。也就是说,接着便问了将入灭尽定的比丘所应知的初禅相应支与舍断支。“支的确定”(aṅgavavatthāna):即确定禅支。“部分的区分”(koṭṭhāsapariccheda):对于此中所获得的触等五支诸法,应区分其部分,即了知此禅中有多少法存在,多少法已灭尽。“有帮助和无帮助的支”(upakārānupakārāni aṅgāni):对灭尽定有帮助的支以及无帮助的支。因为灭尽定须由十六种智行与九种定行而证得,依他们智与定行应被超越的法是无帮助支;超越它们者是有帮助支。依此渐次寂灭,愈加幽静,达到有顶定后,残余的极微细心与心所,于预定时间内灭尽而不复转起。“它的”(tassā):指灭尽定的。“无间缘”(anantarapaccaya):意指类似无间缘。实际上,灭尽定中并没有任何法被称为无间缘,但那时心与心所如此灭尽,是由前述的非想非非想处定作为先行作用而成就的,因此它如同显示巴利原文
454. Vivaṭṭakathāya parato jotitaṃ paṭhamaṃ jhānaṃ vivaṭṭaṃ patvā ṭhitassa ukkaṭṭhaniddesena ubhatobhāgavimuttassa nirodhasādhakaṃ vibhāvituṃ yuttanti āha ‘‘katamaṃ panāvusoti idha kiṃ pucchatī’’tiādi. Tathā hi anantaraṃ nirodhasamāpajjanakena bhikkhunā jānitabbāni paṭhamassa jhānassa sampayogapahānaṅgāni pucchitāni. Aṅgavavatthānanti jhānaṅgavavatthānaṃ. Koṭṭhāsaparicchedoti tattha labbhamānaphassapañcamakādidhammakoṭṭhāsaparicchedo jānitabbo. Imasmiṃ jhāne ettakā dhammā saṃvijjanti, ettakā nirodhitāti jānitabbaṃ. Upakārānupakārāni aṅgānīti nirodhasamāpattiyā upakārāni ca anupakārāni ca aṅgāni. Nirodhasamāpattiyā hi soḷasahi ñāṇacariyāhi navahi samādhicariyāhi ca pattabbattā taṃtaṃñāṇassa samādhicariyāhi samatikkamitabbā dhammā anupakārakaṅgāni, samatikkamakā upakārakaṅgāni. Tesañhi vasena yathānupubbaṃ upasantupasantaoḷārikabhāvāya bhavaggasamāpattiyā saṅkhārāvasesasukhumataṃ pattā cittacetasikā yathāparicchinnaṃ kālaṃ nirujjhanti, appavattiṃ gacchanti. Tassāti nirodhassa. Anantarapaccayanti anantarapaccayasadisaṃ. Na hi nirodhassa koci dhammo anantarapaccayo nāma atthi. Yañhi tadā cittacetasikānaṃ tathā nirujjhanaṃ, taṃ yathāvuttapubbābhisaṅkhārahetukāya nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattiyā ahosīti sā tassa anantarapaccayo viya hotīti taṃ vuttaṃ. Cha samāpattiyoti suttantanayena vuttasuttantapiṭakasaṃvaṇṇanāti katvā. ‘‘Satta samāpattiyo’’ti pana vattabbaṃ, aññathā idaṃ ‘‘caturaṅgika’’nti na vattabbaṃ siyā. Nayaṃ vā dassetvāti ādiantadassanavasena nayadassanaṃ katvā.
455 如此,在阐明灭尽定的基础后,现在为了显示在灭尽定内五种净色为连续存在之缘的提问,先以依其自性、独特特性、独特境界及皈依处而问的方式,巴利文这样展开:「问依于识的五种净色」(viññāṇanissaye pañca pasāde pucchanto)。「行境与境界」(gocaravisayanti):在此,虽‘行境’一词侧重其屡屡行境,‘境界’一词侧重其不对他者,行境与境界之义确有差别,但若加分辨,二者都是所缘的本质,故说‘作为行境的境界’。「各别的」(ekekassāti):即一个是这个的,另一个是那个的。此处的‘一’声,如同‘此处某些人称叹’(ma. ni. 3.27)中的用法,有不同于常义的意义。‘如果……’等,是假设之语。其中,「收摄」(samodhānetvāti):集在一起。‘无口而说’等,是显示以义相通的比喻。正如眼识必须依于眼净色才能见色,而非单凭眼净色,同样眼识也必须依于眼净色才能见色,而非依其他,故说‘在眼净色上呈现’。以此显示它们之间的共同作用。‘或是青,或是黄’:这是仅就认知青黄等自性而说。对‘这是青、这是黄’的认知,眼识并不具有,因为它是无分别的。‘这些的’:指这些眼识等的。「此即依于所依而问所依者」(nissayasīsena nissitapucchā):如此才能成立此经验境界的敦促。故说‘因为眼识……’等。眼识等无能以自己的境界耽着等方式去经验,但它们并非全无功能,因为它们就像毫无意义地在归投什么,故问‘这些归投什么呢?’。‘速行心为皈依’(javanamano paṭisaraṇanti):这是共通讲五门及意门速行后,再特别说明在此处,染着等转起的皈依,故说‘或者意门速行心’。即在此门,于眼门速行中,或染着、或嗔恚、或愚痴,由此而有不放逸等的防护或不防护。显示巴利原文
455. Evaṃ nirodhassa pādakaṃ vibhāvetvā idāni antonirodhe anupabandhabhāvato pañcannaṃ pasādānaṃ paccayapucchane paṭhamaṃ tāva te sarūpato āveṇikato āveṇikavisayato paṭissaraṇato ca pucchanavasena pāḷi pavattāti dassento ‘‘viññāṇanissaye pañca pasāde pucchanto’’ti āha. Gocaravisayanti ettha kāmaṃ tabbahulacāritāpekkhaṃ gocaraggahaṇaṃ, anaññatthabhāvāpekkhaṃ visayaggahaṇanti attheva gocaravisayabhāvānaṃ viseso, vivariyamānaṃ pana ubhayampi ārammaṇasabhāvamevāti āha ‘‘gocarabhūtaṃ visaya’’nti. Ekekassāti eko ekassa, añño aññassāti attho. Aññattho hi ayaṃ eka-saddo ‘‘ittheke abhivadantī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.27) viya. Sace hītiādi abhūtaparikappanavacanametaṃ. Tattha samodhānetvāti ekajjhaṃ katvā. Vināpi mukhenātiādinā atthasallāpikanidassanaṃ nāma dasseti. Yathā viññāṇādhiṭṭhitameva cakkhu rūpaṃ passati, na kevalaṃ, evaṃ cakkhunissayameva viññāṇaṃ taṃ passati, na itaranti āha ‘‘cakkhupasāde upanehī’’ti. Tena tesaṃ tattha saṃhaccakāritaṃ dasseti. Yadi vā nīlaṃ yadi vā pītakanti idaṃ nīlapītādisabhāvajānanamattaṃ sandhāyāha. Nīlaṃ pītakanti pajānanaṃ cakkhuviññāṇassa nattheva avikappakabhāvato. Etesaṃ cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ. Nissayasīsena nissitapucchā hesā, evañhi visayānubhavanacodanā samatthitā hoti. Tenāha ‘‘cakkhuviññāṇaṃ hī’’tiādi. Yathāsakaṃ visayaṃ rajjanādivasena anubhavituṃ asamatthāni cakkhuviññāṇādīni, tattha samatthatāyeva ca natthi, na kiñci atthato paṭisarantāni viya hontīti vuttaṃ ‘‘kiṃ etāni paṭisarantī’’ti. Javanamano paṭisaraṇanti pañcadvārikaṃ itarañca sādhāraṇato vatvā puna yāya’ssa rajjanādipavattiyā paṭisaraṇatā, sā savisesā yattha labbhati, taṃ dassento ‘‘manodvārikajavanamano vā’’ti āha. Etasmiṃ pana dvāreti cakkhudvāre javanaṃ rajjati vā dussati vā muyhati vā, yato tattha aññāṇādiasaṃvaro pavattati.
“在那里”,即在那速行心本身作为皈依的场合。“低劣受用者”,指能力低下的国王侍从。“日薪”,即按侍从人数在发放日所支付的货币。“释放薪”,即为被枷锁捆绑者解开束缚而支付的货币。“非打薪”,即当有人打他们时,为阻止而说“别打他们”所应付的罚款。这一切,便是那些小村庄中的人们所能得到的,仅此而已,故说“八钱或……”。“百基地”,即百犁地的基地。其余两句同理。“在那里”等是对譬喻的合论,极为易懂。显示巴利原文
Tatrāti tasmiṃ javanamanasseva paṭisaraṇabhāve. Dubbalabhojakāti hīnasāmatthiyā rājabhoggā. Sevakānaṃ gaṇanāya yojitadivase labbhamānakahāpaṇo yuttikahāpaṇo. Andubandhanena baddhassa vissajjanena labbhamānakahāpaṇo bandhakahāpaṇo. Kiñci paharante mā paharantūti paṭikkhipato dātabbadaṇḍo māpahārakahāpaṇo. So sabbopi parittakesu gāmikamanussesu tathā labbhamāno ettako hotīti āha ‘‘aṭṭhakahāpaṇo vā’’tiādi. Satavatthukanti satakarīsavatthukaṃ. Esa nayo sesapadadvayepi. Tatthātiādi upamāsaṃsandhanaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyameva.
456 “在灭尽定内的五净色”,指在入灭尽定者相续中现起的五种净色。“于唯作现起”,即在速行等唯作所生法的现起中。“成为强力缘”,是由后生缘、不相应缘、有缘、非有缘等而为缘,以支持的方式成为强力缘。“依存于命根”,命根以根缘、有缘、非有缘之力成为缘,五种净色依存于它而生起。若无命根,则不能存在,因为没有命根的业生色聚是不存在的。“因此”,因为只有被具有守护特性的命根所守护的温热才能现起,不被守护的则不能,所以温热依存于寿而存在。“如光依赖火焰而显现”,即依赖那个名为火焰的色聚一起现起,而以“照耀、破除黑暗、令色显现”等方式被认知的、称为“光”的色法。“依赖那光”,即依赖上述那种光。显示巴利原文
456.Antonirodhasmiṃ pañca pasādeti nirodhasamāpannassa pavattamāne pañca pasāde. Kiriyamayapavattasminti javanādikiriyānibbattakadhammappavattiyaṃ. Balavapaccayā hontīti pacchājātavippayuttaatthiavigatapaccayehi paccayā honti, upatthambhakabhāvena balavapaccayā honti. Jīvitindriyaṃ paṭiccāti indriyaatthiavigatapaccayavasena paccayabhūtaṃ jīvitindriyaṃ paṭicca pañcavidhopi pasādo tiṭṭhati. Jīvitindriyena vinā na tiṭṭhati jīvitindriyarahitassa kammasamuṭṭhānarūpakalāpassa abhāvato. Tasmāti yasmā anupālanalakkhaṇena jīvitena anupālitā eva usmā pavattati, na tena ananupālitā, tasmā usmā āyuṃ paṭicca tiṭṭhati. Jālasikhaṃ paṭicca ābhā paññāyatīti jālasikhāsaṅkhātabhūtasaṅghātaṃ saheva pavattamānaṃ nissāya ‘‘ābhā’’ti laddhanāmā vaṇṇadhātu ‘‘ujjalati, andhakāraṃ vidhamati, rūpagatāni ca vidaṃsetī’’tiādīhi pakārehi ñāyati. Taṃ ālokaṃ paṭiccāti taṃ vuttappakāraṃ ālokaṃ paccayaṃ labhitvā. Jālasikhā paññāyatīti ‘‘appikā, mahatī, uju, kuṭilā’’tiādinā pākaṭā hoti.
“如火焰”,业生火界由于是所依的缘故,故如火焰。“如光”,命根由于是依其而住的缘故,故如光。现在,为了显示譬喻与所譬喻之间的关联,说“因为火焰……”等。“把握光而生起”,以此说明:如同光与火焰一同生起,同样,命根也与业生的温热一同生起。由于光仅在火焰存在时才存在,就如火焰所生,故说“以自身所生的光”。此处,“温热”指业生火界,以及它所依、所守护的命根。因此说“以业生大种所生的命根守护温热”。不仅令其刹那安住,还能令相续不断,以命根为因,故说“即使百年,也守护业生火之现起”。当温热作为寿的缘时,伴有其余大种,故说“大种”。同样,寿也作为俱生色的守护者而成为温热的缘,故说“守护大种”。显示巴利原文
Jālasikhāviya kammajatejo nissayabhāvato. Āloko viya jīvitindriyaṃ tannissitabhāvato. Idāni upamopamitabbānaṃ sambandhaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘jālasikhā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ālokaṃ gahetvāva uppajjatīti iminā yathā jālasikhāya saheva āloko uppajjati, evaṃ kammajusmanā saheva jīvitindriyaṃ uppajjatīti dasseti. Jālasikhāsannissayo tassā satiyeva honto āloko tāya uppādito viya hotīti āha ‘‘attanā janitaālokenevā’’ti. Usmā nāmettha kammasamuṭṭhānā tejodhātu tannissitañca jīvitindriyaṃ tadanupālakañcāti āha ‘‘kammajamahābhūtasambhavena jīvitindriyena usmāya anupālana’’nti. Na kevalaṃ khaṇaṭṭhitiyā eva, atha kho pabandhānupacchedassapi jīvitindriyaṃ kāraṇanti āha ‘‘vassasatampi kammajatejapavattaṃ pāletī’’ti. Usmā āyuno paccayo honto sesabhūtasahito eva hotīti āha ‘‘mahābhūtānī’’ti. Tathā āyupi sahajātarūpaṃ pālentameva usmāya paccayo hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘mahābhūtāni pāletī’’ti.
457 「寿行」:命本身即依根缘等的方式,以守护俱生法而被称为行(造作),故为寿行。之所以用复数表述,是因为它在成千上万种差别的色聚中转起,故有多种类别。「受法」:领纳所缘之味者,正如说‘能导出的’,故称为受法。因有苦、乐等差别,故用复数。对于这些寿行与受,入灭尽定者本应死去,因为受已灭尽;然而寿行尚未如此灭尽,灭尽定便不可能入,何况出定?因此经中说:‘但是,贤友……’。出定依想、受等生起而显现。现在,为详细阐明此义,以譬喻阐述:‘犹如有人……’等。「厌倦」:因种种所缘的撞击而生起厌离。「如预定时间」:当预定的时间到来时。「依色命根为缘」:即以色命根为根缘。「如火焰之持续」:无色法因火界极盛而有照亮所缘的作用。「如水之击打」:如同灭尽定的先前行。「如覆盖之火炭」:色命根仅残余温热而不放光明。「预定时间之到来」:即预定时间的来临。「唯依随顺适合的方式,执取色而转起」。「舍弃此色身」:即从此色身、此尸体离去,不再转起。显示巴利原文
457. Āyu eva indriyapaccayādivasena sahajātadhammānaṃ anupālanavasena saṅkharaṇato āyusaṅkhāro. Bahuvacananiddeso pana anekasatasahassabhedesu rūpakalāpesu pavattiyā anekabhedanti katvā. Ārammaṇarasaṃ anubhavantīti vedaniyā yathā ‘‘niyyānikā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘vedanā dhammāvā’’ti. Sukhādibhedabhinnattā bahuvacananiddeso. Imesaṃ āyusaṅkhāravedanānaṃ ekantanirodhaṃ samāpannassa maraṇena bhavitabbaṃ vedanāya niruddhattā. Āyusaṅkhārānaṃ tathā aniruddhattā nirodhassa samāpajjanameva na siyā, kuto vuṭṭhānaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘te ca hāvuso’’tiādi. Vuṭṭhānaṃ paññāyati saññāvedanādīnaṃ uppattiyā. Idāni tamatthaṃ vitthārato upamāya vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yo hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ukkaṇṭhitvāti nānārammaṇāpātato nibbinditvā. Yathāparicchinnakālavasenāti yathāparicchinne kāle sampatte. Rūpajīvitindriyapaccayāti indriyapaccayabhūtā . Jālāpavattaṃ viya arūpadhammā tejussadabhāvato visayobhāsanato ca. Udakappahāro viya nirodhasamāpattiyā pubbābhisaṅkhāro. Pihitaaṅgārā viya rūpajīvitindriyaṃ usmāmattatāya anobhāsanato . Yathāparicchinnakālāgamananti yathāparicchinnakālassa upagamanaṃ. Anurūpapattivaseneva rūpapavattiggahaṇaṃ. Imaṃ rūpakāyaṃ jahantīti imasmā rūpakāyā kaḷevarā vigacchanti nappavattanti.
以身造作,故为「身行」,因其依止于身而转起。造作语言,故为「语行」——正是由于寻与伺之后,方分解而说出语言。以心造作,故为「心行」,因其依止于心而转起。在论究心行灭时,心的灭——如同色法的灭——并未被直接论及,因为心与心行有别;因此,并非寻等心行灭去,与之相应的心便一并灭去,心行不存在,不等于心不存在。至于‘语言并未灭去’的说法,同样不成立。因为造作语言的才称为「语行」,当这些语行灭去时,语言怎么可能不灭?然而,尽管心行灭去,心却未必灭去——因为心并非由这些心行所造作,所以,如同寻等灭去之后,心仍会继续转起。这便是对方(论敌)在此处的意图。他们想表达的是:若心未完全灭尽,那些众生便是依凭未灭之心、以及依止于心的色法尚未离去而继续存活,如此则会产生无间业的问题。不应拘泥于文字表面——也就是说,虽然经文说‘心行已灭’,但应理解为只是那些心行灭去,而非心本身灭去。像这样,此属于需要引申理解的经典,不应执取为‘此是直显真实义的经典’。站在诸阿阇梨的显示巴利原文
Kāyena saṅkharīyantīti kāyasaṅkhārā tappaṭibaddhavuttitāya. Vācaṃ saṅkharontīti vacīsaṅkhārā. Vitakketvā vicāretvā hi vācaṃ bhindati katheti. Cittena saṅkharīyantīti cittasaṅkhārā tappaṭibaddhavuttito. Cittasaṅkhāranirodhacodanāya rūpanirodho viya cittanirodho acodito tesaṃ tato aññattāti na cittasampayuttanirodho ekantiko vitakkādinirodhe tadabhāvato. Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ ‘‘vācā aniruddhā hotī’’ti, tampi na. Vācaṃ saṅkharontīti hi vacīsaṅkhārā, tesu niruddhesu kathaṃ vācāya anirodho. Cittaṃ pana niruddhesupi cittasaṅkhāresu tehi anabhisaṅkhatattā vitakkādinirodho viya pavattatiyevāti ayamettha parassa adhippāyo. Ānantariyakammaṃ kataṃ bhaveyya, cittassa aniruddhattā taṃ nissāya ca rūpadhammānaṃ anapagatattā te jīvanti eva nāmāti. Byañjane abhinivesaṃ akatvāti ‘‘cittasaṅkhārā niruddhā’’ti vacanato teva niruddhā, na cittanti evaṃ neyyatthaṃ suttaṃ ‘‘nītattha’’nti abhinivesaṃ akatvā. Ācariyānaṃ naye ṭhatvāti paramparāgatānaṃ ācariyānaṃ adhippāye ṭhatvāti attho. Upaparikkhitabboti suttantarāgamato suttantarapadassa aviparīto attho vīmaṃsitabbo. Yathā hi ‘‘asaññabhavo’’ti vacanato ‘‘saññāva tattha natthi, itare pana cittacetasikā santī’’ti ayamettha attho na gayhati. Yathā ca ‘‘nevasaññānāsaññāyatana’’nti vacanato ‘‘saññāva tattha tādisī, na phassādayo’’ti ayamettha attho na gayhati saññāsīsena desanāti katvā, evamidhāpi ‘‘cittasaṅkhārā niruddhā’’ti, ‘‘saññāvedayitanirodho’’ti ca desanāsīsameva. Sabbepi pana cittacetasikā tattha nirujjhantevāti ayamettha aviparīto attho veditabbo, tathāpubbābhisaṅkhārena sabbesaṃyeva cittacetasikānaṃ tattha nirujjhanato. Etena yaṃ pubbe ‘‘aññattā, tadabhāvato’’ti ca yuttivacanaṃ, tadayuttaṃ adhippāyānavabodhatoti dassitaṃ hoti. Tenāha ‘‘attho hi paṭisaraṇaṃ, na byañjana’’nti.
「受损」:指被逼迫、被损害。「被毁坏」:指被摧毁、被破灭。诸根因攀缘所缘而产生的疲劳,可借由眼睛看见明亮色境中微细尘埃之事来阐明。例如,在酷热之时,面前烈火炽燃,同时又敲响尖锐刺耳的鼓声,此时双眼犹如破裂般难以堪忍,双耳则‘如被锐器猛击一般’——人们正是这样描述的。显示巴利原文
Upahatānīti bādhitāni. Makkhitānīti dhaṃsitāni. Ārammaṇaghaṭṭanāya indriyānaṃ kilamatho cakkhunā bhāsurarūpasukhumarajadassanena vibhāvetabbo. Tathā hi uṇhakāle purato aggimhi jalante kharassare ca paṇave ākoṭite akkhīni bhedāni viya na sahanti sotāni ‘‘sikharena viya abhihaññantī’’ti vattāro honti.
458 色界第四禅那,正是依离色欲的修习而转起的无色禅那。法将(舍利弗)在解答非想非非想处时,即是以“由乐之舍断……”等语来解答。也就是说,由于离去、由于消逝,以此为缘而有乐等的舍断,故称离去缘、消逝缘。就证得之缘而言,则是指基于遍处的色界第四禅那及前三无色定。若不证得那些,便不可能证得非想非非想处。“从灭出起的果等至”,是指从灭尽定出起后,由无常随观而成就的果等至,称为「无相心解脱」。犹如止的果报是神通,慈、悲、喜梵住的果报是舍梵住,遍处的果报是无色定,止观的果报是灭尽定;同样地,观的果报是沙门果,故说为“观的果等至”。这里所说的“相”,于有所缘法,特指其生起的因相,因此说「一切相」即是“色等一切所缘”。于此没有任何行相,故称「无相」,即「无为界」。所以说“离去一切相的无余涅槃界”。这里指的是与果等至同时生起的作意,而非转向作意。因为转向作意不可能在此处生起,它是在随顺智之后即刻产生的。显示巴利原文
458. Rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānameva rūpavirāgabhāvanāvasena pavattaṃ arūpajjhānanti nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaṃ vissajjento dhammasenāpati ‘‘sukhassa ca pahānā’’tiādinā vissajjesi. Apagamanena vigamena paccayā apagamanapaccayā sukhādippahānāni. Adhigamapaccayā pana kasiṇesu rūpāvacaracatutthajjhānaṃ heṭṭhimā tayo ca āruppā. Na hi sakkā tāni anadhigantvā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanamadhigantuṃ. Nirodhato vuṭṭhānakaphalasamāpattinti nirodhato vuṭṭhānabhūtaṃ aniccānupassanāsamudāgataphalasamāpattiṃ. Sā hi ‘‘animittā cetovimuttī’’ti vuccati. Yathā samathanissando abhiññā, mettākaruṇāmuditābrahmavihāranissando upekkhābrahmavihāro, kasiṇanissando āruppā, samathavipassanānissando nirodhasamāpatti, evaṃ vipassanāya nissandaphalabhūtaṃ sāmaññaphalanti āha ‘‘vipassanānissandāya phalasamāpattiyā’’ti. Ārammaṇā nāma sārammaṇadhammānaṃ visesato uppattinimittanti āha ‘‘sabbanimittānanti rūpādīnaṃ sabbārammaṇāna’’nti. Natthi ettha kiñci saṅkhāranimittanti animittā, asaṅkhatā dhātūti āha ‘‘sabbanimittāpagatāya nibbānadhātuyā’’ti. Phalasamāpattisahajātaṃ manasikāraṃ sandhāyāha, na āvajjanamanasikāraṃ. Na hettha tassa sambhavo anulomānantaraṃ uppajjanato.
「于此位」是指在所说的灭尽定的初、中、后三个阶段的执取中,此特指执取最后阶段的那个位置。「以二力」指以止与观的力量。「及三行」指身行等三种行。「以十六种智行」是指无常随观、苦随观、无我随观、厌离随观、离欲随观、灭随观、弃舍随观、转起随观、入流道……乃至阿拉汉果等至,以这些十六种智行。「以九种定行」是指初禅定等九种定行。若有人能于这些行中得自在,便称为「自在慧」。这里所解说的,正是这种自在慧——应作如此连属。「抉择说」指以抉择方式展开的注疏解说。因此,应依照《清净道论》及其注释中所说的方式来了知。显示巴利原文
Imasmiṃ ṭhāneti idha vuttanirodhassa ādimajjhapariyosānānaṃ gahitānaṃ imasmiṃ pariyosānassa gahitaṭṭhāne. Dvīhi balehīti samathavipassanābalehi. Tayo ca saṅkhārānanti kāyasaṅkhārādīnaṃ tiṇṇaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ. Soḷasahi ñāṇacariyāhīti aniccānupassanā, dukkhā, anattā, nibbidā, virāgā, nirodhā, paṭinissaggā, vivaṭṭānupassanā, sotāpattimaggo…pe… arahattaphalasamāpattīti imāhi soḷasahi ñāṇacariyāhi. Navahi samādhicariyāhīti paṭhamajjhānasamādhiādīhi navahi samādhicariyāhi. Yo yathāvuttāsu cariyāsu puggalassa vasībhāvo, sā vasībhāvatāpaññā. Assā sā kathitāti yojanā. Vinicchayakathāti vinicchayavasena pavattā aṭṭhakathā kathitā. Tasmā visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 2.868-869) taṃsaṃvaṇṇanāyañca (visuddhi. mahāṭī. 2.868) vuttanayena veditabbā.
「转起等至」是指以圣者的安住方式而安住的等至。这里的「住」是指相续住,而非刹那住。为何呢?因其已进入等至。因此说:「住,即是长久安住的意思」。「时限分别」是指预先在心中限定时间:我将以这些至度过如此长的时间。「以色等相故」是指依业、业相、趣相中,随其所应而可得之色等相。其中,因业相中可缘取六种所缘,故总说为「一切相」,但这并非指一切所缘同时或被必定地作意。这只是一种性状上的说法,就如说:“若我生病了,便当服用此药。”显示巴利原文
Valañjanasamāpatti ariyavihāravasena viharaṇasamāpatti. Ṭhitiyāti ettha pabandhaṭṭhiti adhippetā, na khaṇaṭṭhiti. Kasmā? Samāpajjanattā. Tenāha ‘‘ṭhitiyāti ciraṭṭhitattha’’nti. Addhānaparicchedoti ettakaṃ kālaṃ samāpattiyā vītināmessāmīti pageva kālaparicchedo. Rūpādinimittavasenāti kammakammanimittagatinimittesu yathārahaṃ labbhamānarūpādinimittavasena. Tattha yasmā kammanimitte chabbidhampi ārammaṇaṃ labbhati, tasmā ‘‘sabbanimittāna’’nti vuttaṃ, na sabbesaṃ ārammaṇānaṃ ekajjhaṃ, ekantato vā manasikātabbato. Lakkhaṇavacanañhetaṃ yathā ‘‘dātabbametaṃ bhesajjaṃ, yadi me byādhitā siyu’’nti.
459 「也认知青……等」这句话,是以认知青等为切入点,阐明对这些颜色的众生作意于无嗔等状态,所以论中说:「此处所说实为无量心解脱。」此处所讲的是无所有处——如此连接上下文。至于「此处讲空」、「此处讲无相」,亦同此理。「nti」表示「此处并无任何新鲜、新造的东西」等所说的意义。「这些」指无量心解脱等。它们虽各有名称,即所用词句不同,但所指相同。所谓「一法」,指阿拉汉果等至。所谓「四名」,即用无量心解脱、无所有处心解脱、空心解脱、无相心解脱这四种名称来称呼它。「此」即指此道理。「无量」意为不限定范围,或虽有限定,并非指「仅此而已」的有限范围。「无遗余」指不像不净等至那样仅执取单一的对象。显示巴利原文
459.Nīlampi sañjānātītiādinā nīlādiggahaṇamukhena taṃvaṇṇānaṃ sattānaṃ sañjānanaṃ averādibhāvamanasikaraṇaṃ jotitanti āha ‘‘etasmiñhi ṭhāne appamāṇā cetovimutti kathitā’’ti. Ettha ākiñcaññaṃ kathitanti sambandho. ‘‘Ettha suññatā’’ti, ‘‘ettha animittā’’ti etthāpi eseva nayo. Nti ‘‘idha aññaṃ abhinavaṃ nāma natthī’’tiādinā vuttaṃ atthavacanaṃ. Etāti appamāṇacetovimuttiādayo. Ekanāmakāti ekekanāmakā, ye nānābyañjanāti adhippetā. Eko dhammoti arahattaphalasamāpatti. Catunāmakoti appamāṇacetovimuttiādināmako. Etanti etamatthaṃ. Appamāṇāti anodhiso, odhisopi vā ‘‘ettakā’’ti aparimitā. Asesetvāti asubhasamāpatti viya ekasseva aggahaṇato.
虽然不净相等至也以不净相为所缘,这也是一种「有」,但从所缘聚合(撞击)这一层面的「有」来看,不净等至的似相所缘犹如具体形象,作为一种障碍、一种「有」而现前,但这里(无相心解脱)却并非如此。那么,难道梵住和初无色定的似相所缘就不存在吗?的确不存在。然而,这里之所以这样说,是因为它不像初无色定的心识那样,以似相为所缘的缘故。「我」,意为由自己。因它而有了「我」这个名称以及智慧,这就构成了「我」的存在状态。「有」一词也是「我」的同义词,所以论中说:「是指所谓的有、养育、补特伽罗等。」在这些——即无量定等四种——之中,差别显而易见。为显示它们在地与所缘上的差别,故论中说:「然而义理上……」等等。其(无相心解脱的果等至)所缘,不能用有限等、过去等、内等来表述,因此称为「不可说所缘」,因为它是以涅槃为所缘的果等至。显示巴利原文
Kiñcāpi asubhanimittārammaṇampi kiñcanaṃ hoti, ārammaṇasaṅghaṭṭanassa kiñcanassa asubhasamāpattīnampi paṭibhāganimittasaṅkhātaṃ ārammaṇaṃ sabimbaṃ viya viggahaṃ kiñcanaṃ hutvā upaṭṭhāti, na tathā imassāti. Nanu brahmavihārapaṭhamāruppānampi paṭibhāganimittabhūtaṃ kiñci ārammaṇaṃ natthīti? Saccaṃ natthi, ayaṃ pana paṭhamāruppaviññāṇaṃ viya na paṭibhāganimittabhūtaārammaṇatāya evaṃ vuttā. Attenāti attanā. Bhavati etena attāti abhidhānaṃ buddhi cāti bhāvo, attā. Bhāva-saddopi attapariyāyoti āha ‘‘bhāvaposapuggalādisaṅkhātenā’’ti. Nesaṃ appamāṇasamādhiādīnaṃ catunnaṃ. ‘‘Nānatā pākaṭāvā’’ti vuttaṃ nānattaṃ bhūmito ārammaṇato ca dassetuṃ ‘‘attho panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Parittādibhāvena atītādibhāvena ajjhattādibhāvena ca na vattabbaṃ ārammaṇaṃ etissāti navattabbārammaṇā nibbānārammaṇaphalasamāpattibhāvato.
「如此量」:因被贪等所染污,故有此量,即肤浅、狭小之心——这是它的含义。涅槃亦是无量,因为没有能衡量它的标准——将此连接起来。「不动」:指阿拉汉果心解脱,因不被敌对法所动摇。「kiñcati 是压碎、粉碎的意思」——此处说「kiñcati 压碎、粉碎」,取主动语态的语根,意为压碎。为显示其用法而说「据说人们……」等。显示巴利原文
Ettakoti rāgādīhi saṃkiliṭṭhatāya ettakappamāṇo, uttāno parittacetasoti attho. Nibbānampi appamāṇameva pamāṇakaraṇānaṃ abhāvenāti ānetvā sambandho. Akuppāti arahattaphalacetovimutti paṭipakkhehi akopanīyatāya. Kiñcatīti kattari paṭhito dhātu maddanatthoti āha ‘‘kiñcati maddatī’’ti. Tassa payogaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘manussā kirā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
诸行依聚集等密集之相,及各自作用的限定,而显现得似有实体,成为执取常、乐等的基础,故被称为「常相」、「乐相等」。然而,观于彼处破析密集,摧破对常等的执取;由于作为所缘的密集相并不存在,故说「从相拔除」。「未被执取」:在单词解释中,所指为何?即空心解脱。「于一切处」:在无量心解脱等的解释中,皆如是说。「以所缘故」:亦依所缘而同义,并非唯从自性味而言。「依此理趣」:即依无量等由所缘而得的理趣。「然于他处」:指除了「无所有」等词生起的因缘之外,当「无量」等词以其他因缘生起时,此种心解脱也有;此法亦通于其他情况。「依此理趣」:即依相应名称而应被称呼的理趣。以见谛为入门,依轮回转起而宣说的教导,以阿罗汉道为顶峰,顺次第圆满开示。至于此处未加分别的义理,皆易于了知。显示巴利原文
Samūhādighanavasena sakiccaparicchedatāya ca saviggahā viya upaṭṭhitā saṅkhārā niccādiggāhassa vatthutāya ‘‘niccanimittaṃ sukhādinimitta’’nti ca vuccati. Vipassanā pana tattha ghanavinibbhogaṃ karontī niccādiggāhaṃ vidhamentī ‘‘nimittaṃ samugghātetī’’ti vuttā ghananimittassa ārammaṇabhūtassa abhāvā. Na gahitāti ekatthapadaniddese pāḷiyaṃ kasmā na gahitā? Sāti suññatā cetovimutti. Sabbatthāti appamāṇācetovimuttiādiniddesesu. Ārammaṇavasenāti ārammaṇavasenapi ekatthā, na kevalaṃ sabhāvasarasatova. Iminā pariyāyenāti appamāṇatotiādinā ārammaṇato laddhapariyāyena. Aññasmiṃ pana ṭhāneti ākiñcaññādisaddapavattihetuto aññena hetunā appamāṇātisaddappavattiyaṃ etassa cetovimuttiyā honti. Esa nayo sesesupi. Iminā pariyāyenāti iminā tāya tāya samaññāya voharitabbatāpariyāyena. Saccānaṃ dassanamukhena vaṭṭavasena uṭṭhitadesanaṃ arahattena kūṭaṃ gaṇhanto yathānusandhināva desanaṃ niṭṭhapesi. Yaṃ panettha atthato avibhattaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyameva.
4. 《小吠陀罗经》注释显示巴利原文
4. Cūḷavedallasuttavaṇṇanā
460 460. 此教导以问答方式展开,因此为总明提问者、回答者及所问因缘,而说「此是谁……」等。「近事男身份」:指未证道的近事男身份。「他们」:指那一万一千位。由证道所生的寂静,他诸根寂静,内心寂静。显示巴利原文
460. Ayaṃ desanā yasmā pucchāvissajjanavasena pavattā, tasmā pucchakavissajjake pucchānimittañca samudāyato vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘ko panāya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Upāsakattanti amaggāgataṃ upāsakattaṃ. Tesanti ekādasanahutānaṃ. Maggāgatena upasamena santindriyo santamānaso.
「今日圣子将如何呢?」她沿街张望。「为了扶持」:意为搀扶他的手,依以往的习惯,她伸出手。「外在的」:指与己不同、不相合的外在事物。「破坏者」:指离间语者。显示巴利原文
‘‘Kiṃ nu kho ajja bhavissati ayyaputto’’ti vīthiṃ olokayamānā. Olambanatthanti tassa hatthāvalambanatthaṃ pubbāciṇṇavasena attano hatthaṃ pasāresi. Bahiddhāti attanā aññaṃ visabhāgavatthuṃ sandhāya vadati. Paribhedakenāti pesuññavādinā.
出于对证得的少欲,他思惟:“不应宣说。”而后又出于悲悯,思惟“若我确实……”等词。“此法”:指出世间法。为转向离系而累积的决择分善,是亲依止缘。她心想:“若我有此亲依止缘,便能获得此法;若没有,未来也将成为亲依止缘。”如长时间熏修的油灯,火焰在瓶中闪耀,被内在闪耀的因缘所催促,她说道:“既然如此,请允许我出家。”显示巴利原文
Adhigamappicchatāya ‘‘na pakāsetabbo’’ti cintesi. Puna taṃ anukampanto ‘‘sace kho panāha’’ntiādiṃ cintesi. Eso dhammoti eso lokuttaradhammo. Vivaṭṭaṃ uddissa upacitaṃ nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ kusalaṃ upanissayo. ‘‘Yadi me upanissayo atthi, sakkā etaṃ paṭiladdhuṃ. Sacepi natthi, āyatiṃ upanissayo bhavissatī’’ti cirakālaparibhāvitāya ghaṭe padīpajālā viya abbhantare dippamānāya hetusampattiyā codiyamānā āha ‘‘evaṃ sante mayhaṃ pabbajjaṃ anujānāthā’’ti.
利养与恭敬生起,因为他长久以来积集了福德。具足愿力成就:指苏迦达长老曾向莲华上佛的上首弟子礼敬,行了决择分施并发了愿,以此具足成就的愿力。“不久便感疲倦”:指修习业处时,由于观已成熟,无需长久精勤。为阐明前文之义,而说“从此以后”等。“第二次去”:指为出家而作的第二次出行。显示巴利原文
Lābhasakkāro uppajji sucirakālaṃ katūpacitapuññatāya. Abhinīhārasampannattāti sujātattherassa padumuttarassa bhagavato aggasāvakassa nipaccakāraṃ katvā – ‘‘tumhehi diṭṭhadhammassa bhāgī assa’’nti nibbedhabhāgiyaṃ dānaṃ datvā katapatthanāsaṅkhātasampannābhinīhārattā. Nāticiraṃ kilamitthāti kammaṭṭhānaṃ bhāventī vipassanāya paripākavasena ciraṃ na kilamittha. Vuttamevatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘ito paṭṭhāyā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Dutiyagamanenāti pabbājanatthaṃ gamanato dutiyagamanena.
“引近”:即依问题的实质将其拉近。“自有身”:即自己的身体。如同接受随意存放的物品一般,领受于其中。“单环结”:即唯有一结。因一结易解,多结难解,故举一结,以显示解答容易做到。立于无碍解的范畴内,以此显示长老尼已通达无碍解。“成为缘”:指由作为所缘等方式而成为缘。显示巴利原文
Upanetvāti pañhassa atthabhāvena upanetvā. Sakkāyanti sakāyaṃ. Upanikkhittaṃ kiñci vatthuṃ sampaṭicchamānā, viya sampaṭicchantī viya. Eko eva pāso etissāti ekapāsakā, gaṇṭhi. Sā hi sumociyā, anekapāsā pana dummociyā, ekapāsaggahaṇaṃ vissajjanassa sukarabhāvadassanatthaṃ . Paṭisambhidāvisaye ṭhatvāti etena theriyā pabhinnapaṭisambhidataṃ dasseti. Paccayabhūtāti ārammaṇādivasena paccayabhūtā.
由于长老尼所证得的殊胜境界并非维莎卡自己所能领悟的范围,因此他才会在心中思量“我做不到”等,应当这样来理解。“以谛的区分问题的解答”:因为揭示了属于圣谛范围的法,并解答了所谓的“区分问题”——也就是分辨何为彼、何为此、确定其差别的问题,所以这样说。“两个谛”是指苦谛和集谛。“回转”是指翻转过来。“结问题”:因其极难透彻洞察,如同死结一般的问题,故称为结问题。显示巴利原文
Theriyā visesādhigamassa attano avisayatāya visākho ‘‘na sakkā’’tiādinā cintesīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Saccavinibbhogapañhabyākaraṇenāti saccapariyāpannassa dhammassa dassanato aññānaññatthaniddhāraṇabhedanāsaṅkhātassa vinibbhogapañhassa vissajjanena. Dve saccānīti dukkhasamudayasaccāni. Paṭinivattetvāti parivattetvā. Gaṇṭhipañhanti dubbinibbedhatāya gaṇṭhibhūtaṃ pañhaṃ.
“那个取”并非就是“那些五取蕴”,因为部分不能等同于整体,整体也不能等同于部分。同时,“取”也不是在五取蕴之外别有他物,因为取正是五取蕴的一部分。毕竟,部分不可能脱离整体而独立存在。如果有人说“取就是它”等语,则显示了双方观点皆有过失。“具有色等自性”:取有可能具有色、受、想、识的自性,也可能具有触、思等心所的自性。“如果在别处”:这是假设,如果取彻底离开五取蕴而单独存在。“在他宗”:指在其他部派的学说中。“心不相应的随眠”:这只是举例,因为那些部派主张心没有色法等状态,识等也可以是心不相应的。“如是解答”:他以“贤友,不是这样的”等话语,指出取实际上就是对于诸蕴的欲贪,以此来解答。由于这解答能确立真实的法与义,因此它不相离。对于任何地方都不会产生迷惑,不会滞碍。在提问的领域里,它驱散了愚痴的黑暗,如同点燃了千盏明灯一般。取的具体情况,因其并不浅显明白,对大多数人来说是深隐的。对于尚未懂得其中关窍的人,就如同被物遮蔽了一样。显示巴利原文
Na taṃyeva upādānaṃ te pañcupādānakkhandhā ekadesassa samudāyatābhāvato, samudāyassa ca ekadesatābhāvato. Nāpi aññatra pañcahi upādānakkhandhehi upādānaṃ tassa tadekadesabhāvato. Na hi ekadeso samudāyavinimutto hoti. Yadi hi taññevātiādinā ubhayapakkhepi dosaṃ dasseti. Rūpādisabhāvampīti rūpavedanāsaññāviññāṇasabhāvampi, phassacetanādisabhāvampi upādānaṃ siyā. Aññatra siyāti pañcahi upādānakkhandhehi visuṃyeva upādānaṃ yadi siyā. Parasamayeti nikāyavāde. Cittavippayutto anusayoti nidassanamattametaṃ nikāyavāde cittasabhāvābhāvaviññāṇādīnampi cittavippayuttabhāvapaṭijānanato. Evaṃ byākāsīti ‘‘na kho, āvuso’’tiādinā khandhagatachandarāgabhāvena byākāsi. Atthadhammanicchayasambhavato asambandhena. Tesu katthacipi asammuyhanato avitthāyantena. Pucchāvisaye mohandhakāravigamanena padīpasahassaṃ jālentena viya. Saupādānupādānaṭṭhānaṃ anuttānatāya pacurajanassa gūḷho. Aggahitasaṅketānaṃ kesañci paṭicchāditasadisattā paṭicchanno. Tilakkhaṇabbhāhatadhammavisayatāya tilakkhaṇāhato. Gambhīrañāṇagocaratāya gambhīro. Laddhapatiṭṭhā ariyasaccasampaṭivedhanato. Evaṃ diṭṭhadhammādibhāvato vesārajjappattā. Sabbaso nivutthabrahmacariyatāya tiṇṇaṃ bhavānampi aparabhāge nibbāne nivutthavatīti bhavamatthake ṭhitā.
461 “他见色是我”:先将此句提出,然后用“在此,有一类人”等这段出自《无碍解道》的经文来解释其含义。在此,“见为是我”是指将其见为“我”,凭借有身见将其见为自我。“我”这个词,是用来指称自我。持有“我”论的人,是基于“我”的认知来安立一个自我的。因此,他会将那个色执取为“我”,并说“这个我的色”。他所称呼的那个“我”——也就是所谓的“我的自我”——认为这色就是我。如此一来,他就将色和我视为无有差别的同一体,认为两者不分彼此。对于这样看待的人,色就如我一样,或者我如色一样,那么色也就必然是无常的了。“焰”是指火焰。如果火焰是颜色,那它就只应为眼识所认知的对象,而非身识所认知的对象;或者,如果颜色也能被身识等认知,那就与火焰没有区别了。所以,这个譬喻与其所譬喻的对象一样,对于一个持邪见者来说,都是不能成立的。他是以邪见的观察方式在看,而不是以渴爱、慢、慧的随观方式在看。将没有物质形态的受等诸蕴执取为“我”,就好比由于影子依赖于树,有人…显示巴利原文
461.‘‘Rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’ti paduddhāraṃ katvā ‘‘idhekacco’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 1.130) paṭisambhidāpāṭhena tadatthaṃ vivarati. Tattha attato samanupassatīti attāti samanupassati, attabhāvena samanupassati. Ahanti attānaṃ niddisati. Ahaṃbuddhinibandhanañhi attānaṃ attavādī paññapeti, tasmā yaṃ rūpaṃ so ahanti yadetaṃ mama rūpaṃ nāma, so ahanti vuccamāno mama attā taṃ mama rūpanti rūpañca attañca advayaṃ anaññaṃ samanupassati. Tathā passato ca attā viya rūpaṃ, rūpaṃ viya vā attā aniccoti āpannameva . Accīti jālasikhā. Sā ce vaṇṇo, cakkhuviññeyyāva siyā, na kāyaviññeyyā, vaṇṇopi vā kāyādiviññeyyo acciyā anaññattāti upameyyaṃ viya upamāpi diṭṭhigatikassa ayuttāva. Diṭṭhipassanāyāti micchādiṭṭhisaṅkhātāya passanāya passati, na taṇhāmānapaññānupassanāya. Arūpaṃ vedanādiṃ attāti gahetvā chāyāya rukkhādhīnatāya chāyāvantaṃ rukkhaṃ viya, rūpassa santakabhāvena attādhīnatāya rūpavantaṃ attānaṃ samanupassati. Pupphādhīnatāya pupphasmiṃ gandhaṃ viya ādheyyabhāvena attādhīnatāya rūpassa attani rūpaṃ samanupassati. Yathā karaṇḍo maṇino ādhāro, evaṃ rūpampi attano ādhāroti katvā attānaṃ rūpasmiṃ samanupassati. Eseva nayoti iminā attano vedanādīhi anaññattaṃ tesañcādhāraṇataṃ nissitatañca yathāvuttaṃ atidisati.
「无色是我」被提出,就如「有受者」等说法一样,因为它并不涉及与色法相杂的情况。「色与无色混合的我」被提出,是因为将色法与其余受想行识等无色法合在一起执取为一个我。「断灭见」被提出,是因为这种见地认为色等诸法会彻底毁灭。因此有人说:“若有人宣称‘色是我’,那个色便不再生起;而我的这个自我,则是生起又灭去的。如此一来,他便落入了这种断灭的见解。”这也适用于其余的十五种情况。而「常见」被提出,是因为从“有色”等角度执取时,并未对色本身作清晰辨析,因而执著它为恒常。显示巴利原文
Arūpaṃ attāti kathitaṃ ‘‘vedanāvanta’’ntiādīsu viya rūpena vomissakatāya abhāvato. Rūpārūpamissako attā kathito rūpena saddhiṃ sesārūpadhammānaṃ attāti gahitattā. Ucchedadiṭṭhi kathitā rūpādīnaṃ vināsadassanato. Tenevāha ‘‘rūpaṃ attāti yo vadeyya, taṃ na upapajjati, attā me uppajjati ca veti cāti iccassa evamāgataṃ hotī’’tiādi. Avasesesūti pannarasasu ṭhānesu. Sassatadiṭṭhi kathitā rūpavantādibhāvena gahitassa aniddhāritarūpattā.
一个邪见者,对于他所执取为“我”的那个对象,绝大多数时候也会一并执取它为恒常、安乐。然而,圣弟子由于以相反的观照破除了这种执取,彻底善见一切法无我,因此不把色看作是我,而是如实照见色为无常、苦、无我;对于受、想、行、识等,也是如此。为阐明此义,所以经典中说“不以色为我”等。同样地,正如无明、有与渴爱是轮回的集起之因,有身见也是轮回的集起。因此在讨论邪见时,便说“由这些邪见,便有继续流转”等;而在讨论断除邪见时,则说“由破除这些邪见,便不再有继续流转”等。显示巴利原文
Diṭṭhigatiko yaṃ vatthuṃ attāti samanupassati, yebhuyyena taṃ niccaṃ sukhanti ca samanupassateva. Sāvako pana tappaṭikkhepena sabbe dhammā anattāti sudiṭṭhattā rūpaṃ attāti na samanupassati, tathābhūto ca aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ anattāti samanupassati, tathā vedanādayoti dassento ‘‘na rūpaṃ attato’’tiādimāha. Evaṃ bhavadiṭṭhipi avijjābhavataṇhā viya vaṭṭassa samudayoyevāti diṭṭhikathāyaṃ ‘‘ettakena gamanaṃ hotī’’tiādi. Diṭṭhippahānakathāyañca ‘‘ettakena gamanaṃ na hotī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
462 由于对方所追问的正是前面已解释过的义理,所以注释中说:“长老尼反问之后,才应当给予解答。”为展示反问的方式,于是说了“居士”等这番话。「以行道」是指:以导向有身灭的道之状态。「以有为、无为的方式,以世间、出世间的方面,以被包含、未被包含的方面」——这里的“以……方式(方面)”一词,需各自分别搭配来理解。在此语境下,固然并没有一种名为“无为”的道,但之所以这样问:“道是有为的,还是无为的?”纯粹是顺着提问的方式来探讨。单凭用了「圣」这个词,便已确立了道是出世间的。然而,那些归属于能包含的蕴中的道法,也可能有世间性,因此在这里采用了“世间”的理解。此外,虽然经典原文中只出现了“已被包含”而没有出现“未被包含”,但那些以“能包含者”身份被提及的,其本身并非“被包含”,所以注释书才作了“未被包含”的理解,这一点应当看到。关于「有为」等词的解释:由种种因缘条件和合、共同造作而成,故称「有为」。既然是有为的,对于具足此道的人而言,它在根本上是……显示巴利原文
462. Heṭṭhā vuttamatthameva pucchitattā ‘‘theriyā paṭipucchitvā vissajjetabbo’’ti vatvā paṭipucchanavidhiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘upāsakā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Paṭipattivasenāti sakkāyanirodhagāminipaṭipadābhāvena. Saṅkhatāsaṅkhatavasena lokiyalokuttaravasena saṅgahitāsaṅgahitavasenāti ‘‘vasenā’’ti padaṃ paccekaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Tattha kāmaṃ asaṅkhato nāma maggo natthi, kiṃ saṅkhato, udāhu asaṅkhatoti pana pucchāvasena tathā vuttaṃ? ‘‘Ariyo’’ti vacaneneva maggassa lokuttarato siddhā, saṅgāhakakhandhapariyāpannānaṃ pana maggadhammānampi siyā lokiyatāti idha lokiyaggahaṇaṃ. Kiñcāpi saṅgahitapadameva pāḷiyaṃ āgataṃ, na asaṅgahitapadaṃ, ye pana saṅgāhakabhāvena vuttā, te saṅgahitā na hontīti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ asaṅgahitaggahaṇaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Saṅkhatotiādīsu samecca sambhuyya paccayehi katoti saṅkhato. Tathābhūto ca taṃsamaṅgino puggalassa pubbabhāgacetanāti mayhaṃ maggo aṭṭhaṅgiko hotu sattaṅgiko vāti cetitabhāvena cetito. Sahajātacetanāyapi cetitova tassā sahakārīkāraṇabhāvato, tato eva pakappito āyūhito. Paccayehi nipphāditattā kato nibbattito ca. Samāpajjantena attano santāne sammadeva āpajjantena uppādentena. Iti sattahipi padehi paccayanibbattitaṃyeva ariyamaggassa dasseti.
圣道含有诸蕴的一部分为其构成要素,因此圣道是“有分”之法;而诸蕴自身则不具此种部分,故为“无分”之法。所谓“分”,即藉以显现总聚体的那个部分、分支。“道”指圣道。由于圣道仅是一个构成部分,故只说“一分”而已。而“无分的诸蕴”,是说诸蕴乃总聚的整体,以毫无遗漏的全部组成分而构成。譬如一座城市,是国家的一部分,因城市包含在国家之中,故说此城被国家所“包含”;同理,圣道是戒、定、慧三蕴的一部分,因圣道被含摄在三蕴之中,故说圣道被这三蕴所“包含”。这便是以“如城被国所包含”的比喻来阐明此理。“同类者”,指性质相同、本质一致者。就此而言,戒蕴若依“九亿千种戒”等分类,或依已具备的受持戒、远离戒等方式来把握时,则是无量、多样的,故是“无分的”;然而,道心中的戒,唯是“活命第八戒”,仅是彻底断除烦恼的那种远离,范围极狭,故是“有分的”。定蕴亦然,若依小、大显示巴利原文
Asaṅgahito khandhānaṃ padeso etassa atthīti maggo sappadeso. Natthi etesaṃ padesāti khandhā nippadesā. Padissati etena samudāyoti hi padeso, avayavo. Ayanti maggo. Sappadesattā ekadesattā. Nippadesehi samudāyabhāvato niravasesapadesehi. Yathā nagaraṃ rajjekadesabhūtaṃ tadantogadhattā rajjena saṅgahitaṃ, evaṃ ariyamaggo khandhattayekadesabhūto tadantogadhattā tīhi khandhehi saṅgahitoti dasseti ‘‘nagaraṃ viya rajjenā’’ti iminā. Sajātitoti samānajātitāya, samānasabhāvattā evāti attho. Ettha ca sīlakkhandho ‘‘nava koṭisahassānī’’tiādinā (visuddhi. 1.20; apa. aṭṭha. 2.55.55; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.1.37) vuttapabhedavasena ceva sampattasamādānaviratiādivasena ca gayhamāno nippadeso, maggasīlaṃ pana ājīvaṭṭhamakameva samucchedaviratimattamevāti sappadesaṃ. Samādhikkhandho parittamahaggatādivasena ceva upacārappanāsamādhivasena ca anekabhedatāya nippadeso, maggasamādhi pana lokuttarova , appanāsamādhi evāti sappadeso. Tathā paññākkhandho parittamahaggatādivasena ceva sutamayañāṇādivasena ca anekabhedatāya nippadeso, maggapaññā pana lokuttarāva, bhāvanāmayā evāti sappadesā. Attano dhammatāyāti sahakārīkāraṇaṃ anapekkhitvā attano sabhāvena attano balena appetuṃ na sakkoti vīriyena anupatthambhitaṃ, satiyā ca anupaṭṭhitaṃ. Paggahakiccanti yathā kosajjapakkhe na patitā cittaṭṭhiti, tathā paggaṇhanakiccaṃ. Apilāpanakiccanti yathā ārammaṇe na pilavati, evaṃ apilāpanakiccaṃ.
“俱生”,是说它们一同生起、一起运作。精进对于定能安止于所缘上,是殊胜的助缘:如同一位朋友,弯下腰,以背作支撑,助人站得更稳。正念对于定能坚固地持续在所缘上,也是重要的助缘:如同一位朋友,以肩膀抵住,让人牢牢站稳。“由所作”,便是从它们实际起到帮助作用的角度来说的。显示巴利原文
Ekato jātāti sahajātā. Piṭṭhiṃ datvā onatasahāyo viya vāyāmo samādhissa ārammaṇe appanāya visesapaccayabhāvato. Aṃsakūṭaṃ datvā ṭhitasahāyo viya sati samādhissa ārammaṇe daḷhapavattiyā paccayabhāvato. Kiriyatoti upakārakiriyato.
“撞击之后”,是撞击所缘之后的意思。的确,寻被称为“有撞击的作用”,而瑜伽行者则说:“令业处成为以推论撞击所得、以寻撞击所得。”“于此亦”,即是在正见与正思惟之中。“由所作”,是指如前所述的资助作用。显示巴利原文
Ākoṭetvāti ārammaṇaṃ āhanitvā. Tathā hi vitakko ‘‘āhananaraso’’ti, yogāvacaro ca ‘‘kammaṭṭhānaṃ takkāhataṃ vitakkapariyāhataṃ karotī’’ti vuccati. Idhāpīti sammādiṭṭhisaṅkappesu. Kiriyatoti vuttappakāraupakārakiriyato.
破坏对净相、乐相等所缘的执取,即是四功用的成就。“以缘性”:即俱生缘等缘性。“唯依四功用成就”:这是显示对于道精进,唯如此被摄持。因为那个道精进作为单一法存在时,依前所说的饶益自性并以眷属义而成为资具,便成就四功用。“与道相应诸法”:以此句也含摄了道本身之法,而非仅是与它相应的触等法。“一刹那心”:从道心生起的角度说,唯有一刹那心。显示巴利原文
Subhasukhādinimittaggāhavidhamanaṃ catukiccasādhanaṃ. Paccayattenāti sahajātādipaccayabhāvena. Catukiccasādhanavasenevāti idaṃ maggavīriyasseva gahitabhāvadassanaṃ. Tañhi ekaṃyeva hutvā catukiccaṃ yathāvuttaupakārakasabhāvena ca parivāraṭṭhena parikkhāro hoti. Maggasampayuttadhammānanti iminā maggadhammānampi gahaṇaṃ, na taṃsampayuttaphassādīnaṃyeva. Ekacittakkhaṇikāti maggacittuppādavasena ekacittakkhaṇikā.
“以七种智”:即以到达最极殊胜的七速行相应之智,或以七随观智。“最初的习行即是习行,此后的增长即是修习,反复地做即是多修习”:以此意趣,才说“以不同的心”等。凡依意趣抽出应取义之经典,为不了义经。凡依文句表面取义者,为了义经。如果此经是了义经,而习行等确实在各别不同的心中发生,倘真如此。习行等指的是心多次生起,而非仅一次,因此说“一个心”等。此中略义:若心正以习行方式转起,纵极长久,也唯能以习行方式转起;同样,若正以修习、多修习方式转起,亦唯如此。然而,于此并没有这样固定的法则可得:唯这些心以习行转起,他们心以修习转起,又以多修习转起。因此,对那些主张出世间道有多刹那心者,此过失实难避免。然而,正如在预备阶段,属于正见等法于种种心中生起遍知等作用,在通达时,相应地成就四功用并转起成为一刹那心;同样,依修观而生的行之力量,习行、修习、多修习在显示巴利原文
Sattahi ñāṇehīti paramukkaṃsagatehi sattahi javanehi sampayuttañāṇehi, sattahi vā anupassanāñāṇehi. Ādito sevanā āsevanā, tato paraṃ vaḍḍhanā bhāvanā, punappunaṃ karaṇaṃ bahulīkammanti adhippāyenāha ‘‘aññena cittenā’’tiādi. Adhippāyavasena niddhāretvā gahetabbatthaṃ suttaṃ neyyatthaṃ. Yathārutavasena gahetabbatthaṃ nītatthaṃ. Evaṃ santeti yadi idaṃ suttaṃ nītatthaṃ, āsevanādi ca visuṃ visuṃ cittehi hoti, evaṃ sante. Āsevanādi nāma cittassa anekavāraṃ uppattiyā hoti , na ekavāramevāti āha ‘‘ekaṃ citta’’ntiādi. Tatrāyaṃ saṅkhepattho – āsevanāvasena pavattamānaṃ cittaṃ sucirampi kālaṃ āsevanāvaseneva pavatteyya, tathā bhāvanābahulīkammavasena pavattamānānipi, na cettha ettakāneva cittāni āsevanāvasena pavattanti, ettakāni bhāvanāvasena, bahulīkammavasenāti niyamo labbhati. Iti anekacittakkhaṇikaariyamaggaṃ vadantassa dunnivāriyovāyaṃ doso. Yathā pana pubbabhāgepi nānācittesu pavattapariññādikiccānaṃ sammādiṭṭhiādīnaṃ paṭivedhakāle yathārahaṃ catukiccasādhanaṃ, ekacittakkhaṇikā ca pavatti, evaṃ vipassanāya pavattābhisaṅkhāravasena āsevanābhāvanābahulīkammāni paṭivedhakāle ekacittakkhaṇikāneva hontīti vadantānaṃ ācariyānaṃ na koci doso āsevanādīhi kātabbakiccassa tadā ekacittakkhaṇeyeva sijjhanato. Tenāha ‘‘ekacittakkhaṇikāvā’’tiādi. Sace sañjānātīti sace saññattiṃ gacchati. Yāguṃ pivāhīti uyyojetabbo dhammasākacchāya abhabbabhāvatoti adhippāyo.
463 “于福行等”:以“等”字,也摄取了以身思等为相的身行等,并不只是福行、非福行、不动行。“以身所系故”:因系属于身,故由身造作,非因身等起;因为那些法是心等起的。“而被生成”:这是就“有身时则有,无身时则无”而说的。“语言”:即语声。“造作”:即产生。因此说“生成”。因为脱离了寻与伺的心,不能产生语声。“以心所系故”:以此显示心为依止等缘之性,以及“心行”称为“造作”。“相互杂合”:意义上虽有别异,但以身行等名称所能称谓的状态而相互杂合,如同没有差别,因此变得混乱、杂染、不明显、不昭著、难以说明、难以了知。“执取、握持、释放、移动”:对任何依身体而应执取者,引生、成就名为“执取”的握持、名为“释放”的舍离、名为“如理移动”的活动等,这些行因此产生。从身转起的行,以及由身所造作的行,即称为“身行”。“颚骨移动”:即颚骨的活动。“语破”:即发出语言。以此造作语言,于此便称为“语行”。显示巴利原文
463.Puññābhisaṅkhārādīsūti ādi-saddena kāyasañcetanādi lakkhaṇe kāyasaṅkhārādikepi saṅgaṇhāti, na apuññāneñjābhisaṅkhāre eva. Kāyapaṭibaddhattā kāyena saṅkharīyati, na kāyasamuṭṭhānattā. Cittasamuṭṭhānā hi te dhammāti. Nibbattīyatīti ca idaṃ kāye sati sabbhāvaṃ , asati ca abhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Vācanti vacīghosaṃ. Saṅkharotīti janeti. Tenāha ‘‘nibbattetī’’ti. Na hi taṃ vitakkavicārarahitacittaṃ vacīghosaṃ nibbattetuṃ sakkoti. Cittapaṭibaddhattāti etena cittassa nissayādipaccayabhāvo cittasaṅkhārasaṅkharaṇanti dasseti. Aññamaññamissāti atthato bhinnāpi kāyasaṅkhārādivacanavacanīyabhāvena aññamaññamissitā abhinnā viya, tato eva āluḷitā saṃkiṇṇā avibhūtā apākaṭā duddīpanā duviññāpayā. Ādānaggahaṇamuñcanacopanānīti yassa kassaci kāyena ādātabbassa ādānasaṅkhātaṃ gahaṇaṃ, vissajjanasaṅkhātaṃ muñcanaṃ, yathātathācalanasaṅkhātaṃ copananti imāni pāpetvā sādhetvā uppannā. Kāyato pavattā saṅkhārā, kāyena saṅkharīyantīti ca kāyasaṅkhārātveva vuccanti. Hanusaṃcopananti hanusañcalanaṃ. Vacībhedanti vācānicchāraṇaṃ. Vācaṃ saṅkharontīti katvā idha vacīsaṅkhārātveva vuccanti.
464 「将入」一词,其所缘是临近于灭、即将到来的状态,舍近取远没有意义。从取为灭尽基础的非想非非想处心开始,即称为入灭尽;基于此意趣,故说「以两个句子,说出了非想非非想处等至之时」。「其心已如此修习」:这里取的是恒久限定之心,因为其余的心并不是无间的。确实,若离于令二力、智、定行自在转起的心,恒久限定之心便不能成就无心状态。显示巴利原文
464.Samāpajjissanti padaṃ nirodhassa āsannānāgatabhāvavisayaṃ āsannaṃ vajjetvā dūrassa gahaṇe payojanābhāvato. Nirodhapādakassa nevasaññānāsaññāyatanacittassa ca gahaṇato paṭṭhāya nirodhaṃ samāpajjati nāmāti adhippāyena ‘‘padadvayena nevasaññānāsaññāyatanasamāpattikālo kathito’’ti vuttaṃ. Tathā cittaṃ bhāvitaṃ hotīti ettha addhānaparicchedacittaggahaṇaṃ itaresaṃ nānantariyabhāvato. Na hi baladvayañāṇasamādhicariyānaṃ vasībhāvāpādanacittehi vinā addhānaparicchedacittaṃ acittakabhāvāya hoti.
「以其余诸行」:即以身行和心行。「唯于第二禅那断灭」:以不达到而灭。对于其余的情况,也是同样的道理。「将出」一词,其所缘是临近于出、即将到来的状态,舍近取远没有意义。由于从灭尽出定是由心生起所限定的,故在其前便说:「以两个句子,说出了在灭尽内之时」。「其心已如此修习」:即如依时限而为无心状态,此后便成为有心,如是,灭尽的遍作心便被生起了。显示巴利原文
Sesasaṅkhārehīti kāyasaṅkhāracittasaṅkhārehi. Dutiyajjhāneyeva nirujjhati anuppattinirodhena. Itaresupi eseva nayo. Vuṭṭhahissanti padaṃ vuṭṭhahanassa āsannānāgatabhāvavisayaṃ āsannaṃ vajjetvā dūrassa gahaṇe payojanābhāvato. Nirodhato vuṭṭhānassa ca cittuppādena paricchinnattā tato oramevāti āha ‘‘padadvayena antonirodhakālo kathito’’ti. Tathā cittaṃ bhāvitaṃ hotīti yathā yathāparicchinnakālameva acittakabhāvo, tato paraṃ sacittakabhāvo hoti, tathā nirodhassa parikammacittaṃ uppāditaṃ hoti.
「以简择」:即依简择了知「唯此应作」,仅是止息运转。「而成就」:即成就无心状态。那么,为什么唯独成就七日呢?因为有如是的时间限定,而且这多半是由于:对于依食而活的有情,其执受的相续,凭一日所食,只能维持七日。显示巴利原文
Paṭisaṅkhāti paṭisaṅkhāya idameva kātabbaṃ jānitvā appavattimattaṃ. Samāpajjantīti acittakabhāvaṃ sampadeva āpajjanti. Atha kasmā sattāhameva samāpajjantīti? Yathākālaparicchedakaraṇato, tañca yebhuyyena āhārūpajīvīnaṃ sattānaṃ upādinnakapavattassa ekadivasaṃ bhuttāhārassa sattāhameva yāpanato.
并不存在“一切果等至皆不令出入息生起”这种说法,因此才说“令它生起”。为了指明那种不令生起的果等至,便说:“然而此……乃至……不令生起”。这里所说的“此”,是指本文句中所说的入灭尽比丘。对于“他的果等至唯是第四禅那者”,并没有这样的定准,故而有“以此作什么?”等语句。“不可称呼”:因为达到了极为微细的状态,即使存在,也不能称之为“有”,有人持此观点。然而,凭借作为灭尽基础的第四禅那等定行之力,即便并非第四禅那者,在紧随灭尽之后的果等至中,也不令出入息生起。正是由于那种果等至本身没有出入息生起,才被称为“不可称呼”。如此处理,也能很好地契合《骞赡活命者长老事》中所引的等至与果的例证。因此他说:“这是在有分时所说。”在“于唯作转起呈现之时”中,这里的“唯作转起”,是指身表和语表的动作;于其呈现之时,即是在转起的时刻。“不能造作语言”:因为在那种等至中,那些寻与伺不会产生表知。显示巴利原文
Sabbā phalasamāpatti assāsapassāse na samuṭṭhāpetīti idaṃ natthīti āha ‘‘samuṭṭhāpetī’’ti. Yā pana na samuṭṭhāpeti, taṃ dassento ‘‘imassa pana…pe… na samuṭṭhāpetī’’ti āha. Tattha imassāti idha pāḷiyaṃ vuttanirodhasamāpajjanabhikkhuno. Tassa pana phalasamāpatti catutthajjhānikāvāti niyamo natthīti āha ‘‘kiṃ vā etenā’’tiādi. Abbohārikāti sukhumattabhāvappattiyā ‘‘atthī’’ti voharituṃ asakkuṇeyyāti keci. Nirodhassa pana pādakabhūtāya catutthajjhānādisamādhicariyāya vasena acatutthajjhānikāpi nirodhānantaraphalasamāpatti assāsapassāse na samuṭṭhāpetīti abhāvato eva te abbohārikā vuttā. Evañca katvā sañjīvattheravatthumhi ānītasamāpattiphalanidassanampi suṭṭhu upapajjati. Tenāha ‘‘bhavaṅgasamayenevetaṃ kathita’’nti. Kiriyamayapavattavaḷañjanakāleti ettha kiriyamayapavattaṃ kāyavacīviññattivipphāro, tassa vaḷañjanakāle pavattanasamaye. Vācaṃ abhisaṅkhātuṃ na sakkonti aviññattijanakattā tesaṃ vitakkavicārānaṃ.
“具功德”(saguṇena)即是“具本性”(sarasena),“自性”(sabhāvena)也是这个意思。所谓“空”(suññatā),是指果等至,因其远离了贪等而为空。同样,由于贪等之相(nimitta)不存在,故称“无相”(animittā);由于贪等之愿求(paṇidhi)不存在,故称“无愿”(appaṇihitā)。因此说:“在无相和无愿中,也适用同样的道理。”在以无相和无愿的涅槃为所缘而生起的果等至中,触即称为无相触、无愿触,这一意义便以“同样的道理”来指称。显示巴利原文
Saguṇenāti sarasena, sabhāvenāti attho. Suññatā nāma phalasamāpatti rāgādīhi suññattā. Tathā rāganimittādīnaṃ abhāvā animittā, rāgapaṇidhiādīnaṃ abhāvā appaṇihitāti āha ‘‘animittaappaṇihitesupi eseva nayo’’ti. Animittaṃ appaṇihitañca nibbānaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā uppannaphalasamāpattiyaṃ phasso animitto phasso appaṇihito phasso nāmāti imamatthaṃ ‘‘eseva nayo’’ti iminā atidisati.
由于见到了我空,无我随观即是“空”(suññatā);由于破除了常相,无常随观即是“无相”(animittā);由于遮止了乐的愿求,苦随观即是“无愿”(appaṇihitā)——因此说:“空……乃至……也被称为观。”“从无常出起”:是指执取诸行无常相、导向出起的观,通过一侧出起、两侧出起以及相转起的方式,从无常而出起。“从无常把握后”等语,是为说明并非仅此一种方式。同样的道理也适用于其余情况。关于无愿观的道等,以及空观的道等,其间的连结,他说:“同样的道理。”因为对于来趣没有确定,所以成为不决定,因此会有不同的解释。事实上,三种触正在接触:像这样以功德和所缘而得名的空等三种触在接触,这并非一种决定性的说法。这是成立的,因为一个触可以获得三种名称。显示巴利原文
Attasuññatādassanato anattānupassanā suññatā, niccanimittugghāṭanato aniccānupassanā animittā, sukhappaṇidhipaṭikkhepato dukkhānupassanā appaṇihitāti āha – ‘‘suññatā…pe… vipassanāpi vuccatī’’ti. Aniccato vuṭṭhātīti saṅkhārānaṃ aniccākāraggāhiniyā vuṭṭhānagāminiyā parato ekatovuṭṭhānaubhatovuṭṭhānehi nimittapavattato vuṭṭhāti. Aniccato pariggahetvāti ca idaṃ ‘‘na ekantikaṃ evampi hotī’’ti katvā vuttaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Appaṇihitavipassanāya maggotiādinā, suññatavipassanāya maggotiādinā ca yojanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘eseva nayo’’ti. Vikappo āpajjeyya āgamanassa vavatthānassa abhāvena avavatthānakarattā. Evañhi tayo phassā phusantīti evaṃ saguṇato ārammaṇato ca nāmalābhe suññatādināmakā tayo phassā phusantīti aniyamavacanaṃ. Sameti yujjati ekasseva phassassa nāmattayayogato.
因为远离一切有为,涅槃被称为“远离”,也就是依的远离。“倾向”是指背离其对立面而朝向它,“下倾”即向下倾斜,“倾注”则是全然从那倾注的状态。显示巴利原文
Sabbasaṅkhatavivittatāya nibbānaṃ viveko nāma upadhivivekoti katvā. Ninnatā tappaṭipakkhavimukhassa tadabhimukhatā. Poṇatā onamanaṃ, pabbhāratā tato vissaṭṭhabhāvo.
465 465. 从眼等感官于色等对象转起的色身中现起,故五门之乐名为“身乐”;从意门现起者,由意触所生,故名为“心所乐”。若说“它带来乐”,此是对自性的描述。“甘甜状态的指示”,即说明可意的状态。“感受状态的指示”,即说明觉受的状态。因为从究竟义而言,唯有受在感受所缘,所缘只是被感受者。指出“苦”是对自性的描述等,亦同此理。“住立乐”:由住立、持续而为乐,并非仅是住立的刹那而已,故说“存在是乐”。“变坏苦”:由变化、离去而为苦,并非仅是坏灭的刹那而已,故说“不存在是苦”。对于未遍知所依的人,乐受的灭尽会现起为苦,应以可爱事物分离的道理来理解此义。“住立苦”与“变坏乐”于此也是同样的道理,所以又说“存在是苦,不存在是乐”。苦受的灭尽于众生现起为乐,他们如此说:“疾病平息,啊,乐便生起。”“知的状态”即是如实了知自相。了知不苦不乐受为乐,因其状态微细,如同对其余诸法从自相与共相正确了知,那是最上的乐。因此他说:显示巴利原文
465. Cakkhādito rūpādīsu pavattarūpakāyato uppajjanato pañcadvārikaṃ sukhaṃ kāyikaṃ nāma, manodvārikaṃ cetophassajātāya cetasikaṃnāma. Sabhāvaniddeso sukhayatīti katvā. Madhurabhāvadīpakanti iṭṭhabhāvajotanaṃ. Vedayitabhāvadīpakanti vedakabhāvavibhāvakaṃ. Vedanā eva hi paramatthato ārammaṇaṃ vedeti, ārammaṇaṃ pana veditabbanti. Dukkhanti sabhāvaniddesotievamādiatthavacanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘eseva nayo’’ti. Ṭhitisukhāti ṭhitiyā dharamānatāya sukhā, na ṭhitikkhaṇamattena. Tenāha ‘‘atthibhāvo sukha’’nti. Vipariṇāmadukkhāti vipariṇamanena vigamanena dukkhā, na nirodhakkhaṇena. Tenāha ‘‘natthibhāvo dukkha’’nti. Apariññātavatthukānañhi sukhavedanuparamo dukkhato upaṭṭhāti. Svāyamattho piyavippayogena dīpetabbo. Ṭhitidukkhā vipariṇāmasukhāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Tenāha ‘‘atthibhāvo dukkhaṃ, natthibhāvo sukha’’nti. Dukkhavedanuparamo hi sattānaṃ sukhato upaṭṭhāti. Evañhi vadanti – ‘‘tassa rogassa vūpasamena aho sukhaṃ jāta’’nti. Jānanabhāvoti yāthāvasabhāvato avabujjhanaṃ. Adukkhamasukhañhi vedanaṃ jānantassa sukhaṃ hoti tassa sukhumabhāvato, yathā tadaññe dhamme salakkhaṇato sāmaññalakkhaṇato ca sammadeva avabodho paramaṃ sukhaṃ. Tenevāha –
“每当他如理作意,观察诸蕴的生灭;”
了知那不死的人,获得喜与欢悦。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Yato yato sammasati, khandhānaṃ udayabbayaṃ; Labhatī pītipāmojjaṃ, amataṃ taṃ vijānata’’nti. (dha. pa. 374);
“不知的状态”:此应从相反之义来理解。因为迷乱而住,即是苦。另一种解释:“知的状态”即是有知、有智。因为与智相应、以智为依处的不苦不乐受是乐,是可意的状态。如所说:“既是可意的,也有可意的果。”“不知的状态是苦”:此也应从相反之义来理解。显示巴利原文
Ajānanabhāvoti ettha vuttavipariyāyena attho veditabbo. Dukkhañhi sammohavihāroti. Aparo nayo jānanabhāvoti jānanassa ñāṇassa sabbhāvo. Ñāṇasampayuttā hi ñāṇopanissayā ca adukkhamasukhā vedanā sukhā iṭṭhākārā. Yathāha ‘‘iṭṭhā ceva iṭṭhaphalā cā’’ti. Ajānanabhāvo dukkhanti ettha vuttavipariyāyena attho veditabbo.
哪一种随眠在随眠?即在欲贪随眠等七种随眠中,哪一种随眠以随眠的方式转起?因为它们以未断除的状态在相续中随眠,故称为随眠;得到适合的因缘时便生起,这就是其含义。由此显示出,当获得因缘时,它们便具有生起的资格。因为未断除的烦恼,在得到因缘时便生起。所以说“以未断除之义,犹如沉睡”。这些若从非简略的角度来说,应视为未来的烦恼;过去与现在的烦恼,因本质相同,也如此称呼。因为法不因时间不同而有本质的差异。如果未断除的意义就是随眠的意义,那么一切未断除的烦恼岂不都成为随眠了吗?我们不唯以未断除的状态来界定随眠的意义,而是以未断除的状态而成为强盛的烦恼,方是随眠。这种强盛性应理解为贪等各自的特相,因为在阿毗达摩中说:“他舍断强盛的随眠。”这里的“这个”是指贪随眠。“未断除的”:通过未断除的状态来说明随眠的意义。它以未遍知的蕴为所依,在遍知时,便无立足之处。因此说“并非对于所有的乐受,它都是未断除的”。而且,这里随眠的意义是就所缘来说的。因此说“并非对于一切乐受,它都生起”,这是其含义。显示巴利原文
Katamo anusayo anusetīti kāmarāgānusayādīsu sattasu anusayesu katamo anusayo anusayavasena pavattati? Appahīnabhāvena hi santāne anusayantīti anusayā, anurūpaṃ kāraṇaṃ labhitvā uppajjantīti attho. Etena kāraṇalābhe sati uppajjanārahatā nesaṃ dassitā. Appahīnā hi kilesā kāraṇalābhe sati uppajjanti. Tenāha ‘‘appahīnaṭṭhena sayito viya hotī’’ti. Te ca nippariyāyato anāgatā kilesā daṭṭhabbā, atītā paccuppannā ca taṃsabhāvattā tathā vuccanti. Na hi dhammānaṃ kālabhedena sabhāvabhedo atthi. Yadi appahīnaṭṭho anusayaṭṭho, nanu sabbepi kilesā appahīnā anusayā bhaveyyunti? Na mayaṃ appahīnatāmattena anusayaṭṭhaṃ vadāma, atha kho pana appahīnaṭṭhena thāmagatā kilesā anusayā. Idaṃ thāmagamanañca rāgādīnameva āveṇiko sabhāvo daṭṭhabbo, yato abhidhamme – ‘‘thāmagataṃ anusayaṃ pajahatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Soti rāgānusayo. Appahīnoti appahīnabhāvamukhena anusayanaṭṭhamāha. So ca apariññātakkhandhavatthuto, pariññātesu patiṭṭhaṃ na labhati. Tenāha ‘‘na sabbāya sukhāya vedanāya so appahīno’’ti. Ārammaṇavasena cāyaṃ anusayaṭṭho adhippeto. Tenāha ‘‘na sabbaṃ sukhaṃ vedanaṃ ārabbha uppajjatīti attho’’ti.
然而,「随眠」的意义,也需依「事」来了知,这即是所谓的「得地」。因此,在《清净道论》注疏(2.834)中说:显示巴利原文
Vatthuvasenapi pana anusayaṭṭho veditabbo, yo ‘‘bhūmiladdha’’nti vuccati. Tena hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (visuddhi. 2.834) vuttaṃ –
「地」是指观照的所缘,即三界所摄的五蕴。「得地」则是指于彼诸蕴中有能力生起的烦恼种类。由于它获得了地,故称「得地」,即获得地之意。然而,这并非依所缘而言。若依所缘,则即使对于已遍知的漏尽者,于其过去、未来的诸蕴,烦恼仍可生起,例如缘于大迦旃延、莲华色等尊者的蕴,或缘于修罗财主、难陀摩纳婆等的蕴而生起的烦恼。若这些便称为「得地」,则因其不可被断除,便无人能断除轮回(有)的根本了。然应知「得地」是就「事」而说的。无论何处,只要尚未以观慧遍知的诸蕴生起,从彼生起之时起,作为轮回根本的烦恼种类便于彼处随眠。此当以「未断除」之义而了知为「得地」。显示巴利原文
‘‘Bhūmīti vipassanāya ārammaṇabhūtā tebhūmakā pañcakkhandhā. Bhūmiladdhaṃ nāma tesu khandhesu uppattirahaṃ kilesajātaṃ. Tena hi sā bhūmiladdhā nāma hoti, tasmā bhūmiladdhanti vuccati, sā ca kho na ārammaṇavasena. Ārammaṇavasena hi sabbepi atītānāgate pariññātepi ca khīṇāsavānaṃ khandhe ārabbha kilesā uppajjanti mahākaccānauppalavaṇṇādīnaṃ khandhe ārabbha soreyyaseṭṭhinandamāṇavakādīnaṃ viya. Yadi ca taṃ bhūmiladdhaṃ nāma siyā, tassa appaheyyato na koci bhavamūlaṃ pajaheyya, vatthuvasena pana bhūmiladdhaṃ veditabbaṃ. Yattha yattha hi vipassanāya apariññātā khandhā uppajjanti, tattha tattha uppādato pabhuti tesu vaṭṭamūlaṃ kilesajātaṃ anuseti. Taṃ appahīnaṭṭhena bhūmiladdhanti veditabba’’ntiādi.
「此理适用于一切处」,以此说明「并非对一切苦受,彼随眠都未断除,也并非缘于一切苦受而生起」等。其中应说之义,可依前述之理了知。而「任何随眠于何处随眠,当其被断除时,即于彼处说名为断」,这是指各处提出的断除之问。对此而说「应断除何者?此即称为断除之问」。显示巴利原文
Esa nayo sabbatthāti iminā ‘‘na sabbāya dukkhāya vedanāya so appahīno, na sabbaṃ dukkhaṃ vedanaṃ ārabbha uppajjatī’’tiādiṃ atidisati. Tattha yaṃ vattabbaṃ, taṃ vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Yo anusayo yattha anuseti , so pahīyamāno tattha pahīno nāma hotī’’ti tattha tattha pahānapucchā, taṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘kiṃ pahātabbanti ayaṃ pahānapucchā nāmā’’ti.
「以同一解答」,即如“贤友毗舍佉,于此,比丘离诸欲……”(《中部》1.374)等文,仅以一个解答便同时回答了兩個問題。「两个问题」即随眠之问与断除之问,同一解答便答覆了这两问。其中,“他以彼断除贪”是一个解答,“在那里贪随眠不随眠”是另一个解答。并且,此处并未按照提问的顺序,而是依断除的次第进行解答。“他解答了两个问题”是略说,为阐明其义,接着说“于此”等。其中,「将彼如此镇伏后」一句,显示了这样的道理:某人镇伏了贪之后,不再给予它重新生起的机会,如此镇伏之后,再以圣道彻底根除。因此可以说“他以彼断除贪,在那里贪随眠不随眠”。被欲瀑流等四瀑流——或者说被轮回生存瀑流迅急冲荡的有情,应当超越这些瀑流而到达,那涅槃作为依怙,成为立足之地。因此世尊说:“已渡、到彼岸、立于高地的婆罗门”(《相应部》4.238;《如是语》69;《无碍解道》187)。显示巴利原文
Ekeneva byākaraṇenāti ‘‘idhāvuso, visākha, bhikkhu vivicceva kāmehī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.374) ekeneva vissajjanena. Dve pucchāti anusayapucchā pahānapucchāti dvepi pucchā vissajjesi. ‘‘Rāgaṃ tena pajahatī’’ti idamekaṃ vissajjanaṃ, ‘‘na tattha rāgānusayo anusetī’’ti idamekaṃ vissajjanaṃ, pucchānukkamañcettha anādiyitvā pahānakkamena vissajjanā pavattā . ‘‘Dve pucchā vissajjesī’’ti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘idhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha tathāvikkhambhitameva katvāti iminā yo rāgaṃ vikkhambhetvā puna uppajjituṃ appadānato tathāvikkhambhitameva katvā maggena samugghāteti, tassa vasena ‘‘rāgaṃ tena pajahati, na tattha rāgānusayo anusetī’’ti vattabbanti dasseti. Kāmoghādīhi catūhi oghehi saṃsārabhavogheneva vā vegasā vuyhamānesu sattesu taṃ uttaritvā pattabbaṃ, tassa pana gādhabhāvato patiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘tiṇṇo pāraṅgato thale tiṭṭhati brāhmaṇo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.238; itivu. 69; pu. pa. 187).
由空等差别而有多种类别,在圣典中以复数表述为“无上”,所以在说了「无上解脱」之后,又因它们皆共具阿罗汉性而说“于阿罗汉果”。这是处格,表示领域。「令生起愿望」即“啊,愿我证得阿罗汉果!”这样激发愿望、希求的意思。这里的“令生起”词尾表示原因。那么,以阿罗汉果为所缘的愿望如何生起呢?其实,没有任何愿望能真正以阿罗汉果为所缘而生起,因为尚未证得,它并不属于其对象的范畴。但是,以心中构想出的影像为目标,愿求便得生起。「缘希求而生」是就辗转缘而言的,但直接的缘关系并不存在,因而说“并非以愿望的安立为根源而生”。而这种「忧」是应被修习的,因为它成为断除不善、增长善的征相。因此世尊说:“帝释,我说忧也有两种——应修习的和不应修习的”(《长部》2.359-362)。经过三个月而成就者,称为「三月期」。其余二词同理。「在此分」指在这自恣的章节中。「清净自恣」就是表白“我是清净的”这种清净的自恣。因为只有阿罗汉们才有这样的自恣。显示巴利原文
Suññatādibhedena anekabhedattā pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘anuttaresū’’ti bahuvacananiddesoti ‘‘anuttarā vimokkhā’’ti vatvā puna tesaṃ sabbesampi arahattabhāvasāmaññena ‘‘arahatte’’ti vuttaṃ. Visaye cetaṃ bhummaṃ. Patthanaṃ paṭṭhapentassāti ‘‘aho vatāhaṃ arahattaṃ labheyya’’nti patthanaṃ upaṭṭhapentassa, patthentassāti attho. Paṭṭhapentassāti cettha hetumhi antasaddo. Kathaṃ pana arahattavisayā patthanā uppajjatīti? Na kāci arahattaṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā patthanā uppajjati anadhigatattā avisayabhāvato. Parikappitarūpaṃ pana taṃ uddissa patthanā uppajjati. ‘‘Uppajjati pihāpaccayā’’ti vuttaṃ paramparapaccayataṃ sandhāya, ujukaṃ pana paccayabhāvo natthīti vuttaṃ ‘‘na patthanāya paṭṭhapanamūlakaṃ uppajjatī’’ti. Idaṃ pana sevitabbaṃ domanassaṃ akusalappahānassa kusalābhivuḍḍhiyā ca nimittabhāvato. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘domanassampāhaṃ, devānaminda, duvidhena vadāmi sevitabbampi asevitabbampī’’ti (dī. ni. 2.359-362). Tīhi māsehi sampajjanakā temāsikā. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Imasmiṃ vāreti imasmiṃ pavāraṇavāre. Visuddhipavāraṇanti ‘‘parisuddho aha’’nti evaṃ pavattaṃ visuddhipavāraṇaṃ. Arahantānameva hesa pavāraṇā.
为显示“在任何时候,都不存在所谓应被断除者被断除”,遂说“并非以忧……”等语句。此为方便说,为阐明其义而说“然而此”等。但此处应说的内容,将在后面详细阐述。“执取行道、建立愿望、安立愿望之后”。「省察」是指依教诫而自我激励。「由于戒而卑劣之处」意为:比起其他向阿罗汉果行道的人,你是否有因戒而低劣之处?「极清净」即如同毫无瑕疵、已净洗的宝石那般极清净。「善策励」指精进善加策励,毫无退缩。「慧」指观慧,由于不被对立品所制伏,故不迟钝、锐利明净,在审察诸行时勇健运转。「以方便」是说,以此忧作为证得阿罗汉果的亲近助缘的方式而说。“此处意指依所缘随眠”,所以经文说“并非缘彼而生”。“于此不生起即名为断除”,因此说“在那里嗔随眠已断,这就是含义”。应以第三禅镇伏的无明,正是以圣道彻底断尽的,因此说“镇伏无明随眠后”等;或者说,因为它类似于随眠。同样地,“镇伏贪随眠后”也同此道理。在第四禅中不随眠,称为在那里尚未办应作之事。显示巴利原文
Na kadāci pahātabbassa pahāyakatā atthīti dassento ‘‘na domanassena vā’’tiādiṃ vatvā pariyāyenetaṃ vuttaṃ, taṃ vibhāvento ‘‘ayaṃ panā’’tiādimāha. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ parato vitthārena āgamissati. Paṭipadaṃ gahetvā patthanaṃ katvā patthanaṃ ṭhapetvā. Paṭisañcikkhatīti ovādavasena attānaṃ samuttejento katheti. Sīlena hīnaṭṭhānanti aññehi arahattāya paṭipajjantehi sīlena hīnaṭṭhānaṃ kiṃ tuyhaṃ atthīti adhippāyo. Suparisuddhanti akhaṇḍādibhāvato sudhotajātimaṇi viya suṭṭhu parisuddhaṃ. Supaggahitanti kadācipi saṅkocābhāvato vīriyaṃ suṭṭhu paggahitaṃ. Paññāti vipassanāpaññā paṭipakkhehi anadhibhūtatāya akuṇṭhā tikkhavisadā saṅkhārānaṃ sammasane sūrā hutvā vahati pavattati. Pariyāyenāti tassa domanassassa arahattupanissayatāpariyāyena. Ārammaṇavasena anusayanaṃ idhādhippetanti āha ‘‘na taṃ ārabbha uppajjatī’’ti. Anuppajjanamettha pahānaṃ nāmāti vuttaṃ ‘‘pahīnova tattha paṭighānusayoti attho’’ti. Tatiyajjhānena vikkhambhetabbā avijjā, sā eva ariyamaggena samucchindīyatīti ‘‘avijjānusayaṃ vikkhambhetvā’’tiādi vuttaṃ, anusayasadisatāya vā. ‘‘Rāgānusayaṃ vikkhambhetvā’’ti etthāpi eseva nayo. Catutthajjhāne nānuseti nāma tattha kātabbakiccākaraṇato.
466 「因此」:意谓由于(无明与明)彼此对立,从自性、作用、缘等各方面说皆然。「相反譬喻」于此被举出,正如“黑与白相反的诸法”等处所说。「如同黑暗」:如同黑暗一般,从其自性上就是微劣的。「不明显」:因为并非粗显之性,所以不显著、不明了。正因如此,才说「难以显示」「难以令人了知」。「如此之类」:即如同舍受一样。正如舍受不像苦受、乐受那样粗显,无明也不像贪、嗔那样粗显。所以它才是黑暗的、不明显的、难以显示、难以令人了知的——这就是它的意义。「同类譬喻」被举出,就如“誓愿与回声”等。「在多少处」:即在苦等多少处,或说在所应知之处。「相反譬喻」:例如光明即是对黑暗起破坏作用的相反譬喻。「明」指道智,「解脱」指果,因此说“这两种法是无漏的”。在「无漏义」等之中,也可以说为「殊胜义」。因为殊胜义也是解脱与涅槃所共通的,而解脱以无行的含义对涅槃具有相反性,这也确实成立。“你超越了问题,提出了不应问的”,这是其中的意趣。不能安住于合适的范围内把握问题的界限与分量而继续追问的人,便无法把握问题的边际。「于无譬喻法」:即从绝对意义上说,以同类譬喻观之便是无可譬喻。显示巴利原文
466.Tasmāti paccanīkattā sabhāvato kiccato paccayato cāti adhippāyo. Visabhāgapaṭibhāgo kathito ‘‘kaṇhasukkasappaṭibhāgā dhammā’’tiādīsu viya. Andhakārāti andhakārasadisā appakā sabhāvato. Avibhūtā apākaṭā anoḷārikabhāvato. Tato eva duddīpanā duviññāpanā. Tādisāvāti upekkhāsadisāva. Yathā upekkhā sukhadukkhāni viya na oḷārikā, evaṃ avijjā rāgadosā viya na oḷārikā. Atha kho andhakārā avibhūtā duddīpanā duviññāpanāti attho. Sabhāgapaṭibhāgo kathito ‘‘paṇidhi paṭighoso’’tiādīsu viya. Yattakesu ṭhānesūti dukkhādīsu yattakesu ṭhānesu, yattha vā ñeyyaṭṭhānesu. Visabhāgapaṭibhāgoti andhakārassa viya āloko vighātakapaṭibhāgo. Vijjāti maggañāṇaṃ adhippetaṃ, vimuttīti phalanti āha ‘‘ubhopete dhammā anāsavā’’ti. Anāsavaṭṭhenātiādīsu paṇītaṭṭhenātipi vattabbaṃ. Sopi hi vimuttinibbānānaṃ sādhāraṇo, vimuttiyā asaṅkhataṭṭhena nibbānassa visabhāgatāpi labbhateva. Pañhaṃ atikkamitvā gatosi, apucchitabbaṃ pucchantoti adhippāyo. Pañhānaṃ paricchedapamāṇaṃ gahetuṃ yuttaṭṭhāne aṭṭhatvā tato paraṃ pucchanto nāsakkhi pañhānaṃ pariyantaṃ gahetuṃ. Appaṭibhāgadhammassāti nippariyāyato sabhāgapaṭibhāgena appaṭibhāgadhammassa. Anāgatādipariyāyena nibbānassa sabhāgapaṭibhāgo vutto, visabhāge ca attheva saṅkhatadhammā, tasmā nippariyāyato kiñci sabhāgapaṭibhāgaṃ sandhāya pucchatīti katvā ‘‘accayāsī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Asaṅkhatassa hi appatiṭṭhassa ekantaniccassa sato nibbānassa kuto nippariyāyena sabhāgassa sambhavo. Tenāha ‘‘nibbānaṃ nāmeta’’ntiādi.
「偏离」在此是指:由于没有“我要问同类譬喻”这样的决意,因而在偏离了所问的意义之后才提问,并非因为不知而问。由此显示,前面的一切提问,都是先以了知、审察的方式确定后才提出的。而长老尼则如实阐明每一个所问的意义,随顺着世尊开示的智慧而解答。「沉入涅槃」即进入涅槃而安住,以涅槃为归宿。因此经中说“在涅槃内部、已入涅槃”。「它的」是指梵行的。显示巴利原文
Viraddhoti ettha sabhāgapaṭibhāgaṃ pucchissāmīti nicchayābhāvato pucchitamatthaṃ virajjhitvāva pucchi, na ajānitvāti attho. Etena heṭṭhā sabbapucchā diṭṭhasaṃsandananayena jānitvāva pavattāti dīpitaṃ hoti. Therī pana taṃ taṃ pucchitamatthaṃ sabhāvato vibhāventī satthu desanāñāṇaṃ anugantvāva vissajjesi. Nibbānogadhanti nibbānaṃ ogāhitvā ṭhitaṃ nibbānantogadhaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘nibbānabbhantaraṃ nibbānaṃ anupaviṭṭha’’nti. Assāti brahmacariyassa.
467 「具足明慧」:为了显示此处所说的明慧,故说「善于界」等。因此佛陀说:“尊者,怎样才称为明慧者?阿难,当比丘善于界、善于处、善于缘起、善于处非处,这时,阿难,这位比丘就是明慧者。”“大慧”,是指这位长老尼已证得无学位的无碍解,并圆满无碍解而安住,为了显示此义,才说「于大义」等。「与国王役使之人」,即被国王差遣办事的人。「以直接之言」,是指世尊以警醒等方式所说的言语。此处若还有在义理上未详细分辨的内容,依照前文已说的道理,便极易了知。显示巴利原文
467.Paṇḍiccenasamannāgatāti ettha vuttapaṇḍiccaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘dhātukusalā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tenevāha – ‘‘kittāvatā nu kho, bhante, paṇḍito hoti? Yato kho, ānanda, bhikkhu dhātukusalo ca hoti, āyatanakusalo ca paṭiccasamuppādakusalo ca ṭhānāṭṭhānakusalo ca. Ettāvatā nu kho, ānanda, bhikkhu paṇḍito hotī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.124). Paññāmahattaṃ nāma theriyā asekkhappaṭisambhidappattāya paṭisambhidāyo pūretvā ṭhitatāti taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘mahante atthe’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Rājayuttehīti rañño kamme niyuttapurisehi. Āhaccavacanenāti satthārā karaṇādīni āhanitvā pavattitavacanena. Yadettha atthato na vibhattaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayattā suviññeyyameva.
5. 《小法受持经注》显示巴利原文
5. Cūḷadhammasamādānasuttavaṇṇanā
468 “以法(或非法)而执取的执取”:即不论是法或是非法,都固执地认为是“法”,由此生起的行为方式便是其行径。“在造作之时”,指对于那个被执为“法”的对象正在造作的时刻。“乐”即不费力,故说“易作”。“苦异熟”,指成熟出不可爱的果报。显示巴利原文
468.Dhammotigahitagahaṇānīti dhammo vā hotu itaro vā, dhammoti paggahitaggāhappavattā cariyāva. Āyūhanakkhaṇeti tassa dhammoti gahitassa pavattanakkhaṇe. Sukhanti akicchaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘sukara’’nti. Dukkhavipākanti aniṭṭhaphalavipaccanaṃ.
469 正如眼等五根各自取境是自性成就的,意根也是如此。而且,这些所缘在可意的状态下被执取时,并无过失;在人的有身中,它们也不会产生过失——这是那些沙门婆罗门的见解,故说“于事欲、烦恼欲,都没有过失”。意为:以味著的方式受用所缘时,并无过患,依此亦不会引生障碍。“达到可受用性”是指进入能被受用的状态。此处“pā”音节有“受用”之义,而“tabya”是表示能作者的名词,意谓随自己喜好去受用。而烦恼欲在被味著时,本身即包含于事欲之中,但由于这些人是依烦恼欲而味著,故说“在事欲中以烦恼欲达到可受用性”。“以烦恼欲”是工具格。“达到可受用性”即应被受用,此处也应按能作者的角度来理解。“结髻”是指通过编结发髻的方式做成发髻。所谓“苦行者及女游行者”,是指那些已出家成为苦行者和游行者的女性。所谓施设“遍知”,乃是“他们说断除”的同义语,因此说“施设断除、超越”。由此表明:此处的“断除”,是指如实遍知“这些名为欲的事物是无常、苦、变易法”,而并不只是指……显示巴利原文
469. Yathā cakkhādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ indriyānaṃ yathāsakaṃ visayaggahaṇaṃ sabhāvasiddhaṃ, evaṃ manasopi. Te ca visayā iṭṭhākārato gahaṇe na koci doso, purisattabhāve na ca te dosaṃ pavattentīti ayaṃ tesaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ laddhīti āha ‘‘vatthukāmesupi kilesakāmesupi doso natthī’’ti, assādetvā visayaparibhoge natthi ādīnavo, tappaccayā na koci antarāyoti adhippāyo. Pātabyataṃ āpajjantīti paribhuñjanakataṃ upagacchanti. Paribhogattho hi ayaṃ pā-saddo kattusādhano ca tabya-saddo, yathāruci paribhuñjantīti attho. Kilesakāmopi assādiyamāno vatthukāmantogadhoyeva, kilesakāmavasena pana nesaṃ assādetabbatāti āha ‘‘vatthukāmesu kilesakāmena pātabyata’’nti. Kilesakāmenāti karaṇatthe karaṇavacanaṃ. Pātabyataṃ paribhuñjitabbatanti etthāpi kattuvaseneva attho veditabbo. Moḷiṃ katvāti veṇibandhavasena moḷiṃ katvā. Tāpasaparibbājikāhīti tāpasapabbajjūpagatāhi. Pariññaṃ paññapentīti idaṃ ‘‘pahānamāhaṃsū’’ti padasseva vevacananti ‘‘pahānaṃ samatikkamaṃ paññapentī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tena kāmā nāmete aniccā dukkhā vipariṇāmadhammāti yāthāvato parijānanaṃ idha ‘‘pahāna’’nti adhippetaṃ, na vinābhāvamattanti dasseti. Māluvāsipāṭikāti māluvāvidalaṃ māluvāphale poṭṭalikā. Santāsaṃ āpajjeyyāti sāle adhivatthadevatāya pavattiṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ. Tadā hi tassā evaṃ hoti. Koviḷārapattasadisehīti mahākoviḷārapattasaṇṭhānehi. Saṇṭhānavasena hetaṃ vuttaṃ, māluvāpattā pana koviḷārapattehi mahantatarāni ceva ghanatarāni ca honti. Vipulabahughanagarupattatāya mahantaṃ bhāraṃ janetvā. Sāti māluvālatā. Oghananti heṭṭhato olambanahetubhūtaṃ ghanabhāvaṃ.
提到盲林与妙林,是因为它们特别为那些人留意。在椰子等草类植物里,以啃咬为特征的白蚁,为表示它们会兴起,故说“会兴起”。仿若嬉戏一般,犹如在河岸边嬉戏。“现在我要压倒你”——它仿佛十分欢喜,便左右摇摆、挣扎缠绕。触亦是乐,因其柔软、细嫩、微妙。见亦是乐,因叶子厚密、繁多、聚集成稠密之形。生起欢喜:先前因传闻住处将被毁坏而心生恐惧,因而惊怖;现今见到它的成就而受诱惑,便生起喜悦。显示巴利原文
Andhavanasubhagavanaggahaṇaṃ tesaṃ abhilakkhitabhāvato. Nāḷikerādīsu tiṇajātīsu. Khādanupalakkhaṇaṃ upacikānaṃ uṭṭhahanaggahaṇanti āha ‘‘uṭṭhaheyyu’’nti. Keḷiṃ karontī viyāti vilambananadī viya keḷiṃ karontī. Idāni ahaṃ taṃ ajjhottharinti pamodamānā viya ito cito ca vipphandamānā vilambantī. Samphassopi sukho mudutaluṇakomalabhāvato. Dassanampi sukhaṃ ghanabahalapattasaṃhatatāya. Somanassajātāti pubbe anussavavasena bhavanavināsabhayā santāsaṃ āpajji, idāni tassā sampattidassanena palobhitā somanassajātā ahosi.
「会作茂密」:即以舒展和覆蔽的方式,纠结而成网。那样的它,因被浓密的叶子覆盖,如同伞盖,故说「会以伞盖的形状站立」。「整棵树」:指上方所有的枝干和小枝,乃至整棵树。「边垂下边生长」:仅仅以缠绕的方式向下垂降。「枝条垂至根部」:摩楼瓦藤由于重量而弯曲,枝条向下垂到树根,又向上攀升。「所有枝条」:下、中、上的枝条全部被缠绕。一再交结,犹如网罗连绵的样式,如此辗转纠结。这样缠结之后,压覆着树木。所有枝条被压低后,它自身居于上方,凭借巨大的重量,遇风吹或雨打时,便会折断枝条。「依附于枝条的宫殿」:即依附于树枝的天宫。这里,大师以「比丘们,犹如……」等方式,将过去曾发生的事引来作为譬喻,因此说「然而这个宫殿」等语。显示巴利原文
Viṭabhiṃ kareyyāti ātānavitānavasena jaṭentī jālaṃ kareyya. Tathābhūtā ca ghanapattasañchannatāya chattasadisī hotīti āha ‘‘chattākārena tiṭṭheyyā’’ti. Sakalaṃ rukkhanti upari sabbasākhāpasākhaṃ sabbarukkhaṃ. Bhassamānāti paliveṭhanavaseneva otaramānā. Yāva mūlā otiṇṇasākhāhīti māluvā bhārena onamitvā rukkhassa yāva mūlā otiṇṇasākhāhi puna abhiruhamānā. Sabbasākhāti heṭṭhā majjhe upari cāti sabbāpi sākhāyo paliveṭhentī. Saṃsibbitvā jālasantānakaniyāmena jaṭetvā. Evaṃ aparāparaṃ saṃsibbanena ajjhottharantī. Sabbasākhā heṭṭhā katvā sayaṃ upari ṭhatvā mahābhārabhāvena vāte vā vāyante deve vā vassante padāleyya. Sākhaṭṭhakavimānanti sākhāpaṭibaddhaṃ vimānaṃ. Yasmā idha satthārā ‘‘seyyathāpi, bhikkhave’’tiādinā bhūtapubbameva vatthu upamābhāvena āhaṭaṃ, tasmā ‘‘idaṃ pana vimāna’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
471 「有厚贪本性」:指那种由于无法以种种观察将其驱除,因而变得强有力,能压伏他人的贪欲界之人。「因贪而生」:即因贪的相而生起。「于所见的每一种所缘中」:指在所见的每一种不相应的所缘中。「执取相」:指执取作为烦恼生起因缘的、依随形好而起的相;然而,由于对学处的尊重,他并不走上被烦恼所依附的道路,因此对于和尚与阿阇梨所命令的惩处事务,他仍然照做。因此说「然而他绝不违犯」。「握手等」:指「喂,你先过来,你所说的和我所说的,我们到那边探讨一下」等,以拉手等方式进行,并不是出于悲悯或慈爱的动机。「有痴生起」:即具有厚痴的本性。显示巴利原文
471.Bahalarāgasabhāvoti paccavekkhaṇāhi nīharituṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya balavā hutvā abhibhavanarāgadhātuko. Rāgajanti rāganimittajātaṃ. Diṭṭhe diṭṭhe ārammaṇeti diṭṭhe diṭṭhe visabhāgārammaṇe. Nimittaṃ gaṇhātīti kilesuppattiyā kāraṇabhūtaṃ anubyañjanaso nimittaṃ gaṇhāti, sikkhāgāravena pana kilesehi nissitaṃ maggaṃ na paṭipajjati, tato eva ācariyupajjhāyehi āṇattaṃ daṇḍakammaṃ karoteva. Tenāha ‘‘na tveva vītikkamaṃ karotī’’ti. Hatthaparāmāsādīnīti – ‘‘ehi tāva tayā vuttaṃ mayā vuttañca amutra gantvā vīmaṃsissāmā’’tiādinā hatthaggahaṇādīni karonto, na karuṇāmettānidānavasena. Mohajātikoti bahalamohasabhāvo.
472 「依业律」:即依过去生所成就的、由贪增上等所决定的业律。现在,为了分别说明这贪增上等的情形,开始说「若人」等。其中,「造业时」就是造业的时候。「贪强」:是说依那种因缘具足之力,贪变得增盛了。「无贪弱」:则指与它对立的无贪是微弱的。那么,这些贪与无贪是彼此直接对立的,怎能在一个心念刹那中生起呢?其实不应认为「它们在同一个心念刹那中生起」,而是将倾向的时刻与造业的时刻视为同一时机而这样说。其他地方也同此理。「不能周遍」:是指不能压伏。凡是因「这样美好、这样广大、这样珍贵的东西不可给予他人」等想法,以未曾舍离等方式生起的、与思相应的无贪,并不能真正地压伏贪。在瞋与痴没有生起的情况下,只要获得那样的缘,无瞋与无痴即是强有力的。因此,就是由于贪、瞋、痴强,而无贪、无瞋、无痴弱,这是前面已经说过的理由,在此再做回顾。「他」:指具有那种情况的补特伽罗。「以此业」:即用这种有贪等亲依止的善业。「和善者」:就是性格柔和的人。这里以同义语「无瞋」来表达同一个意思。显示巴利原文
472.Kammaniyāmenāti purimajātisiddhena lobhussadatādiniyamitena kammaniyāmena. Idāni taṃ lobhussadatādiṃ vibhāgena dassetuṃ ‘‘yassa hī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha kammāyūhanakkhaṇeti kammakaraṇavelāya. Lobho balavāti tajjāya sāmaggiyā sāmatthiyato lobho adhiko hoti. Alobho mandoti tappaṭipakkho alobho dubbalo hoti. Kathaṃ panete lobhālobhā aññamaññaṃ ujuvipaccanīkabhūtā ekakkhaṇe pavattanti? Na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ ‘‘ekakkhaṇe pavattantī’’ti, nikantikkhaṇaṃ pana āyūhanakkhaṇameva katvā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Esa nayo sesesu. Pariyādātunti abhibhavituṃ na sakkoti. Yo hi ‘‘evaṃsundaraṃ evaṃvipulaṃ evaṃmahagghañca na sakkā parassa dātu’’ntiādinā amuttacāgatādivasena pavattāya cetanāya sampayutto alobho sammadeva lobhaṃ pariyādātuṃ na sakkoti. Dosamohānaṃ anuppattiyaṃ tādisapaccayalābheneva adosāmohā balavanto. Tasmāti lobhādosāmohānaṃ balavabhāvato alobhadosamohānañca dubbalabhāvatoti vuttameva kāraṇaṃ paccāmasati. Soti taṃsamaṅgī. Tena kammenāti tena lobhādiupanissayavatā kusalakammunā. Sukhasīloti sakhilo. Tamevatthaṃ akkodhanoti pariyāyena vadati.
无贪与无瞋力弱,不能制伏贪与瞋;而无痴则力强,能制伏痴。如此,应依相应情形,按第一轮中所说之理,了知此处类推之义。“依前述方式”,即随顺先前所说的方法。“凶暴者”即易怒之人。“迟钝者”即迟钝而愚笨之人。“和善者”即禀性和善之人。显示巴利原文
Mandā alobhādosā lobhadose pariyādātuṃ na sakkonti, amoho pana balavā mohaṃ pariyādātuṃ sakkotīti evaṃ yathārahaṃ paṭhamavāre vuttanayeneva atidesattho veditabbo. Purimanayenevāti pubbe vuttanayānusārena. Duṭṭhoti kodhano. Dandhoti mandamañño. Sukhasīlakoti sukhasīlo.
此中,依贪增上,以及依瞋痴、贪瞋、贪痴、瞋痴、贪瞋痴增上的方式,不善分中有三种单增、三种二二组合、一种三重组合,如是依贪等增上,不善分共有七轮。同样,善分中依无贪等增上,则有十四轮。其中,当说到“无贪、无瞋、无痴强”或“无贪、有瞋、无痴强”或“无贪、无瞋、有痴强”时,善分的第三、第二、第一轮,实则已包含了以瞋增上、痴增上、瞋痴增上为主的那几轮。同样,在不善分中,当说到“贪、无瞋、无痴强”或“贪、瞋、无痴强”或“贪、无瞋、痴强”时,不善分的第三、第二、第一轮,也已包含了以无瞋增上、无痴增上、无瞋无痴增上为主的那几轮。如此,将各三方包含进来之后,不善分与善分便只显示了八轮。至于那些因两者混合而有的“贪与无贪增上轮”等其他四十九轮,虽亦可示现,然因其于理不成,故未显示。因为,所谓“在同一心相续中,并无中间的不同阶段,而同时存在贪强且无贪强”等说法,是不合道理的。再者,这些法的强弱,或由对立面之关系造成,或由俱生法之关系造成。其中,就贪而言,因其对治法未被征服而显示巴利原文
Ettha ca lobhavasena, dosamoha-lobhadosa-lobhamoha-dosamoha-lobhadosamohavasenāti tayo ekakā, tayo dukā, eko tikoti lobhādiussadavasena akusalapakkhe eva satta vārā, tathā kusalapakkhe alobhādiussadavasenāti cuddasa vārā labbhanti. Tattha alobhadosamohā, alobhādosamohā, alobhadosāmohā balavantoti āgatehi kusalapakkhe tatiyadutiyapaṭhamavārehi dosussadamohussadadosamohussadavārā gahitā eva honti. Tathā akusalapakkhe lobhādosāmohā, lobhadosāmohā, lobhādosamohā balavantoti āgatehi tatiyadutiyapaṭhamavārehi adosussadaamohussadaadosāmohussadavārā gahitā evāti akusalakusalapakkhesu tayo tayo vāre antogadhe katvā aṭṭheva vārā dassitā. Ye pana ubhayasammissatāvasena lobhālobhussadavārādayo apare ekūnapaññāsa vārā kāmaṃ dassetabbā, tesaṃ asambhavato eva na dassitā. Na hi ‘‘ekasmiṃ santāne antarena avatthantaraṃ lobho ca balavā alobho cā’’tiādi yujjati. Paṭipakkhavasena vāpi etesaṃ balavadubbalabhāvo sahajātadhammavasena vā. Tattha lobhassa tāva paṭipakkhavasena anabhibhūtatāya balavabhāvo, tathā dosamohānaṃ adosāmohehi. Alobhādīnaṃ pana lobhādianabhibhavanato. Sabbesañca samānajātiyasamadhibhuyya pavattivasena sahajātadhammato balavabhāvo. Tena vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 2.472) – ‘‘lobho balavā, alobho mando. Adosāmohā balavanto, dosamohā mandā’’tiādi, so ca nesaṃ mandabalavabhāvo purimūpanissayato tathā āsayassa paribhāvitatāya veditabbo. Tenevāha ‘‘kammaniyāmenā’’ti. Sesaṃ vuttanayattā suviññeyyamevāti.
《大法受持经》释义显示巴利原文
6. Mahādhammasamādānasuttavaṇṇanā
473 “欲”,所谓“他们有对诸欲的希求”,故称“如是欲者”。“喜好”,所谓“他们有喜好、乐着、意乐”,故称“如是喜好者”。“面向”,谓面向、跃入后,以种种方式前往、接近,此即意趣——亦即见解。因此见解将应得之境,执为“正是如此”而面向、投入,以种种方式接近它,牢牢执取而不放舍。所谓“有此意趣者”,即是“如是意趣者”。“世尊”是他们能够如实证得诸法的根本,故称“以世尊为根本者”。因此他说:“我们实是依于世尊,方能了知、通达此法。”“是我们的法”,这是就他们自己所应证得而言的。因为,对应所修之法而如实证得的智慧,与证得者相关,而这些智慧皆以正自觉者为根本,不以其他为对象。故他说:“过去由迦叶正自觉者……”等。“世尊”是他们的引导者,故称“以世尊为导者”。“引导者”,即对应所修之法,能导引所化导的有情相续趣入其中者。“调伏者”,即对应所不应修之法,能令所化导的有情相续从此中出离者。又或,以渐次断除等方式而作调伏,故称“调伏者”。显示巴利原文
473. Evaṃ idāni vuccamānākāro kāmo kāmanaṃ icchā etesanti evaṃkāmā. Evaṃ chando chandanaṃ rocanaṃ ajjhāsayo etesanti evaṃchandā. Abhimukhaṃ, abhinivissa vā pakārehi eti upagacchatīti adhippāyo, laddhi. Sā hi laddhabbavatthuṃ abhimukhaṃ ‘‘evameta’’nti abhinivisantī tena tena pakārena upagacchati, hatthagataṃ katvā tiṭṭhati na vissajjeti. Evaṃ vuccamānākāro adhippāyo etesanti evaṃadhippāyā. Bhagavā mūlaṃ kāraṇaṃ etesaṃ yāthāvato adhigamāyāti bhagavaṃmūlakā. Tenāha ‘‘bhagavantañhi nissāya mayaṃ ime dhamme ājānāma paṭivijjhāmā’’ti. Amhākaṃdhammāti tehi attanā adhigantabbatāya vuttaṃ. Sevitabbānañhi yāthāvato adhigamañāṇāni adhigacchanakasambandhīni, tāni ca sammāsambuddhamūlakāni anaññavisayattā. Tenāha ‘‘pubbe kassapasambuddhenā’’tiādi. Bhagavā netā tesanti bhagavaṃnettikā. Netāti sevitabbadhamme vineyyasantānaṃ pāpetā. Vinetāti asevitabbadhamme vineyyasantānato apanetā. Tadaṅgavinayādivasena vā vinetā. Anunetāti ime dhammā sevitabbā, ime na sevitabbāti ubhayasampāpanāpanayanatthaṃ paññapetā. Tenāha ‘‘yathāsabhāvato’’tiādi.
「皈依处」:因为在此皈依,故称皈依处;世尊是这些人的皈依处,因此他们名为“以世尊为皈依处者”。或者,“皈依处”意谓以通达自性的方式各别趋入;世尊是这些人的皈依处。“以通达的方式”即依所应通达的方式。即使口中未说,在意义上却如同说“触来了,我世尊是什么名字?”等。对于“愿显现”一词,出于对“paṭi”音的期望而使用了宾格“bhagavantaṃ”,但其意义应从属格来理解,故说“愿属于世尊的”——“愿成为世尊的一份”。其意旨为:这份属于世尊的即是开示法,而听闻则是我们的一份。有些人则将“愿显现”解释为“愿被看见”,即被智慧看见,或被宣说出来。“愿现起”则是指在智慧面前现起。显示巴利原文
Paṭisaranti etthāti paṭisaraṇaṃ, bhagavā paṭisaraṇaṃ etesanti bhagavaṃpaṭisaraṇā. Paṭisarati sabhāvasampaṭivedhavasena paccekamupagacchatīti vā paṭisaraṇaṃ, bhagavā paṭisaraṇaṃ etesanti bhagavaṃpaṭisaraṇā. Paṭivedhavasenāti paṭivijjhitabbatāvasena. Asatipi mukhe atthato evaṃ vadanto viya hotīti āha ‘‘phasso āgacchati, ahaṃ bhagavā kiṃ nāmo’’ti. Paṭibhātūti ettha paṭi-saddāpekkhāya ‘‘bhagavanta’’nti upayogavacanaṃ, attho pana sāmivacanavaseneva veditabboti dassento āha ‘‘bhagavato’’ti paṭibhātūti ca bhagavato bhāgo hotu. Bhagavato hi esa bhāgo, yadidaṃ dhammassa desanā, amhākaṃ pana bhāgo savananti adhippāyo. Keci pana paṭibhātūti padissatūti atthaṃ vadanti, ñāṇena dissatu, desīyatūti vā attho. Upaṭṭhātūti ca ñāṇassa paccupaṭṭhātu.
474 「应依止」:指应当在自身相续中生起的方式,去依靠那些应依止的法。因为依止第三、第四种法的受持,众生现世与来世的成就得以增长。「应亲近」是它的同义词。或者说,「应修习」是针对亲近善士、听闻正法、如理作意而说;而「应亲近」则是针对布施等以那些为缘的福德法。显示巴利原文
474.Nissayitabbeti attano santāne uppādanavasena apassayitabbe. Tatiyacatutthadhammasamādānāni hi apassāya sattānaṃ etarahi āyatiñca sampattiyo abhivaḍḍhanti. Bhajitabbeti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Sevitabbeti vā sappurisupassayasaddhammassavanayonisomanasikāre sandhāyāha. Bhajitabbeti tappaccaye dānādipuññadhamme.
475 「以逆序的方式」:指先开示染污法,后开示清净法,这是导师说法的次第,如同“松开左手,抓住右手”那样,以逆序的方式。在前两种法的受持中正是如此,而后两种则以顺序建立论母。「依如法之味」:指所应断的法与能断的法,皆依其如实自性;自性称为“味”,因为它应被如实品尝、了知。先显示应断除的法,紧接着显示能断除这些法的法,这是开示的次第。「受持」即是执取,在自身相续中生起。显示巴利原文
475.Uppaṭipāṭiākārenāti paṭhamaṃ saṃkilesadhamme dassetvā pacchā vodānadhammadassanaṃ satthu desanāpaṭipāṭi, yathā – ‘‘vāmaṃ muñca, dakkhiṇaṃ gaṇhā’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 498; visuddhi. mahāṭī. 1.14), tathā uppaṭipāṭipakārena, sā ca kho purimesu dvīsu dhammasamādānesu , pacchimesu pana paṭipāṭiyāva mātikā paṭṭhapitā. Yathādhammarasenevāti pahātabbapahāyakadhammānaṃ yathāsabhāveneva. Sabhāvo hi yāthāvato rasitabbato jānitabbato ‘‘raso’’ti vuccati. Paṭhamaṃ pahātabbadhamme dassetvā tadanantaraṃ ‘‘ime dhammā etehi pahīyantī’’ti pahāyakadhammadassanaṃ desanānupubbī. Gahaṇaṃ ādiyanaṃ attano santāne uppādanaṃ.
478 对于因杀生、惩罚等而心生恐惧者,在其亲近之时,或于邪行之后如此离去之时,由于前思与后思,邪行成为苦受;同样,对于因嫉妒、轻蔑等所恼害者,由后思而成苦受。对贪欲、邪见等,亦应如此随应了知。“三思”指前思、后思与决志思。不与取、妄语、离间语、杂秽语这四种的决志思,或与乐俱起,或与舍俱起——此理趣此处因更增胜而未举。这里说“唯忧是苦”,是考虑到前分、后分之思亦唯与忧俱起而说。然而对于不亲近者,则说“若作遍求”等。由此显示:邪行、贪欲、邪见的前分、后分之思是亲近的,随顺于决志思,应如是见。“遍求”:于邪行等中,对当违越之境,如花鬘、香等的寻求;于杀生等中,对当杀之境、武器等的寻求,若作。即使费力,他们寻求亦可能成办,故说“亦可”,带疑惑语气。显示巴利原文
478. Vadhadaṇḍādīhi bhītassa upasaṅkamane, micchā caritvā tathā apagamane ca pubbāparacetanānaṃ vasena micchācāro dukkhavedano hoti, tathā issānindādīhi upaddutassa aparacetanāvasena, evaṃ abhijjhāmicchādiṭṭhīsupi yathārahaṃ veditabbaṃ. Tissannampi cetanānanti pubbāparasanniṭṭhāpakacetanānaṃ. Adinnādānaṃ musāvādo pisuṇavācā samphappalāpoti imesaṃ catunnaṃ sanniṭṭhāpakacetanānaṃ sukhasampayuttā vā upekkhāsampayuttā vāti ayaṃ nayo idha adhikatattā na uddhaṭo. Domanassameva cettha dukkhanti idaṃ pubbabhāgāparabhāgacetanāpi cettha āsannā domanassasahagatā eva hontīti katvā vuttaṃ. Anāsannā pana sandhāya ‘‘pariyeṭṭhiṃ vā āpajjantassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Teneva micchācārābhijjhāmicchādiṭṭhīnaṃ pubbabhāgāparabhāgacetanā āsannā sanniṭṭhāpakacetanāgatikāvāti dassitaṃ hotīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pariyeṭṭhinti micchācārādīsu vītikkamitabbavatthumālāgandhādipariyesanaṃ. Pāṇātipātādīsu māretabbavatthuāvudhādipariyesanaṃ āpajjantassa. Akicchenapi tesaṃ pariyesanaṃ sambhavatīti ‘‘vaṭṭatiyevā’’ti sāsaṅkaṃ vadati.
479 “成为乐受”意为也会成为乐受。那些思亦可能非乐受,故说“也会成为乐受”,带疑惑语气。此处“唯喜是乐”,是说前分、后分之思亦唯与喜俱起而说。而且,这是就邪行等六种除外而言。对于邪行的前分与后分,则说“身体的乐受亦可”,带疑惑语气。显示巴利原文
479.Sukhavedanā hontīti sukhavedanāpi hontīti adhippāyo. Tāsaṃ cetanānaṃ asukhavedanatāpi labbhatīti ‘‘sukhavedanāpi hontiyevā’’ti sāsaṅkavacanaṃ. Somanassameva cettha sukhanti idaṃ pubbabhāgāparabhāgacetanāpi somanassasahagatā eva hontīti katvā vuttaṃ. Tañca kho micchācāravajjānaṃ channaṃ vasena. Micchācārassa pana pubbāparabhāgassa vasena ‘‘kāyikaṃ sukhampi vaṭṭatiyevāti sāsaṅkavacanaṃ.
480 以“由嗔怒所生热恼,彼人身苦亦可能”的意图,故说“他即便执取也苦”。或唯指心之苦,为显示其屡屡生起,故说“苦、忧”。显示巴利原文
480. Dosajapariḷāhavasenassa siyā kāyikampi dukkhanti adhippāyena ‘‘so gaṇhantopi dukkhito’’ti vuttaṃ. Cetodukkhameva vā sandhāya tassa aparāparuppattidassanatthaṃ ‘‘dukkhito domanassito’’ti vuttaṃ.
481 “在十句之中”:意谓在十个部分,或在十个句子中。与舍俱相应也有可能存在,因此这里说“必然与乐俱”是一种带有保留的说法。对于远离杀生的人,由于以远离杀生等为缘,他的身体也可能没有疲劳与热恼,从而可能感受到身体的乐受;因此,说“他连同乐……”时,身乐也是可以的。显示巴利原文
481.Dasasupipadesūti dasasupi koṭṭhāsesu, vākyesu vā. Upekkhāsampayuttatāpi sambhavatīti ‘‘sukhasampayuttā hontiyevā’’ti idha sāsaṅkavacanaṃ. Pāṇātipātā paṭiviratassa kāyopi siyā vigatadarathapariḷāhoti pāṇātipātāveramaṇiādipaccayā kāyikapaṭisaṃvedanāpi sambhavatīti sahāpi sukhenāti ettha kāyiyasukhampi vaṭṭatiyeva.
482 “苦味葫芦”:指食用后会引起疯狂等过患,因此味道低劣而苦涩的葫芦。由于它的味道不可意,果实也不可意,所以不会令人喜欢。显示巴利原文
482.Tittakālābūti upabhuttassa ummādādipāpanena kucchitatittakaraso alābu. Na ruccissati aniṭṭharasatāya aniṭṭhaphalatāya ca.
483 “给予味”:意为展现味道,阐明味道。显示巴利原文
483.Rasaṃ detīti rasaṃ dasseti vibhāveti.
484 “腐臭尿”:指有腐败臭味的尿。“新鲜尿”:指如喷射般落下时是热的,因此说它上面的尿。因为尿从尿道排出时,依身体的温热而变热。显示巴利原文
484.Pūtimuttanti pūtisabhāvamuttaṃ. Taruṇanti dhārāvasena nipatantaṃ hutvā uṇhaṃ. Tenassa uparimuttatamāha. Muttañhi passāvamaggato muccamānaṃ kāyusmāvasena uṇhaṃ hoti.
485 “若混杂肛瘘之血流出”:指由肛瘘病所伴随的出血而流出的血。而“混杂胆汁之血流出”这一句,应联系起来理解。显示巴利原文
485.Yaṃ bhagandarasaṃsaṭṭhaṃ lohitaṃ pakkhandatīti bhagandarabyādhisahitāya lohitapakkhandatāya vasena yaṃ lohitaṃ vissavati. Pittasaṃsaṭṭhaṃ lohitaṃ pakkhandatīti ānetvā sambandho.
486 “Ubbiddhe”:意为“在远处”。因为去除了云、雾等垢染,天空显得既高且远,故说“成了远处”。如同说“在粪中、在尿中”那样。而“照耀、炽然、光辉”,这指的是第四种法受持,是世尊在分别善业道时所阐明。显示巴利原文
486.Ubbiddheti dūre. Abbhamahikādiupakkilesavigamena hi ākāsaṃ uttuṅgaṃ viya dūraṃ viya ca khāyati. Tenāha ‘‘dūrībhūte’’ti. Tamaṃyeva tamagataṃ ‘‘gūthagataṃ muttagata’’nti (ma. ni. 2.119; a. ni. 9.11) yathā. Bhāsate ca tapate ca virocate ca idaṃ catutthaṃ dhammasamādānaṃ vibhajantena kusalakammapathassa vibhajitvā dassitattā.
“Saṅgararukkho”即甜根树。“以 sarabhañña 念诵的方式”,是指不解析义理,唯依逐词念诵的方式进行。“Osārentassa”意为“发声者”,“Sadda”指念诵时发出的声音。那位不愿透露自己所证殊胜境界的天神,便于此处隐没。“那日”指佛陀说法的当日。由于此经是这位天神自证殊胜境界的因缘所系,故天神对此经特生喜爱。其余文句皆易了知。显示巴利原文
Saṅgararukkho kandamādasapova. Sarabhaññavasenāti atthaṃ avibhajitvā padaso sarabhaññavasena. Osārentassāti uccārentassa. Saddeti osāraṇasadde. Adhigatavisesaṃ anārocetukāmā devatā tattheva antaradhāyi. Taṃ divasanti satthārā desitadivase. Iti attano visesādhigamanimittatāya ayaṃ devatā imaṃ suttaṃ piyāyati. Sesaṃ uttānameva.
第七 《观察者经》注疏显示巴利原文
7. Vīmaṃsakasuttavaṇṇanā
487 “观察义利者”,指能够了知自利、他利等种种利益之人。“观察行者”,指从有为法的自相、共相,或从处、界等分类而作观察之人。“观察师者”,指这样考察导师之人:“所谓导师,其功德是如此这般。”“观察者”,即审查者。将心依有贪、无贪等类别加以决断,这称为“心路”,因此这里说“心的辨别”。获得了“心路智”的人,能了知他人的心生起:“此心是继此之后转起的,彼心是继彼之后转起的”,所以称为“心路,即心的转起”。“路”一词也有“机会”之义,例如“阿难,今日岂有教诫比丘尼的机会?”等语句中的用法。另有一种读法作“心行”,意为心的转起。“为了如是了知”,即为了按照接下来的宣说方式而作观察。显示巴利原文
487.Atthavīmaṃsakoti attatthaparatthādiatthavijānanako. Saṅkhāravīmaṃsakoti saṅkhatadhamme salakkhaṇato sāmaññalakkhaṇato vā āyatanādivibhāgato ca vīmaṃsako. Satthuvīmaṃsakoti ‘‘satthā nāma guṇato ediso ediso cā’’ti satthu upaparikkhako. Vīmaṃsakoti vicārako. Yaṃ cetaso sarāgādivibhāgato paricchindanaṃ, taṃ cetopariyāyo. Tenāha ‘‘cittapariccheda’’nti. Yasmā cetopariyāyañāṇalābhī – ‘‘idaṃ cittaṃ ito paraṃ pavattaṃ idamito para’’nti parassa cittuppattiṃ pajānāti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘cetopariyāyanti cittavāra’’nti. Vāratthepi hi pariyāya-saddo hoti – ‘‘kassa nu kho, ānanda, pariyāyo ajja bhikkhuniyo ovaditu’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 3.398). Cittacārantipi pāṭho, cittapavattinti attho. Evaṃ vijānanatthāyāti idāni vuccamānākārena vīmaṃsanatthāya.
488 “善友依止”,指称名为“善友”的,是修行梵行的强大依止处。“一半依靠自己的威力”,意谓此人修习的梵行,其中一半的份额,是凭借自身令解脱成熟之法威力而成就的。“一半依靠善友的威力”,余下另一半,则依靠作为所依处而修梵行的善友的教导威力,方得成就。此乃世间所共许的道理。世间人如此说道——显示巴利原文
488.Kalyāṇamittūpanissayanti kalyāṇamittasaṅkhātaṃ brahmacariyavāsassa balavasannissayaṃ. Upaḍḍhaṃ attano ānubhāvenāti iminā puggalena sampādiyamānassa brahmacariyassa upaḍḍhabhāgamattaṃ attano vimuttiparipācakadhammānubhāvena sijjhati. Upaḍḍhaṃ kalyāṇamittānubhāvenāti itaro pana upaḍḍhabhāgo yaṃ nissāya brahmacariyaṃ vussati, tassa kalyāṇamittassa upadesānubhāvena hoti, sijjhatīti attho. Lokasiddho eva ayamattho. Lokiyā hi –
一半成就源自师长,一半确实依仗自身威力;
那门学问的侍奉为一分,这一分随时节而成熟。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Pādo siddho ācariyā, pādo hissānubhāvato; Taṃvijjāsevakā pādo, pādo kālena paccatī’’ti. –
他们这样说。“自己的法性”:指自己的本性,此处意为“智”。“善友性”:因为有良善、吉祥、美好的朋友,故称“善友”;这种状态就是善友性,即具有善友的特质。与那些具足戒等功德的善人交往,称为“善伴性”。对于这些善人,身心都倾向、趋近、朝向他们的状态,称为“善倾注性”。“莫如此”的意思是:不要这样说,即不要说“梵行的一半”。在“tadaminā”一词中,“nti”只是垫音,“da”是连声字,把“i”变成“a”来表示。“以此也”指接下来要说的话。“以此理由”指凭这个原因。现在为了显示这个原因,说了“像我……”等等。显示巴利原文
Vadanti. Attano dhammatāyāti attano sabhāvena, ñāṇenāti attho. Kalyāṇamittatāti kalyāṇo bhadro sundaro mitto etassāti kalyāṇamitto, tassa bhāvo kalyāṇamittatā, kalyāṇamittavantatā. Sīlādiguṇasampannehi kalyāṇapuggaleheva ayanaṃ pavatti kalyāṇasahāyatā. Tesu eva cittena ceva kāyena ca ninnapoṇapabbhārabhāvena pavatti kalyāṇasampavaṅkatā. Māhevanti evaṃ mā āha, ‘‘upaḍḍhaṃ brahmacariyassā’’ti mā kathehīti attho. Tadamināti ettha nti nipātamattaṃ da-kāro padasandhikaro i-kārassa a-kāraṃ katvā niddeso. Imināpīti idāni vuccamānenapīti attho. Pariyāyenāti kāraṇena. Idāni taṃ kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘mamaṃ hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
同样,在其他经中也开示了亲近善友即是殊胜,因此他说“即便是在讲述比丘们的外在资具成就时”等语。在此,“令解脱成熟之法”即是指那些能使解脱——阿拉汉果成熟的法。“缘”是指病缘药资具。“大族”意为出身于大种姓者。显示巴利原文
Yathā cettha, aññesupi suttesu kalyāṇamittupanissayameva visesoti dassento ‘‘bhikkhūnaṃ bāhiraṅgasampattiṃ kathentopī’’tiādimāha. Tattha vimuttiparipācaniyadhammeti vimuttiyā arahattassa paripācakadhamme. Paccayeti gilānapaccayabhesajje. Mahājaccoti mahākulīno.
“身行仪”是指前进、后退等由正念正知所摄持的日常行为。“检视者”意即观察者、审察者。“眼所识”是因为它需通过眼门的途径来了知,故得此名。“耳所识”也应依同理理解。“染污”是指被贪等染污法所逼迫、所恼害、所毁损、所蒙垢,这是它的含义。而这些法又为那些染污所拥有,故说它们“与烦恼相应”。若这些并非眼、耳所识的对象,那巴利经文中为何那样说呢?于是解释道:“然而就像……等等。”实际上,身业与语业也被称为染污,因为它们是从染污心生起的。以某物为因的事物,也可以用那个因的名称来称呼,例如“痰是糖”。然而,出于“别让人知道我这不恰当的行为”这样的心态而进行遮掩,并不等于就没有被发现。“尊者,我们绝不会以任何事责备世尊”,如此说了之后,为了表明确实没有应受责备之处,便说道:“因为世尊……”等语。对于未修道的凡夫,可能还有可受责备之处,但对于已修道的圣者则没有。这位优多罗学童心想:“我连佛陀也要责备一番再走”,于是便跟随着。他是在世尊大出离那天,因为世尊没有信守自己说过的话而这样想的。魔罗未能找到任何过失,便如此说道:显示巴利原文
Kāyiko samācāroti abhikkamapaṭikkamādiko satisampajaññaparikkhato pākatiko ca. Vīmaṃsakassa upaparikkhakassa. Cakkhuviññeyyo nāma cakkhudvārānusārena viññātabbattā. Sotaviññeyyoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Saṃkiliṭṭhāti rāgādisaṃkilesadhammehi vibādhitā, upatāpitā vidūsitā malīnā cāti attho. Te pana tehi samannāgatā hontīti āha ‘‘kilesasampayuttā’’ti. Yadi na cakkhusotaviññeyyā, pāḷiyaṃ kathaṃ tathā vuttāti āha ‘‘yathā panā’’tiādi. Kāyavacīsamācārāpisaṃkiliṭṭhāyeva nāma saṃkiliṭṭhacittasamuṭṭhānato. Bhavati hi taṃhetukepi tadupacāro yathā ‘‘semho guḷo’’ti. ‘‘Mā me idaṃ asāruppaṃ paro aññāsī’’ti pana paṭicchannatāya na na upalabbhanti. ‘‘Na kho mayaṃ, bhante, bhagavato kiñci garahāmā’’ti vatvā garahitabbābhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘bhagavā hī’’tiādimāha. Abhāvitamaggassa hi garahitabbatā nāma siyā, na bhāvitamaggassa. Esa uttaro māṇavo ‘‘buddhampi garahitvā pakkamissāmī’’ti katvā anubandhi. Evaṃ cintesi mahābhinikkhamanadivase attano vacane aṭṭhitattā. Kiñci vajjaṃ apassanto māro evamāha –
整整七年,我步步紧跟世尊,
对于具念的正自觉者,我寻不到任何可乘之机。
显示巴利原文 ‘‘Satta vassāni bhagavantaṃ, anubandhiṃ padāpadaṃ; Otāraṃ nādhigacchissaṃ, sambuddhassa satīmato’’ti. (su. ni. 448);
“时而黑,时而白”:对于已如理受持正行道,却无法让它持续清净而住的人,有时他的身行等是黑而不净的,有时是白而清净的,如此交替间杂,处于混杂的状态。“无烦恼”:指远离随烦恼,不为烦恼所染。显示巴利原文
Kāle kaṇhā, kāle sukkāti yathāsamādinnaṃ sammāpaṭipattiṃ parisuddhaṃ katvā pavattetuṃ asakkontassa kadāci kaṇhā aparisuddhā kāyasamācārādayo, kadāci sukkā parisuddhāti evaṃ antarantarā byāmissavasena vomissakā. Nikkilesāti nirupakkilesā anupakkiliṭṭhā.
“无过失”:因为远离了过失。“长夜”:为对格,表示极长久地相续。“正入者”:指正确地进入,成为具足者。因此说“具足”。“为了掩盖自己所做的不相应之事,而装作精通阿兰若的行者。”“对他的尊崇”:指众人以丰厚的供养与恭敬来尊崇他的状态。“极度骄慢”:由于受到众人这样的尊重,而变得极为骄傲自负。显示巴利原文
Anavajjaṃ vajjarahitattā. Dīgharattanti accantasaṃyoge upayogavacanaṃ. Samāpannoti sammā āpanno samaṅgībhūto. Tenāha ‘‘samannāgato’’ti. Attanā katassa asāruppassa paṭicchādanatthaṃ āraññakoviya hutvā. Tassa parihāranti uḷārehi pūjāsakkārehi manussehi tassa parihariyamānataṃ. Atidappitoti evaṃ manussānaṃ sambhāvanāya ativiya datto gabbito.
如来并非短暂成就者,对此他如实了知。何以故?戒需经长久时间方能了知,非短时间内可知。为显示如来多生以来久已成就此善法,且此事于他极为稀有,故说“这并非稀有……”等。显示巴利原文
Na ittarasamāpannoti jānāti. Kasmā? Sīlaṃ nāma dīghena addhunā jānitabbaṃ, na ittarena. Idāni anekajātisamudācāravasena tathāgato imaṃ kusalaṃ dhammaṃ dīgharattaṃ samāpanno, tañcassa ativiya acchariyanti dassetuṃ ‘‘anacchariyaṃ ceta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ.
“阿兰若村”是指在阿兰若地区的一个小村庄。为显示他们日日在此乞食而未曾间断,故说“行乞食”。“饮”亦同理。因彼处距海遥远,故盐变得难得。显示巴利原文
Araññagāmaketi araññapadese ekasmiṃ khuddakagāme. Tattha nesaṃ divase divase piṇḍāya caraṇassa avicchinnataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘piṇḍāya carantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Pivantīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Dullabhaloṇo hoti samuddassa dūratāya.
据说,当时在毗提诃国有一万六千个大村庄。因此说:“舍弃了一万六千个圆满的村庄。”如今,此人怀有隐情,未将“你如今为何囤积而逼恼我”的意思表露出来,而只是说:“盐巴……等,不要做了。”健陀罗为了阐明他的用意,说道:“韦提希后,我又做了什么吗?”显示巴利原文
Tadā kira videharaṭṭhe soḷasa gāmasahassāni mahantāneva. Tenāha – ‘‘hitvā gāmasahassāni, paripuṇṇāni soḷasā’’ti. Idāni kasmā ‘‘sannidhiṃ dāni kubbasī’’ti maṃ ghaṭṭethāti vatthukāmo taṃ anāvikatvā ‘‘loṇa…pe… na karothā’’ti āha. Gandhāro tassādhippāyaṃ vibhāvetukāmo ‘‘kiṃ mayā kataṃ vedehīsī’’ti āha.
另一位为了表明自己的意图,诵出了以“舍弃”开头的偈颂;另一位则说出以“我说法”开头的偈颂——如此,他们之间所有的问答皆为偈颂。其中,“你教训”意指你如同逼迫一般地训诫。恶不沾染,是因为心无扰动。“有大义”是说含摄了巨大的利益。“若是他没有自己的智慧”等,是毗提诃智者心中生起如理省察的征相:“老师唯为我的利益而住,唯说正法。”故说:“然而,如是说已……”等。显示巴利原文
Itaro attano adhippāyaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘hitvā’’ti gāthamāha. Itaro ‘‘dhammaṃ bhaṇāmī’’ti gāthanti evaṃ sabbāpi nesaṃ vacanapaṭivacanagāthā. Tattha pasāsasīti ghaṭṭento viya anusāsasi. Na pāpamupalimpati cittappakopābhāvato. Mahatthiyanti mahāatthasaṃhitaṃ. No ce assa sakā buddhītiādi vedehaisino – ‘‘ācariyo mama hitesitāya ṭhatvā dhammaṃ eva bhaṇatī’’ti yoniso ummujjanākāradassanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘evañca pana vatvā’’tiādi.
“知名之性”:在世间被知晓、称为著名者,即是“知名者”;知名者的状态,名为“知名之性”。“已随行”:已进入、已达至。由于以“知名之性”一词显示了远播的声誉,故说“名声与眷属的成就”。“究竟为何”——有何目的、有何用意?“此中有什么过失”——是这个意思。显示巴利原文
‘‘Ñattā’’ti loke ñāyati vissutoti ñāto, ñātassa bhāvo ñattaṃ. Ajjhāpannoti upagato. Ñatta-ggahaṇena patthaṭayasatā vibhāvitāti āha ‘‘yasañca parivārasampatti’’nti. Kinti kiṃpayojanaṃ, ko ettha dosoti adhippāyo.
“在各处刺恼”:因陶醉于名声与眷属而变得骄慢,无论在村落、寺院、无人之处,还是在大众之中,他都抱着“我的脚所触之处,其他比丘的脚岂能触到”这般不愿被触碰的心态,犹如以脚尖点地而行一般,触恼其他比丘。“低伏”:由于谦卑柔顺而低伏,不骄慢、不刚强。“无所执着的状态”:他思惟“出家者应当具备无所执着的智慧与等持的志向”之后,便住于无所执着。“得利时也是如此,不得利时也是如此”:正如在未得利养时那样,得到利养时也同样如此,此即名为“平等一如者”。有名声、有大眷属时,亦复如是。显示巴利原文
Tattha tattha vijjhantoti yasamadena parivāramadena ca matto hutvā gāmepi vihārepi janavivittepi saṅghamajjhepi aññe bhikkhū ghaṭṭento ‘‘mayhaṃ nāma pādā itaresaṃ pādaphusanaṭṭhānaṃ phusantī’’ti aphusitukāmatāya aggapādena bhūmiṃ phusanto viya carati. Onamatīti nivātavuttitāya avanamati anuddhato atthaddho hoti. Akiñcanabhāvanti ‘‘pabbajitena nāma akiñcanañāṇena samapariggahena bhavitabba’’nti akiñcanajjhāsayaṃ paṭiavekkhitvā. Lābhepi tādī, alābhepi tādīti yathā alābhakāle lābhassa laddhakālepi tathevāti tādī ekasadiso. Yase satipi mahāparivārakālepi.
成为无畏而止息者:因成为无畏,以无恐惧故,应可止息,故为止息;以恐惧之因已断除故。且这不只是一时,而是毕竟止息——即彻底止息。或者,观察可畏之事后,因彼畏惧而止息。烦恼本身即应畏惧,故称烦恼怖畏。对其余词语,亦应以同样方式理解。七种有学:即使是七种有学,也因怖畏而止息,何况凡夫——这是要表达的意义。显示巴利原文
Abhayo hutvā uparatoti nibbhayo hutvā bhayassa abhāveneva oramitabbato uparato bhayahetūnaṃ pahīnattā. Tañca kho na katipayakālaṃ, atha kho accantameva uparatoti accantūparato. Atha kho bhāyitabbavatthuṃ avekkhitvā tato bhayena uparato. Kilesā eva bhāyitabbato kilesabhayaṃ. Esa nayo sesesupi. Satta sekkhāti satta sekkhāpi bhayūparatā, pageva puthujjanoti adhippāyo.
露地床板:即如同露地卧榻的板座,这便是它的意思。依止:即依凭,将它作为依凭之处。两者之间有一块露地床板,那位站在门口观看的常住比丘未能察觉。以不作意的方式:即并非以故意留心的方式。他想:“他因害怕我,可能躲到床底下去了”,于是朝床下看去,开口说:“你出去的时候,不得辱骂,不得造作非福。”不能忍受:长老即使见到了那样的神通相状,也克制不住自己的嗔怒,无法安忍,变得焦躁不安。显示巴利原文
Thaṇḍilapīṭhakanti thaṇḍilamañcasadisaṃ pīṭhakanti attho. Nissāyāti apassāya taṃ apassāyaṃ katvā. Dvinnaṃ majjhe thaṇḍilapīṭhakā dvāre ṭhatvā olokentassa nevāsikabhikkhussa na paññāyi. Asaññatanīhārenāti na saññatākārena. ‘‘Maṃ bhāyanto heṭṭhāmañcaṃ paviṭṭho bhavissatī’’ti heṭṭhāmañcaṃ oloketvā. Ukkāsi ‘‘bahi gacchanto akkositvā mā apuññaṃ pasavī’’ti. Adhivāsetunti tādisaṃ iddhānabhāvaṃ disvāpi paṭapaṭāyanto attano kodhaṃ adhivāsetuṃ asakkonto.
唯以灭尽:因贪的毕竟灭尽而为离贪者。非依简择而遮止:并非依简择力抑制贪的现行而成为离贪者。通过以上所说方式,说明了身行等杂染与违犯的不存在。威仪的清净,因长期反复串习而众所周知,即使与他人共处时也不被杂染。为了显示如来具有“无畏而止息”的特质,所要表明的意义便通过这些相状而被了知,故称为相状;它们是令此意义生起的根据与原因。而又因它们按照自己所认可的意义而被确定为能知相,所以世尊指出它们是那些意义的根本原因以及比知智,问道:“那么,对尊者来说,有哪些相状、哪些随由呢?”为阐明此含义,注释师说:“相状是指原因,随由是指随觉之智。”正如在世间,通过所见的烟,便能随知、比知那不见的火。同样,审察的比丘如此了知:世尊对在各个住处妥善修行或未妥善修行的比丘,都表现得平等一如,由此随知、比知他那“无畏而止息”的性质;进而,由于导师对妥善修行与未妥善修行的人既不称扬推崇,也不呵责贬斥,并宣说无颠倒的法,由此随知、比知他的正自觉性以及僧团的善修行性。显示巴利原文
Khayenevāti rāgassa accantakkhayeneva vītarāgattā. Na paṭisaṅkhāya vāretvāti na paṭisaṅkhānabalena rāgapariyuṭṭhānaṃ nivāretvā vītarāgattā. Evaṃ vuttappakārena. Kāyasamācārādīnaṃ saṃkiliṭṭhānaṃ vītikkamiyānañca abhāvaṃ ācārassa vodānaṃ cirakālasamāciṇṇatāya ñātassa sahitabhāvepi anupakkiliṭṭhatāya abhayūparatabhāvasamannesanāya ākarīyati ñāpetuṃ icchito attho pakārato ñāpīyati etehīti ākārā, upapattisādhanakāraṇāni. Tāni pana yasmā attano yathānumatassa atthassa ñāpakabhāvena vavatthīyanti, tasmā tāni tesaṃ mūlakāraṇabhūtāni anumānañāṇāni ca dassento bhagavā – ‘‘ke panāyasmato ākārā ke anvayā’’ti avocāti imamatthaṃ vibhāvento ‘‘ākārāti kāraṇāni, anvayāti anubuddhiyo’’ti āha. Yathā hi loke diṭṭhena dhūmena adiṭṭhaṃ aggiṃ anveti anumānato jānāti, evaṃ vīmaṃsako bhikkhu – ‘‘bhagavā ekekavihāresu suppaṭipannesu duppaṭipannesu ca yathā ekasadisatādassanena abhayūparatataṃ anveti anumānato jānāti, suppaṭipannaduppaṭipannapuggalesu anussādanānapasādanappattāya satthu aviparītadhammadesanatāya sammāsambuddhataṃ saṅghasuppaṭipattiñca anveti anumānato jānāti, evaṃ jānanto ca abhayūparato tathāgato sabbadhi vītarāgattā, yo yattha vītarāgo, na so tannimittaṃ kiñci bhayaṃ passati seyyathāpi brahmā kāmabhavanimittaṃ, tathā sammāsambuddho bhagavā aviparītadhammadesanattā, svākhāto dhammo ekantaniyyānikattā, suppaṭipanno saṅgho aveccappasannattā’’ti vatthuttayaṃ guṇato yāthāvato jānāti.
“以众结缚”:被“这是我的同住比丘,这是我的弟子”这类对徒众的牵挂——此即所谓的“结缚”——所系缚、所驱使。“以此彼行道”:对于被称为“善去、恶去”的善行道与恶行道。“称扬”:即依功德而推高、称叹。“贬斥”:即轻蔑指责。“于两方面依居家而作”:此句意为,像“诸比丘,大迦旃延是贤智者”那样,为策励他人行于正行道而依功德称扬,以及为未来防护而对所犯过失如法呵责,这两种举动世尊都并未遮止。显示巴利原文
Gaṇabandhanenāti ‘‘mama saddhivihārikā mama antevāsikā’’ti evaṃ gaṇe apekkhāsaṅkhātena bandhanena baddhā payuttā. Tāya tāya paṭipattiyāti ‘‘sugatā duggatā’’ti vuttāya suppaṭipattiyā duppaṭipattiyā ca. Ussādanāti guṇavasena ukkaṃsanā. Apasādanāti hīḷanā. Ubhayattha gehassitavasenāti iminā sammāpaṭipattiyā paresaṃ uyyojanatthaṃ – ‘‘paṇḍito, bhikkhave, mahākaccāno’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.205; 3.285, 322) guṇato ukkaṃsanampi āyatiṃ saṃvarāya yathāparādhaṃ garahaṇampi na nivāreti.
489 “审察者的意趣”:同样依审察而生起的意趣。根本审察者之所以是“根本的”,在于他主张有因。缚结审察者未曾从他人处听闻,所以说他是“仅依他人的话语而得出结论”。因此世尊说:“在不了知他人心之运转的情况下,应当只向如来请问。”这是将前面就共许层面所说的比知推到了极致而说。之所以如此,是因为这种比知达到了极致:即对于一切智者的话,无有欺诳地从总体上比知那非凡夫行境的义理。义理有三种:有些是现量所成就的,如色等诸法那种各人自内证知、无法用语言指陈的样貌;有些是比量所成就的,即依瓶等已被公认的缘起关系,来论证声等诸法的无常等样貌;有些是信可所成就的,即大多数人完全未曾亲见的、属于信仰领域的他世与涅槃等。在这当中,如果某位导师的话,在现量所成就的义理和比量所成就的义理上,都以其无颠倒的运作而无有欺诳,那么凭他的话,信可乐的义理便能成就;而导师的功德,由于毕竟存在,也大体上就是这种可信可乐的性质。显示巴利原文
489. Vīmaṃsakassapi adhippāyo vīmaṃsanavasena pavatto. Mūlavīmaṃsako hetuvāditāya. Gaṇṭhivīmaṃsakassa anussutibhāvato vuttaṃ ‘‘parasseva kathāya niṭṭhaṅgato’’ti. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘parassa cetopariyāyaṃ ajānantenā’’ti. Tathāgatova paṭipucchitabboti iminā pubbe sādhāraṇato vuttaṃ anumānaṃ ukkaṃsaṃ pāpetvā vadati. Ukkaṃsagatañhetaṃ anumānaṃ, yadidaṃ sabbaññuvacanaṃ avisaṃvādaṃ sāmaññato aputhujjanagocarassa atthassa anumānato. Tividho hi attho, koci paccakkhasiddho, yo rūpādidhammānaṃ paccattavedaniyo aniddisitabbākāro. Koci anumānasiddho, yo ghaṭādīsu pasiddhena paccayāyattabhāvena sādhiyamāno saddādīnaṃ aniccatādiākāro. Koci okappanasiddho, yo pacurajanassa accantamadiṭṭho saddhāvisayo paralokanibbānādi. Tattha yassa satthuno vacanaṃ paccakkhasiddhe anumānasiddhe ca atthe na visaṃvādeti aviparītappavattiyā, tassa vacanena saddheyyatthasiddhi, saddheyyarūpā eva ca yebhuyyena satthuguṇā accantasambhavato.
“这是我的行径”:那被称为“活命第八戒”的、属于我的微少功德,就是那位不知他心的审察比丘能够了知我的途径、了知我的路径。“这是他的行境”:这正是他对我的行境,仅限于此,并不超出此上。实际上,即使在《梵网经》中,世尊也仅开示了活命第八戒。“仅此范围”:行境唯限于此。如果有人立于戒,却以“这是我的”,或“我将以此戒成为天人、成为某种天人”这样的渴爱去执取它,那么由于不能超越渴爱,便不能成为戒的殊胜分或抉择分的因,此人即名为“与彼同一”。因此说:“不与彼同一,不伴有渴爱”等。显示巴利原文
Esa mayhaṃ pathoti yvāyaṃ ājīvaṭṭhamakasīlasaṅkhāto mayhaṃ oramattako guṇo, esa aparacittaviduno vīmaṃsakassa bhikkhuno mama jānanapatho jānanamaggo. Esa gocaroti eso ettako eva tassa mayi gocaro, na ito paraṃ. Tathā hi brahmajālepi (dī. ni. 1.7) bhagavatā ājīvaṭṭhamakasīlameva niddiṭṭhaṃ. Etāpāthoti ettakāpātho. Yo sīle patiṭṭhito ‘‘etaṃ mamā’’ti, ‘‘imināhaṃ sīlena devo vā bhavissāmi devaññataro vā’’ti taṇhāya parāmasanto, tassa visesabhāgiyatāya, nibbedhabhāgiyatāya vā akāraṇena taṇhaṃ anativattanato so tammayo nāma. Tenāha ‘‘na tammayo na sataṇho’’tiādi.
“所闻能带来上上殊胜”:由于所闻能带来次第递增的殊胜,且此殊胜次第愈转愈妙,世尊便将此法作为愈上、愈妙之法而宣说。“有对立的”:以“应断”与“能断”的关系而成为有对立、有对治的。“破斥黑分而说白分”:这些法类称为黑分,能断除彼者称为白分,如此破斥黑分而说白分。“破斥白分而说黑分”:此处同理,但在此应表述为“以此应断彼”。“有功用、有勤勇”:即有所作为。在相续中未断无明、爱、慢等的状态下,那些造作性的心便有功用、有勤勇,意即它们是有异熟的法性。“于彼所宣说的法中”:在那导师所宣说的世间法与出世间法中,以殊胜的道智现证其中一分——即名为道、果、涅槃的证得法之后。“以证得法,即道”:通过作为证得法的道。“于教法中”:对于教说中所安立的、属于前行部分的菩提分法,他得出结论:“确实,依由此道,我将从老死解脱。”先前以凡夫的信心即已净信,从此以后更增上地对导师生起净信:“那位无颠倒说法的正自觉者,即是世尊。”“由于是导出的”:因为法确实能从轮回显示巴利原文
Sutassa uparūpari visesāvahabhāvena uttaruttarañceva tassa ca visesassa anukkamena paṇītatarabhāvato paṇītatarañca katvā deseti. Savipakkhanti pahātabbapahāyakabhāvena sappaṭipakkhaṃ. Kaṇhaṃ paṭibāhitvā sukkanti idaṃ dhammajātaṃ kaṇhaṃ nāma, imassa pahāyakaṃ idaṃ sukkaṃ nāmāti evaṃ kaṇhaṃ paṭibāhitvā sukkaṃ. Sukkaṃ paṭibāhitvā kaṇhanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Idha pana ‘‘iminā pahātabba’’nti vattabbaṃ. Saussāhanti sabyāpāraṃ. Kiriyamayacittānañhi anupacchinnāvijjātaṇhāmānādike santāne sabyāpāratā saussāhatā, savipākadhammatāti attho. Tasmiṃ desite dhammeti tasmiṃ satthārā desite lokiyalokuttaradhamme. Ekaccaṃ ekadesabhūtaṃ maggaphalanibbānasaṅkhātaṃ paṭivedhadhammaṃ abhiññāya abhivisiṭṭhāya maggapaññāya jānitvā. Paṭivedhadhammena maggena. Desanādhammeti desanāruḷhe pubbabhāgiye bodhipakkhiyadhamme niṭṭhaṃ gacchati – ‘‘addhā imāya paṭipadāya jarāmaraṇato muccissāmī’’ti. Pubbe pothujjanikasaddhāyapi pasanno, tato bhiyyosomattāya aviparītadhammadesano sammāsambuddho so bhagavāti satthari pasīdati. Niyyānikattāti vaṭṭadukkhato eva tato niyyānāvahattā. Vaṅkādīti ādi-saddena aññaṃ asāmīcipariyāyaṃ sabbaṃ dosaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
490 “以这些观察导师的因由”:即“以清净的身行等,以及以宣说更上、更妙、无颠倒的法”等,通过这些如前所述的观察导师的因由。“以摄集字母之语句”:即能通达那些因由的、以字母合集为特征的语句。“以此处所说的文字”:依此经文中所示,因能诠表所含义理而称为“音声文字”的文字。“信可”:即进入可信乐的对象而净信,其特征便是“信可”。“即信的根本”:即作为不坏净信之信心的根本和因,所指即“清净的身行”等。“坚固”:由于彻底断除了对立面而得以善加安住。“不能夺去”:不能被移除、无法被动摇。“关于其他沙门、婆罗门、天神等,就更无必要说了”:因此说“由息灭诸恶的沙门”等。显示巴利原文
490.Imehi satthuvīmaṃsanakāraṇehīti ‘‘parisuddhakāyasamācāratādīhi ceva uttaruttaripaṇītapaṇītaaviparītadhammadesanāhi cā’’ti imehi yathāvuttehi satthuupaparikkhanakāraṇehi. Akkharasampiṇḍanapadehīti tesaṃyeva kāraṇānaṃ sambodhanehi akkharasamudāyalakkhaṇehi padehi. Idha vuttehi akkharehīti imasmiṃ sutte vuttehi yathāvuttassa atthassa abhibyañjanato byañjanasaññitehi akkharehi. Okappanāti saddheyyavatthuṃ okkantitvā pasīdanato okappanalakkhaṇā. Saddhāya mūlaṃ nāmāti aveccappasādabhūtāya saddhāya mūlaṃ nāma kāraṇanti saddahanassa kāraṇaṃ parisuddhakāyasamācārādikaṃ. Thirā paṭipakkhasamucchedena suppatiṭṭhitattā. Harituṃ na sakkāti apanetuṃ asakkuṇeyyā. Itaresu samaṇabrāhmaṇadevesu vattabbameva natthīti āha ‘‘samitapāpasamaṇena vā’’tiādi.
由于先前曾听闻“魔罗为了恼害某些佛陀及诸声闻弟子而前来”,他便思惟:“这是魔罗来了。”因为是被具足神威的圣弟子所询问,魔罗便无法妄语。“Ete”是指除了如前所述“已息灭罪恶的沙门”等之外。“如实地审察”:即如实地审察,也就是无颠倒地考量。“依真实状态”:即以真实状态、即依如实功德本身而审察。“善妙地、正确地”:即善妙而正确地。“被审察”:即被审察、被考量。其余部分容易理解。显示巴利原文
‘‘Buddhānaṃ kesañci sāvakānañca vibādhanatthaṃ māro upagacchatī’’ti sutapubbattā ‘‘ayaṃ māro āgato’’ti cintesi. Ānubhāvasampannena ariyasāvakena pucchitattā musāvādaṃ kātuṃ nāsakkhi. Eteti yathāvutte samitapāpasamaṇādayo ṭhapetvā. Sabhāvasamannesanāti yāthāvasamannesanā aviparītavīmaṃsā. Sabhāvenevāti sabbhāveneva yathābhūtaguṇato eva. Suṭṭhu sammadeva. Samannesitoti upaparikkhito. Sesaṃ suviññeyyamevāti.
8. 《憍赏弥经》释义显示巴利原文
8. Kosambiyasuttavaṇṇanā
491 因此,由于该城长有憍赏弥树,故得名为“憍赏弥”。又或认为,拘舍仙人的住处名为憍赏弥,此城位于其附近,便也称为憍赏弥。显示巴利原文
491.Tasmāti yasmā kosambarukkhavatī, tasmā nagaraṃ kosambītisaṅkhamagamāsi. Kusambassa vā isino nivāsabhūmi kosambī, tassāvidūre bhavattā nagaraṃ kosambī.
关于“由瞿施长者所建的僧园”这一句,其中含有这样的疑问:“谁是瞿施长者?他又是如何建造此园的?”为解答此隐含的疑问,便从事情缘起开始,阐明瞿施长者的事迹,于是叙述道:“有个名为安迪罗的国家……”等语。「Kedāraparicchinnaṃ」:各处被田埂划分开的田地。「Gacchanto」:沿着田埂而行时。「Pahūtapāyasaṃ」:极为丰盛的乳粥,但这乳粥浓稠油腻,因他在路上仅少量进食,消化力弱,故不能消化。由此说“不能消化”等。她美丽动人,出身良家。如此,此处仅是简要讲述瞿施长者的事迹,详细内容应依《法句经》之事中所说的道理了知。显示巴利原文
Ghositaseṭṭhinākārite ārāmeti ettha ko ghositaseṭṭhi, kathañcānena ārāmo kāritoti antolīnāya codanāya vissajjane samudāgamato paṭṭhāya ghositaseṭṭhiṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘addilaraṭṭhaṃ nāma ahosī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Kedāraparicchinnanti tattha tattha kedārabhūmiyā paricchinnaṃ. Gacchantoti kedārapāḷiyā gacchanto. Pahūtapāyasanti pahūtataraṃ pāyasaṃ, taṃ pana garu siniddhaṃ antarāmagge appāhāratāya mandagahaṇiko samāno jīrāpetuṃ nāsakkhi. Tenāha ‘‘jīrāpetuṃ asakkonto’’tiādi. Yasavati rūpavati kulaghare nibbatti. Ghositaseṭṭhi nāma jātoti evamettha saṅkhepeneva ghositaseṭṭhivatthuṃ katheti, vitthāro pana dhammapadavatthumhi (dha. pa. aṭṭha. 1.sāmāvatīvatthu) vuttanayeneva veditabbo.
「Upasaṃkappanavasena」:以内心决择的方式。「Āhāraparikkhīṇakāyassa」:身体因食物耗尽而衰损,意即由于食物耗尽而令身体衰损。「Suññāgāre」:指远离人群、安适的寂静处。显示巴利原文
Upasaṃkappanavasenāti upasaṅkappananiyāmena. Āhāraparikkhīṇakāyassāti āhāranimittaparikkhīṇakāyassa, āhārakkhayena parikkhīṇakāyassāti attho. Suññāgāreti janavivitte phāsukaṭṭhāne.
诤论的前分称为‘bhaṇḍana’(口角):即作为诤论之因的辱骂,以及类似的不善行为,名为‘bhaṇḍana’。‘Hatthaparāmāsādivasena’指因恼怒而相互抓扯对方的手、极度束缚等行为。由于主张‘这是法’‘这是律’等而成为对立之说、陷入争论者,即为陷入争论。因此说‘成为对立’等。因为依止于口,这里以‘口’指代言语,故说‘Mukhasattīhi’即‘以语为刀’。‘Saññatti’指令了解,也就是‘这是法,这是律’这样应被了解的状态。‘Nijjhatti’指如实审察此义。但义注中说:‘此仅是saññatti的同义词。’显示巴利原文
Kalahassa pubbabhāgo bhaṇḍanaṃ nāmāti kalahassa hetubhūtā paribhāsā taṃsadisī ca aniṭṭhakiriyā bhaṇḍanaṃ nāma. Hatthaparāmāsādivasenāti kujjhitvā aññamaññassa hatthe gahetvā parāmasanaaccantabandhanādivasena. ‘‘Ayaṃ dhammo’’tiādinā viruddhavādabhūtaṃ āpannāti vivādāpannā. Tenāha ‘‘viruddhabhūta’’ntiādi. Mukhasannissitatāya vācā idha ‘‘mukha’’nti adhippetāti āha ‘‘mukhasattīhīti vācāsattīhī’’ti. Saññattinti saññāpanaṃ ‘‘ayaṃ dhammo, ayaṃ vinayo’’ti saññāpetabbataṃ. Nijjhattinti yāthāvato tassa nijjhānaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘saññattivevacanameveta’’nti vuttaṃ.
‘若有,我将指出’:他因易于受教且乐于学戒,故看见了犯戒。‘你没有犯戒’:他这样说,意在表示此处也可能存在无犯的情况。然而那确是犯戒。因此说:‘他于彼犯戒生起无犯之见。’显示巴利原文
Sace hoti desessāmīti subbacatāya sikkhākāmatāya ca āpattiṃ passi. Natthi te āpattīti anāpattipakkhopi ettha sambhavatīti adhippāyenāha. Sā panāpatti eva. Tenāha – ‘‘tassā āpattiyā anāpattidiṭṭhi ahosī’’ti.
492 ‘Kalahabhaṇḍanavasena’:以诤论口角为因。‘Yathānusandhināva gataṃ’:由于诤论口角是六和敬法的对立面,能令其止息的后续教说自然与先前教说相应,因此随顺联结而展开后续经典之开示。‘Saritabbayuttā’:应被忆念、值得忆念。‘Sabrahmacārīnaṃ’:即对于同梵行者。能作令人喜爱、应被喜爱之事,故为‘piyakaraṇa’(作可爱);能作令人尊重、应被尊重之事,故为‘garukaraṇa’(作可敬)。‘Saṅgahaṇatthāya’:因它是摄受的特殊状态,故能导向摄受同梵行者,如此关联。‘Avivādanatthāya’:正因具有摄受的状态,故不导向争论。而且,以不争论之因的摄受为性,依这些力,同梵行者的和合、无破自然成就,故说‘为和合’等。由此而柔和、润泽,故称为‘mettā’(慈),‘mittabhāvo’即友爱之状态,此具慈,故为‘mettaṃ kāyakammaṃ’(慈身业)。显示巴利原文
492.Kalahabhaṇḍanavasenāti kalahabhaṇḍanassa nimittavasena. Yathānusandhināva gatanti kalahabhaṇḍanānaṃ sāraṇīyadhammapaṭipakkhattā tadupasamāvahā heṭṭhādesanāya anurūpāva uparidesanāti yathānusandhināva uparisuttadesanā pavattā. Saritabbayuttāti anussaraṇārahā. Sabrahmacārīnanti sahadhammikānaṃ. Piyaṃ piyāyitabbaṃ karontīti piyakaraṇā. Garuṃ garuṭṭhāniyaṃ karontīti garukaraṇā. Saṅgahaṇatthāyāti saṅgahavatthuvisesabhāvato sabrahmacārīnaṃ saṅgaṇhanāya saṃvattantīti sambandho. Avivādanatthāyāti saṅgahavatthubhāvato eva na vivādanāya. Sati ca avivādanahetubhūtasaṅgāhaṇatte tesaṃ vasena sabrahmacārīnaṃ samaggabhāvo bhedābhāvo siddhoyevāti āha ‘‘sāmaggiyā’’tiādi. Mijjati siniyhati etāyāti mettā, mittabhāvo, mettā etassa atthīti mettaṃ, kāyakammaṃ. Taṃ pana yasmā mettāsahagatacittasamuṭṭhānaṃ, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘mettacittena kattabbaṃ kāyakamma’’nti. Imāni mettakāyakammādīni bhikkhūnaṃ vasena āgatāni pāṭhe bhikkhūhi paccupaṭṭhapetabbatāvacanato. Bhikkhuggahaṇeneva cettha sesasahadhammikānampi gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Bhikkhuno sabbampi anavajjakāyakammaṃ ābhisamācārikakammantogadhamevāti āha – ‘‘mettacittena…pe… kāyakammaṃ nāmā’’ti. Vattavasena pavattiyamānā cetiyabodhīnaṃ vandanā mettāsadisīti katvā tadatthāya gamanaṃ mettaṃ kāyakammanti vuttaṃ. Ādi-saddena cetiyabodhibhikkhūsu vuttāvasesaapacāyanādiṃ mettāvasena pavattaṃ kāyikaṃ kiriyaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
其意为:即便是三藏佛语,在宣说时也是如此。三种善业即身善业、语善业、意善业。“Cintanaṃ”以此显示:仅仅如此思惟,便已是慈的意业,更何况依仪轨修习呢。显示巴利原文
Tepiṭakampi buddhavacanaṃ kathiyamānanti adhippāyo. Tīṇi sucaritāni kāyavacīmanosucaritāni. Cintananti iminā evaṃ cintanamattampi mettaṃ manokammaṃ, pageva vidhipaṭipannā bhāvanāti dasseti.
“成为同伴”是指在那些人面前。因为他们正在做时,当面成为同伴,即名为“身业”。并非只称“天”,而是由功德彰显其坚固性,才特别采用“天长老”这一称扬之词。表达我所执的言语,即是执为“我所”的言说。对于全然隐秘的意业,“面对”这一性质,只是依它引起认知而假立;而且为了说明,于世人共许中并不依挥手等动作而被称为“身业”,故说“睁开双眼”。因此,由言语分别而起的情况,并不包括在内。显示巴利原文
Sahāyabhāvūpagamanaṃ tesaṃ purato. Tesu karontesuyeva hi sahāyabhāvūpagamanaṃ sammukhā kāyakammaṃ nāma hoti. Kevalaṃ ‘‘devo’’ti avatvā guṇehi thirabhāvajotanaṃ devattheroti vacanaṃ paggayha vacanaṃ. Mamattabodhanaṃ vacanaṃ mamāyanavacanaṃ. Ekantatirokkhakassa manokammassa sammukhatā nāma viññattisamuṭṭhāpanavaseneva hoti, tañca kho loke kāyakammanti pākaṭaṃ paññātaṃ hatthavikārādiṃ anāmasitvā eva dassento ‘‘nayanāni ummīletvā’’ti āha. Tathā hi vacībhedavasena pavatti na gahitā.
“利得”是指因获得助缘而得到的东西,即来源清净的资具。即使获取方式不正确,也并非不名为“非法所得”,为遮止此混淆,经典中才明确说“法所得”。把所应施与的物品和所应供养的对象不加区分而受用,即是“不分别而受用者”。因此说“有两种分别”等。“以心分别”是为了表明:哪怕仅仅在心中生起分别之念,便已算是“已分别”,更不用说实际的行动了。显示巴利原文
Laddhapaccayā labbhantīti lābhā, parisuddhāgamanā paccayā. Na sammā gayhamānāpi na dhammaladdhā nāma na hontīti tappaṭisedhanatthaṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘dhammaladdhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Deyyaṃ dakkhiṇeyyañca appaṭivibhattaṃ katvā bhuñjatīti appaṭivibhattabhogī. Tenāha ‘‘dve paṭivibhattāni nāmā’’tiādi. Cittena vibhajananti etena – ‘‘cittuppādamattenapi vibhajanaṃ paṭivibhattaṃ nāma, pageva payogato’’ti dasseti.
“在接受的时候……便看护……他看见了”——这句话是指,从他们到来之时起,他便生起了平等心。正因如此,他能够轻松地做到平等受用,而他所修的“可忆念法”之行也能圆满成就。这便是圆满可忆念法的实践。显示巴利原文
Paṭiggaṇhantova…pe… passatīti iminā āgamanato paṭṭhāya sādhāraṇabuddhiṃ upaṭṭhāpeti. Evaṃ hissa sādhāraṇabhogitā sukarā, sāraṇīyadhammo cassa supūro hoti. Vattanti sāraṇīyadhammapūraṇavattaṃ.
“应施”,指无论如何都应当布施之物。为了说明:由于自身有障碍的人,无法圆满地成就对同样有障碍者的指定布施,因此这种指定的布施也并非在一切情况下都被禁止,所以才说“然而,对于这个……”等语。“可不施予”中的“亦”字,是在表明:即使是对戒行有污的人,若他确有需要且条件允许,也应当布施给他。因为所谓的布施,于任何众生都未曾被禁止。显示巴利原文
Dātabbanti avassaṃ dātabbaṃ. Attano palibodhavasena sapalibodhasseva pūretuṃ asakkuṇeyyattā odissakadānampissa na sabbattha vāritanti dassetuṃ ‘‘tena panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Adātumpīti pi-saddena dussīlassapi atthikassa sati sambhave dātabbanti dasseti. Dānañhi nāma kassaci na nivāritaṃ.
“大山村”,是龙岛附近的一个村庄。他说:“尊者,我的可忆念法已经圆满了……我钵中的食物不会用尽。”他这样说,是为了消除他们的追悔。听了这话,那些长老们便认可道:“这位是可忆念法的圆满者。”据说,他其实在年轻之时就已经是可忆念法的圆满者了。为了表明他的这种修行并非徒劳无果,他才说:“这些东西会送到我这儿来的。”显示巴利原文
Mahāgirigāmo nāma nāgadīpapasse eko gāmo. Sāraṇīyadhammo me, bhante, pūrito…pe… pattagataṃ na khīyatīti āha tesaṃ kukkuccavinodanatthaṃ. Taṃ sutvā tepi therā ‘‘sāraṇīyadhammapūrako aya’’nti abbhaññaṃsu. Daharakāle eva kiresa sāraṇīyadhammapūrako ahosi, tassā ca paṭipattiyā avañjhabhāvavibhāvanatthaṃ ‘‘ete mayhaṃ pāpuṇissantī’’ti āha.
她说:“我是可忆念法的圆满者,仅凭我钵中所纳之食,也足以令所有这些比丘尼维持生计。你们不必为他们的去处操心。”显示巴利原文
Ahaṃ sāraṇīyadhammapūrikā, mama pattapariyāpannenapi sabbāpimā bhikkhuniyo yāpessantīti āha ‘‘mā tumhe tesaṃ gatabhāvaṃ cintayitthā’’ti.
于七种犯聚中,或在开头、或在结尾、或在中间——这是依所诵出的经本原文而说。犯聚其实并无固定的次第。所谓处在边缘的,就像衣服的边角,或像布边被割裂的衣服。‘破缺’,即指有破损,或已损坏。‘穿孔’于此也是同样的道理。掺入了异色,占一半或三分之一,因杂染而成坏色,名为‘斑驳’;仅以异色的斑点间杂,名为‘杂色’——这就是二者的区别。透过‘从渴爱奴役中解脱’的说法,阐明这些戒律成为导向轮回解脱的依止。以‘能成就自在的状态’这句话,表示此处是透过省略末尾词的方式来解释‘能成就自在的’及‘自在的’这两个词。因为戒德对于缺少智慧的人是难以衡量的,所以说‘智者所称赞’。‘不被渴爱与邪见所执取’,是指不抱持‘依靠此戒,我将成为某位天神’这种被渴爱执取的念头,也不抱持‘依靠此戒,我成为天神后,将在那里永恒常住’这种被邪见执取的念头。‘可呵责执取者’。所谓戒,以‘无悔’等为次第,最终目的唯在成就‘定’,所以说‘能导向定的’。等同的状态显示巴利原文
Sattasu āpattikkhandhesu ādimhi vā ante vā, vemajjheti ca idaṃ uddesāgatapāḷivasena vuttaṃ. Na hi añño koci āpattikkhandhānaṃ anukkamo atthi. Pariyante chinnasāṭako viyāti vatthante, dasante vā chinnavatthaṃ viya. Khaṇḍanti khaṇḍavantaṃ, khaṇḍitaṃ vā. Chiddanti etthāpi eseva nayo . Visabhāgavaṇṇena upaḍḍhaṃ, tatiyabhāgaṃ vā sambhinnavaṇṇaṃ sabalaṃ, visabhāgavaṇṇeheva pana bindūhi antarantarā vimissaṃ kammāsaṃ, ayaṃ imesaṃ viseso. Taṇhādāsabyato mocanavacaneneva tesaṃ sīlānaṃ vivaṭṭupanissayatamāha. Bhujissabhāvakaraṇatoti iminā bhujissakarāni bhujissānīti uttarapadalopenāyaṃ niddesoti dasseti. Aviññūnaṃ appamāṇatāya ‘‘viññuppasatthānī’’ti vuttaṃ. Taṇhādiṭṭhīhi aparāmaṭṭhattāti – ‘‘imināhaṃ sīlena devo vā bhavissāmi devaññataro vā’’ti taṇhāparāmāsena – ‘‘imināhaṃ sīlena devo hutvā tattha nicco dhuvo sassato bhavissāmī’’ti diṭṭhiparāmāsena ca aparāmaṭṭhattā. Parāmaṭṭhunti codetuṃ. Sīlaṃ nāma avippaṭisārādipārampariyena yāvadeva samādhisampādanatthanti āha ‘‘samādhisaṃvattakānī’’ti. Samānabhāvo sāmaññaṃ, paripuṇṇacatupārisuddhibhāvena majjhe bhinnasuvaṇṇassa viya bhedābhāvato sīlena sāmaññaṃ sīlasāmaññaṃ, taṃ gato upagatoti sīlasāmaññagato. Tenāha ‘‘samānabhāvūpagatasīlo’’ti.
此处所说‘此见’,即我与你们现前证得的正见。以其彻见四圣谛故,名为‘见’。于‘一切行无常,一切行是苦,一切法无我’,及‘世尊是正自觉者,法是世尊所善说,僧团是善巧修行者’这些见解上的一致,即是‘同见的状态’。这在其余的可忆念法中,是最上、最根本的。因为只要有了此见,其余诸法便容易成就,故为诸法的‘总摄者’。也因如此,它是它们的‘联结者’;犹如安上椽子使其不散,能摄持、守持,故为‘总摄者’。因为是最上,故是‘联结者’。这些法具有这种联结作用,所以称为‘具有联结性的’;或者读作saṅghāṭaniyaṃ,意为与联结相关的;也可将字母k换成y,成为saṅghāṭaniyaṃ。由于这里仅从共通性来说,所以用中性词表达。显示巴利原文
Yāyaṃ diṭṭhīti yā ayaṃ diṭṭhi mayhañceva tumhākañca paccakkhabhūtā. Catusaccadassanaṭṭhena diṭṭhi, ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā aniccā, sabbe saṅkhārā dukkhā, sabbe dhammā anattā’’ti, ‘‘sammāsambuddho bhagavā, svākhāto bhagavatā dhammo, suppaṭipanno saṅgho’’ti ca diṭṭhiyā sāmaññaṃ samānadiṭṭhibhāvaṃ. Aggaṃ itaresaṃ sāraṇīyadhammānaṃ padhānabhāvato. Etasmiṃ sati sukhasiddhito tesaṃ saṅgāhikaṃ, tato eva tesaṃ saṅghāṭanikaṃ gopānasiyo aparipatante katvā saṅgaṇhāti dhāretīti saṅgāhikaṃ. Saṅghāṭanti aggabhāvena saṅghāṭabhāvaṃ. Saṅghāṭanaṃ etesaṃ atthīti saṅghāṭanikaṃ, saṅghāṭaniyanti vā pāṭho, saṅghāṭane niyuttanti vā saṅghāṭanikaṃ, ka-kārassa ya-kāraṃ katvā saṅghāṭaniyaṃ. Sāmaññato eva gahitattā napuṃsakaniddeso.
493 不仅初道正见具有这样的自性,其余诸道正见更不必说,因此称为“此即入流道之见”。“乃至仅此”的意思是:仅仅被贪等烦恼中的一种缠缚其心,就已经称为“心被缠缚”,更不用说被两种、多种烦恼缠缚了。“于一切处”指在所有八个项目当中。“妥善安立”是指如同修习道之后能现证诸谛那样正确地安立,因此说“为了觉悟诸谛”。“彼智”即是转起“我确实没有那种缠缚”等的省察智。“属于圣者”即是唯圣者所有,因为他们即使只是部分断除,也值得说、应当说,因此说“非属凡夫”。说“圣”是指“生于圣者中”的意思,因为具有出世间因,所以说“出世间”。因此又说“然而,那些”等,因为这与凡夫确实不共有,因此说“但于凡夫则无有”。“于一切处”指在所有其余的六个项目当中。显示巴利原文
493. Paṭhamamaggasammādiṭṭhipi evaṃsabhāvā, aññamaggasammādiṭṭhīsu vattabbameva natthīti āha ‘‘yāyaṃ sotāpattimaggadiṭṭhī’’ti. Ettāvatāpīti ettakenapi rāgādīsu ekekena pariyuṭṭhitacittatāyapi pariyuṭṭhitacittoyeva nāma hoti, pageva dvīhi, bahūhi vā pariyuṭṭhitacittatāya. Sabbatthāti sabbesu aṭṭhasupi vāresu. Suṭṭhu ṭhapitanti yathā maggabhāvanā upari saccābhisambodho hoti, evaṃ sammā ṭhapitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘saccānaṃ bodhāyā’’ti. Taṃ ñāṇanti ‘‘natthi kho me taṃ pariyuṭṭhāna’’ntiādinā pavattaṃ paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ. Ariyānaṃ hotīti ariyānameva hoti. Tesañhi ekadesatopi pahīnaṃ vattabbataṃ arahati. Tenāha ‘‘na puthujjanāna’’nti. Ariyanti vuttaṃ ‘‘ariyesu jāta’’nti katvā. Lokuttarahetukatāya lokuttaranti vuttaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘yesaṃ panā’’tiādi. Tathā hissa puthujjanehi asādhāraṇatā. Tenāha ‘‘puthujjanānaṃ pana abhāvato’’ti. Sabbavāresūti sabbesu itaresu chasu vāresu.
494 “各别”意指各自、就在自己心中,因此说“在自己心中”。其含义是:我各自在自己心中证得寂灭、烦恼的止息,此理以“此理亦然”来类推。显示巴利原文
494.Paccattanti pāṭiyekkaṃ attani mama citteyeva. Tenāha ‘‘attano citte’’ti. ‘‘Paccattaṃ attano citte nibbutiṃ kilesavūpasamaṃ labhāmī’’ti imamatthaṃ ‘‘eseva nayo’’ti iminā atidisati.
495 “以如是见”这一句是对“具足如此之见”这一意义的回指,因此说:“以如是见,即以此入流道之见。”显示巴利原文
495.Tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyāti idaṃ ‘‘yathārūpāya diṭṭhiyā samannāgato’’ti imassa atthassa paccāmasananti āha ‘‘tathārūpāya diṭṭhiyāti evarūpāya sotāpattimaggadiṭṭhiyā’’ti.
496 「以本性」:指以决定性的五学处性等本性。「以僧团羯磨力」:指以行敬悦等僧团羯磨的力量。「幼者」是指愚者。「童子」是指小孩。因为幼者既可称为「童子」,也可称为「青年」,所以此处说为「迟钝者」。由于诸根迟钝,故称迟钝者,因此说‘眼耳等根钝故’。然而,青年中也有根钝的情况,为排除此种情况而说「仰卧的婴儿」。如果仰卧的婴儿,又如何能‘踏火炭’呢?这里所说的「踏」,是指以某种方式触到火炭,所以说‘此处彼处’等。「诸人的」指老人们的手。由于手皮粗厚,手便不会迅速烧焦;而婴儿的身体柔软幼嫩,手会迅速缩回。「忍受」是指期待某种利益。显示巴利原文
496.Sabhāvenāti niyatapañcasikkhāpadatādisabhāvena. Saṅghakammavasenāti mānattacariyādisaṅghakammavasena. Daharoti bālo. Kumāroti dārako. Yasmā daharo ‘‘kumāro’’ti ca ‘‘yuvā’’ti ca vuccati, tasmā mandoti vuttaṃ. Mandindriyatāya hi mando. Tenāha ‘‘cakkhusotādīnaṃ mandatāyā’’ti. Evampi yuvāvatthāpi keci mandindriyā hontīti tannivattanatthaṃ ‘‘uttānaseyyako’’ti vuttaṃ. Yadi uttānaseyyako, kathamassa aṅgārakkamananti? Yathā tathā aṅgārassa phusanaṃ idha ‘‘akkamana’’nti adhippetanti āha ‘‘ito cito cā’’tiādi. Manussānanti mahallakamanussānaṃ. Na sīghaṃ hattho jhāyati kathinahatthatāya. Khippaṃ paṭisaṃharati mudutaluṇasarīratāya. Adhivāseti kiñci payojanaṃ apekkhitvā.
497 「高高低低的」:指大的和小的。「就在那里」:指就在涂灰泥等工作之处。煮染料是为了配制灰泥等,运水是为了清洗等,用腰子是为了涂抹姜黄色土。「厚愿者」:指有坚固意愿的人。「小牛」:指已出生、跟随母牛的小牛。「消退」:指避开、观察的意思,因此说「观察」。「倾向彼」:即倾向增上戒学等,因为即使在做各种高低杂务时,也只是为了圆满行持学处而做,并且是依如理作意来行持的。缺乏如理作意者,便站在长老面前说:‘我要跟你聊这聊那。’显示巴利原文
497.Uccāvacānīti mahantāni ceva khuddakāni ca. Tatthevāti sudhākammādimhiyeva. Kasāvapacanaṃ sudhādisaṅkharaṇatthaṃ, udakānayanaṃ dhovanādiatthaṃ, haliddivaṇṇadhātulepanatthaṃ kucchakaraṇaṃ. Bahalapatthanoti daḷhachando. Vacchakanti nibbattadhenupagavacchaṃ. Apacinātīti apavindati, āloketīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘apaloketī’’ti. Tanninno hotīti adhisīlasikkhādininnova hoti uccāvacānampi kiṃkaraṇīyānaṃ cārittasīlassa pūraṇavaseneva karaṇato, yonisomanasikāravaseneva ca tesaṃ paṭipajjanato. Therassa santike aṭṭhāsi yonisomanasikārābhāvato ‘‘taṃ taṃ samullapissāmī’’ti.
498 「以力即力」故说「具足力」。「作有利益性」:指通过那个法,生起了特别有利益的状态。「以全心」:指在说法的最初、中间和结尾,心都完整无余地转起,也就是以完全、无保留的心。显示巴利原文
498. Balaṃ eva balatāti āha ‘‘balena samannāgato’’ti. Atthikabhāvaṃ katvāti tena dhammena savisesaṃ atthikabhāvaṃ uppādetvā. Sakalacittenāti desanāyaādimhi majjhe pariyosāneti sabbattheva pavattatāya sakalena anavasesena cittena.
500 「本性」:指圣弟子与凡夫不共的特有本性。「善观察」:指正确地审察。「为证入流果」:指通过现证入流果,亦即已证得的状态,故称「以已证入流果之智」。这些是对第一道果的省察智的种种差别,因其转起行相各异,故说「以七种大省察智」。这实为诸阿阇梨共许之说:所谓「此为其第一智」等所明示的是省察智,而非道智;此为历代阿阇梨相承的共同解释,亦即本经的注释释义。其理据在于:「出世间道确实无有多心刹那」。若有多心刹那,则会有不同现观;如此,由于圣道无间即证果,便会变成部分断除三结等,导致「一分入流者」等状态,或有多果;凡此种种皆不合理。因此,出世间道唯有一个心刹那。显示巴利原文
500.Sabhāvoti ariyasāvakassa puthujjanehi asādhāraṇatāya āveṇiko sabhāvo. Suṭṭhu samannesitoti sammadeva upaparikkhito. Sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāyāti sotāpattiphalassa sacchikaraṇena, sacchikatabhāvenāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘sotāpattiphalasacchikatañāṇenā’’ti. Paṭhamamaggaphalassa paccavekkhaṇañāṇavisesā hete pavattiākārabhinnā. Tenevāha ‘‘sattahi mahāpaccavekkhaṇañāṇehī’’ti. Ayaṃ tāva ācariyānaṃ samānakathāti ‘‘idamassa paṭhamaṃ ñāṇa’’ntiādinā vuttāni paccavekkhaṇañāṇāni, na maggañāṇānīti evaṃ pavattā paramparāgatā pubbācariyānaṃ samānā sādhāraṇā imissā pāḷiyā aṭṭhakathā atthavaṇṇanā. Tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘lokuttaramaggo hi bahucittakkhaṇiko nāma natthī’’ti. Yadi so bahucittakkhaṇiko siyā nānābhisamayo, tathā sati saṃyojanattayādīnaṃ ekadesappahānaṃ pāpuṇātīti ariyamaggassa anantaraphalattā ekadesasotāpannatādibhāvo āpajjati, phalānaṃ vā anekabhāvo, sabbametaṃ ayuttanti tasmā ekacittakkhaṇikova ariyamaggo.
然而,有诘难论者依某段经文否定圣道唯有一个心刹那,为指出该段经文,此处说:「因为提到“七年”」。若他们说「烦恼……轻快地断除」,便等于承认烦恼断除迅速,而道之修习却迟缓。对此,若才刚开始修道烦恼便已断除,则剩余的修习即成无义;若烦恼后来方断,却又说烦恼轻快地断除,则不成理,因为经文后面会说到「为证入流果」,此已获得经文认许。「未修道」:指未能圆满修习出世间道。「了知义味」:经文无颠倒的真实义即是义味,如实了知此义。如是驳斥诘难论者之说后,为归结前文义理,而说「这些七种智」等。余者易解。显示巴利原文
Yaṃ pana suttapadaṃ nissāya vitaṇḍavādī ariyamaggassa ekacittakkhaṇikataṃ paṭikkhipati, taṃ dassento ‘‘satta vassānīti hi vacanato’’ti āha. Kilesā pana lahu…pe… chijjantīti vadantena hi khippaṃ tāva kilesappahānaṃ, dandhapavattikā maggabhāvanāti paṭiññātaṃ hoti. Tattha sace maggassa bhāvanāya āraddhamattāya kilesā pahīyanti, sesā maggabhāvanā niratthakā siyā, atha pacchā kilesappahānaṃ, kilesā pana lahu chijjantīti idaṃ micchā, ‘‘sotāpattiphalasacchikiriyāyā’’ti vakkhatīti. Tato suttapaṭijānanato. Maggaṃ abhāvetvāti ariyamaggaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ katvā abhāvetvā. Attharasaṃ viditvāti suttassa aviparīto attho eva attharaso, taṃ yāthāvato ñatvā. Evaṃ vitaṇḍavādivādaṃ bhinditvā vuttamevatthaṃ nigametuṃ ‘‘imāni satta ñāṇānī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
第9 《婆罗门邀请经》注释显示巴利原文
9. Brahmanimantanikasuttavaṇṇanā
501 「我是常,世间是常」这样生起的见解,就是「常见」。「与身俱」:指与那个梵的有身一同。「梵位」:指自己的梵所依处。说“无常为常”,是因为在自己身上不显现无常性。「坚固」:牢固、坚密;因为没有灭坏,所以有坚实的意思。因为没有生灭变化,所以是恒常存在的。「全」:是圆满的意思,因此说“无缺”。或者“全”是指没有生等混杂,即远离的意思。正因为没有生灭等,所以称为「不死殁法」。由于(他执取)常性,因此没有任何人出生……结生。他承认那个处所及住在那里者的常性。「三禅地」:指第二、第三、第四禅地。第四禅地的差别就是无想天、净居天和无色界生。「遮止」:明明存在,却因为不知而否认说“无”。「为无明所行」:指与无明一起运行,即被无明伴随。这里的从格是表“一起”的意思,所以说“具足”。「无智者」:缺少智慧的人。「成盲者」:因为没有慧眼,所以成为盲目;或者说,已经达到盲冥的状态,因此称为“成盲者”。显示巴利原文
501. ‘‘Sassato attā ca loko cā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.30) evaṃ pavattā diṭṭhi sassatadiṭṭhi (saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.175). Saha kāyenāti saha tena brahmattabhāvena. Brahmaṭṭhānanti attano brahmavatthuṃ. ‘‘Aniccaṃ nicca’’nti vadati aniccatāya attano apaññāyamānattā. Thiranti daḷhaṃ, vināsābhāvato sārabhūtanti attho. Uppādavipariṇāmābhāvato sadā vijjamānaṃ. Kevalanti paripuṇṇaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘akhaṇḍa’’nti. Kevalanti vā jātiādīhi amissaṃ, virahitanti adhippāyo. Uppādādīnaṃ abhāvato eva acavanadhammaṃ. Koci jāyanako vā…pe… upapajjanako vā natthi niccabhāvato. Ṭhānena saddhiṃ tannivāsīnaṃ niccabhāvañhi so paṭijānāti. Tisso jhānabhūmiyoti dutiyatatiyacatutthajjhānabhūmiyo. Catutthajjhānabhūmivisesā hi asaññasuddhāvāsāruppabhavā. Paṭibāhatīti santaṃyeva samānaṃ ajānantova natthīti paṭikkhipati. Avijjāya gatoti avijjāya saha gato pavatto. Sahayoge hi idaṃ karaṇavacanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘samannāgato’’ti. Aññāṇīti avidvā. Paññācakkhuvirahato andho bhūto, andhabhāvaṃ vā pattoti andhībhūto.
502 那时,针对世尊于善生林中的住锡未曾中断,说“了知世尊住于善生林”。但此处,是就未能见到世尊而言,故说“观察世尊去了何方”。“见世尊正往梵天界”:此即显示,当时世尊前往梵天界,是经过了若干心识刹那才完成,并非仅在一心识刹那。而此处并非指以身行而令心转向,——正如“犹如力士屈伸臂”等经文所说。此处应说明者,已如前说。“离欲”:指欲的消失。“被斥退”:因所执取的见解遭到反转而生起惊恐。于是那句“这是我的过失”的话,便成为支持他的话。显示巴利原文
502. Tadā bhagavato subhagavane viharaṇassa avicchinnataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘subhagavane viharatīti ñatvā’’ti. Tattha pana tadāssa bhagavato adassanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘kattha nu kho gatoti olokento’’ti. Brahmalokaṃ gacchantaṃ disvāti iminā katipayacittavāravasena tadā bhagavato brahmalokagamanaṃ jātaṃ, na ekacittakkhaṇenāti dasseti. Na cettha kāyagatiyā cittapariṇāmanaṃ adhippetaṃ – ‘‘seyyathāpi nāma balavā puriso samiñjitaṃ vā bāhaṃ pasāreyyā’’tiādivacanato (ma. ni. 1.501). Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva. Vichandanti chandavigamaṃ. Apasāditoti diṭṭhiyā gāhassa viparivattanena santajjito. ‘‘Metamāsado’’ti vacanena upatthambho hutvā.
“遍入之后”:意为以附身的方式征服了那个有身。对于这样征服的人,其身体犹如被进入一般,故说“进入身体后”。确实,被天、夜叉、龙等附身的众生,其正常的心识活动被抑制后,附身者便以自身神通威神力,令该众生作出所期望的笑、言谈等;而在令其作出时,是依于所附身者的心而作。对此,有人说“是依自身”,此言不可说,因为业所生的神通威神力不可究诘。然而另一些人则认为,正如那时眼识等的转起只属于所附身者,同样,唯作心的转起也唯独属于他,只是由于附身者的威神力,其凡常性发生了变化。因此,具有大神力者,不会被附身;但在医疗救治中,咒术的威力能进入尸体并使之发热。而对于高罗刹帝利等,尸体的站立及开口言语,则全然是佛的威力。因为佛陀的威神力不可究诘。“征服后而住”:意为以自身的威神力征服一切世间后而住。“最胜者”:意为首要,或因具足如此威神力而为最上。“见”:意为十种。因为没有表达特殊限定的意图,十种之言是周遍无余的范畴,故说“见一切”。“名为一切众之身的一切有情群体”:显示巴利原文
Anvāvisitvāti āvisanavasena tassa attabhāvaṃ adhibhavitvā. Tathā abhibhavato hi tassa sarīraṃ paviṭṭho viya hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘sarīraṃ pavisitvā’’ti. Yañhi sattaṃ devayakkhanāgādayo āvisanti, tassa pākatikakiriyamayaṃ cittappavattiṃ nivāretvā attano iddhānubhāvena yaṃ icchitaṃ hasitalapitādi, taṃ tena kārāpenti, kārentā ca āviṭṭhapuggalassa cittavasena kārenti. ‘‘Attanovā’’ti na vattabbametaṃ acinteyyattā kammajassa iddhānubhāvassāti keci. Apare pana yathā tadā cakkhuviññāṇādipavatti āviṭṭhapuggalasseva, evaṃ kiriyamayacittapavattipi tasseva, āvesakānubhāvena pana sāmaññatā parivattati. Tathā hi mahānubhāvaṃ puggalaṃ te āvisituṃ na sakkonti, tikicchāvuṭṭhāpane pana chavasarīraṃ anupavisitvā satantaṃ karoti vijjānubhāvena. Korakhattiyādīnaṃ pana chavasarīrassa uṭṭhānaṃ vacīnicchāraṇañca kevalaṃ buddhānubhāvena. Acinteyyā hi buddhānaṃ buddhānubhāvāti. Abhibhavitvā ṭhitoti sakalalokaṃ attano ānubhāvena abhibhavitvā ṭhito. Jeṭṭhakoti padhāno, tādisaṃ vā ānubhāvasampannattā uttamo. Passatīti daso. Visesavacanicchāya abhāvato anavasesavisayo daso-saddoti āha ‘‘sabbaṃ passatī’’ti. Sabbajananti laddhanāmaṃ sabbasattakāyaṃ. Vase vatteti, seṭṭhattā nimmāpakattā ca attano vase vatteti. Lokassa īsanasīlatāya issaro. Sattānaṃ kammassa kārakabhāvena kattā. Thāvarajaṅgamavibhāgaṃ sakalaṃ lokaṃ nimmānetīti nimmātā.
“最胜”:因具有殊胜功德,故在世间值得称赞,是为最胜。此最胜者即是极殊胜者,故说“最上”。众生之创造,犹如通过种种方式制造与拆解,故说“你是刹帝利”等。于禅那等中,因对自心惯习安住,故为“自在者”。“于已生者”:即于已再生者。“堪能证得出生、殊胜之有的”是为“堪能者”,即“求有者”,于他们堪能者而言。故说“卵生、胎生之众生”等。显示巴利原文
Guṇavisesena loke pāsaṃsattā seṭṭho. Tādiso ca ukkaṭṭhatamo hotīti āha ‘‘uttamo’’ti. Sattānaṃ nimmānaṃ tathā tathā sajanaṃ visajanaṃ viya hotīti āha ‘‘tvaṃ khattiyo’’tiādi. Jhānādīsu attano citte ca ciṇṇavasittā vasī. Bhūtānanti nibbattānaṃ. Bhavaṃ abhijātaṃ arahantīti bhabyā, sambhavesino, tesaṃ bhabyānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘aṇḍajajalābujā sattā’’tiādi.
地等被认为是常、恒、永恒的。那些以‘无常’等说贬斥它们、厌恶它们的众生,由于不如实之说,于命终时堕入恶趣。而那些以‘常、恒’等说称赞地等的众生,则由于如实之说,得生于梵身天。魔罗波旬想通过顺说与逆说,借由地等开示对诸行遍知的过患,从而令其远离。因此而有‘贬斥地者’等说。在此处,魔罗通过执取地等界即大种,来执取人界;通过执取鬼神,来执取四大王天;通过执取天,来执取其余欲界天;通过执取生主,来执取自己的住处;通过执取梵,来执取梵身天。然而,当知光音天等因不在其范围之内,故不被其所执取。依爱与邪见之力:意为依爱之欢喜与邪见之欢喜之力。对‘这是我的,这是我之我’心生欢喜者,是‘欢喜者、喜欢者’,或具有欢喜习性者。显示住于梵天教导者们的大神威力:意为将他们——聚集于彼处的梵天们所具有的大神威力,展示为是由于住于彼大梵天的教导而产生的,并让其看见。‘以名声’:意为以威神力。‘以光辉’:意为以庄严。‘将我领进梵天众’:意为在那种具备自在等成就的梵天众中,他令我趋入。‘由于杀害大众’:意为由于显示巴利原文
Pathavīādayo niccā dhuvā sassatā. Ye tesaṃ ‘‘aniccā’’tiādinā garahakā jigucchā sattā, te ayathābhūtavāditāya matakāle apāyaniṭṭhā ahesuṃ. Ye pana pathavīādīnaṃ ‘‘niccā dhuvā’’tiādinā pasaṃsakā, te yathābhūtavāditāya brahmakāyūpagā ahesunti māro pāpimā anvayato byatirekato ca pathavīādimukhena saṅkhārānaṃ pariññāpaññāpane ādīnavaṃ vibhāveti tato vivecetukāmo. Tenāha ‘‘pathavīgarahakā’’tiādi. Ettha ca māro pathavīādidhātumahābhūtaggahaṇena manussalokaṃ, bhūtaggahaṇena cātumahārājike, devaggahaṇena avasesakāmadevalokaṃ, pajāpatiggahaṇena attano ṭhānaṃ, brahmaggahaṇena brahmakāyike gaṇhi. Ābhassarādayo pana avisayatāya eva anena aggahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Taṇhādiṭṭhivasenāti taṇhābhinandanāya diṭṭhābhinandanāya ca vasena. ‘‘Etaṃ mama, eso me attā’’ti abhinandino abhinandakā, abhinandanasīlā vā. Brahmuno ovāde ṭhitānaṃ iddhānubhāvaṃ dassetīti tesaṃ tattha sannipatitabrahmānaṃ iddhānubhāvaṃ tassa mahābrahmuno ovāde ṭhitattā nibbattaṃ katvā dasseti. Yasenāti ānubhāvena. Siriyāti sobhāya. Maṃ brahmaparisaṃ upanesīti yādisā brahmaparisā issariyādisampattiyā, tattha maṃ uyyojesi. Mahājanassa māraṇatoti mahājanassa vivaṭṭūpanissayaguṇavināsanena ānubhāvena māraṇato. Ayasanti yasapaṭipakkhaṃ akittikammānubhāvañcāti attho.
503 第503则。‘遍满百年’:是就百年而言说。‘依止而卧’:意为依止,依止即是依止者,如同说‘venayiko’一样,此处说为‘近依止者’。而此处提及‘卧’,只是为了举例说明,因此说‘我去’等语。由于界有多种含义,此处应理解为转起之义。‘在我之处卧者’:意为在我的处所、范围内转起者。‘排除后’:意为贬低后,或征服后。‘于灌木丛之土块’:此处,灌木丛之土块指的是一种铺展于地面而生的蔓草类植物。显示巴利原文
503.Kasiṇaṃ āyunti vassasataṃ sandhāya vadati. Upanissāya setīti upasayo, upasayova opasāyiko yathā ‘‘venayiko’’ti (ma. ni. 1.246; a. ni. 8.11; pārā. 8) āha ‘‘samīpasayo’’ti. Sayaggahaṇañcettha nidassanamattanti dassetuṃ ‘‘maṃ gacchanta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Anekatthattā dhātūnaṃ vattanattho daṭṭhabbo. Mama vatthusmiṃ sayanakoti mayhaṃ ṭhāne visaye vattanako. Bāhitvāti nīcaṃ katvā, abhibhavitvā vā. Jajjharikāgumbatoti ettha jajjharikā nāma pathaviṃ pattharitvā jātā ekā gacchajāti.
‘以此’:指通过‘若确实是你,比丘们’等言语。‘这位梵天’:即这位梵天。‘劝诱’:意为笼络。‘呵责’:意为降伏。‘以其余词句’:指通过‘依于事处而住的’、‘可随意处置的’、‘应被排除’这些词句。‘你将为我执持守护’:意为你将成为我的守护者。‘较矮小者’:意为更为下劣、卑微、身形鄙陋之人。显示巴利原文
Imināti ‘‘sace kho tvaṃ bhikkhū’’tiādivacanena. Esa brahmā. Upalāpetīti saṅgaṇhāti. Apasādetīti niggaṇhāti. Sesapadehīti vatthusāyiko yathākāmakaraṇīyo bāhiteyyoti imehi padehi. Mayhaṃ ārakkhaṃ gaṇhissasīti mama ārakkhako bhavissasi. Lakuṇḍakataranti nīcataraṃ nihīnavuttisarīraṃ.
连能够触证的丝毫都见不到,更何况智的广博——这是它的意趣所在。‘Nipphatti’(成就)意为完成,也就是果。因为果是从因的角度,是应当前往、应当证得的,所以称为‘gati’(去处)。‘Ānubhāva’(威神力)意为影响力;由于它以照耀之义、光耀之义而称为‘juti’(光耀)。由于以广大威神力征服他人,故被称为‘mahesa’(大自在),这就是‘mahesakkho’(大有威力者)。这种征服,是通过名声成就和眷属成就来实现的,因此说‘mahāyaso mahāparivāro’(大名闻、大眷属)。显示巴利原文
Phusitumpi samatthaṃ kiñci na passati, pageva ñāṇavibhavanti adhippāyo. Nipphattinti nipphajjanaṃ, phalanti attho. Tañhi kāraṇavasena gantabbato adhigantabbato gatīti vuccati. Ānubhāvanti pabhāvaṃ. So hi jotanaṭṭhena virocanaṭṭhena jutīti vuccati. Mahatā ānubhāvena paresaṃ abhibhavanato mahesoti akkhāyatīti mahesakkho. Tayidaṃ abhibhavanaṃ kittisampattiyā parivārasampattiyā cāti āha ‘‘mahāyaso mahāparivāro’’ti.
‘Pariharantī’:即环绕而行,指以须弥山置于南方而回转。‘Disā’:方向,这里是处格意义的独立主格,故说‘disāsu virocamānā’(在各方闪耀)。闪耀是因为自身的光辉或自身的庄严。‘Tehī’:指由那些日月天子。‘Tattakena pamāṇenā’:以那样的范围,即一个由日月天子所照耀、称为世间界的世间,其大小便是如此。此轮围界是诸佛出世之处,为最胜、最上、首要。因此,往生此处的天人,多数较其他轮围界的天人更为殊胜地运作。确实,娑婆主梵天曾以一万梵天为眷属,来到世尊跟前。因此说‘ettha cakkavāḷasahasse tuyhaṃ vaso vattatī’(在此千轮围界,你的威权在运行)。现在为了如实显示‘ettha te vattate vaso’(在此你的威权在运行)所说的威权运行,而说‘paroparañca jānāsī’(你了知胜与劣)等。其中,为了显示应将第一偈中所说的‘ettha’一词带入理解,而说‘ettha cakkav’。显示巴利原文
Pariharantīti sineruṃ dakkhiṇato katvā parivattanti. Disāti bhummatthe etaṃ paccattavacananti āha ‘‘disāsu virocamānā’’ti. Attano jutiyā dibbamānāya vā. Tehīti candimasūriyehi. Tattakena pamāṇenāti yattake candimasūriyehi obhāsiyamāno lokadhātusaṅkhāto eko loko, tattakena pamāṇena. Idaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ buddhānaṃ uppattiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ seṭṭhaṃ uttamaṃ padhānaṃ, tasmā yebhuyyena etthupapannā devatā aññesu cakkavāḷesu devatā abhibhuyya vattanti. Tathā hi brahmā sahampati dasasahassabrahmaparivāro bhagavato santikaṃ upagañchi. Tenāha ‘‘ettha cakkavāḷasahasse tuyhaṃ vaso vattatī’’ti. Idāni ‘‘ettha te vattate vaso’’ti vuttaṃ vase vattanaṃ sarūpato dassetuṃ ‘‘paroparañca jānāsī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha paṭhamagāthāyaṃ vuttaṃ ettha-saddaṃ ānetvā attho veditabboti dassento ‘‘ettha cakkavāḷasahasse’’ti āha. Uccanīceti jātikularūpabhogaparivārādivasena uḷāre ca anuḷāre ca. Ayaṃ iddhoayaṃ pakatimanussoti iminā ‘‘sarūpato evassa sattānaṃ paroparajānanaṃ, na samudāgamato’’ti dasseti. Yaṃ pana vakkhati ‘‘sattānaṃ āgatiṃ gatinti, taṃ kāmaloke sattānaṃ ādānanikkhepajānanamattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na kammavipākajānanaṃ. Yadi hi samudāgamato jāneyya, attanopi jāneyya, na cassa taṃ atthīti, tathā āha ‘‘itthambhāvotiidaṃ cakkavāḷa’’ntiādi. Rāgayogato rāgo etassa atthīti vā rāgo, virajjanasīlo virāgī, taṃ rāgavirāginaṃ. Sahassibrahmā nāma tvaṃ cūḷaniyā eva lokadhātuyā jānanato. Tayāti nissakke karaṇavacanaṃ. Catuhatthāyāti anekahatthena sāṇipākārena kātabbapaṭappamāṇaṃ dīghato catuhatthāya, vitthārato dvihatthāya pilotikāya kātuṃ vāyamanto viya gopphake udake nimujjitukāmo viya ca pamāṇaṃ ajānanto vihaññatīti niggaṇhāti.
504 ‘Taṃ kāya’(那个身):指那个群体。‘Jānitabbaṭṭhānaṃ patvāpī’(即使到了应被了知的程度):意为,就算是在这种世俗、微不足道的应被了知之处,更不必说我那些他人所无的、戒等功德的殊胜,也暂且不提。‘Ayaṃ imesaṃ atisayena nīco’(此人较这些极度卑下),所以是‘nīceyyo’(应被卑视者),其状态为‘nīceyyanti’,因此说:‘tayā nīcatarabhāvo pana mayhaṃ kuto’(然而,我如何会有比你更卑下的状态呢)。显示巴利原文
504.Taṃ kāyanti tadeva nikāyaṃ. Jānitabbaṭṭhānaṃ patvāpīti anaññasādhāraṇā mayhaṃ sīlādayo guṇavisesā tāva tiṭṭhantu, īdisaṃ lokiyaṃ parittakaṃ jānitabbaṭṭhānampi patvā. Ayaṃ imesaṃ atisayena nīcoti nīceyyo, tassa bhāvo nīceyyanti āha ‘‘tayā nīcatarabhāvo pana mayhaṃ kuto’’ti.
「Heṭṭhūpapattiko」(得下界生者):指从上层天死后,在下层天获得再生者。为详细阐明此略说之义,故说「anuppanne buddhuppāde」(于佛陀未出世时)。「Heṭṭhūpapattikaṃ katvā」(令作得下界生者)意即作了得下界生的祈愿。譬如:若有人造作众多无间业,其中最为沉重、力量最强的那一个业便给予结生;其余诸业则成为其助缘,而非结生的给予者。同样地,当修习四种色界禅那时,其中在欲、誓愿、胜解等方面最为殊胜且属有行作意的那个禅那,便给予结生;其余禅那因未得机会,而成为彼之助缘,非结生给予者。唯依此所生之禅那,未来始有后有再生。故言「tatiyajjhānaṃ paṇītaṃ bhāvetvā」(修习了殊胜的第三禅那后)。「Tattha」(于此):指遍净天梵世间。「Puna tatthā」(复又于此):指光音天梵世间。「Paṭhamakāle」(于最初时):指于彼有中的第一时。「Ubhayaṃ」(二者):指过去的。显示巴利原文
Heṭṭhūpapattikoti uparūparito cavitvā heṭṭhā laddhūpapattiko. Evaṃ saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘anuppanne buddhuppāde’’ti āha. Heṭṭhūpapattikaṃ katvāti heṭṭhūpapattikaṃ patthanaṃ katvā. Yathā kenaci bahūsu ānantariyesu katesu yaṃ tattha garutaraṃ balavaṃ, tadeva paṭisandhiṃ deti, itarāni pana tassa anubalappadāyakāni honti, na paṭisandhidāyakāni, evaṃ catūsu rūpajjhānesu bhāvitesu yaṃ tattha garutaraṃ chandapaṇidhiadhimokkhādivasena sābhisaṅkhārañca, tadeva ca paṭisandhiṃ deti, itarāni pana aladdhokāsatāya tassa anubalappadāyakāni honti, na paṭisandhidāyakāni, tannibbattitajjhāneneva āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbatti hotīti āha ‘‘tatiyajjhānaṃ paṇītaṃ bhāvetvā’’ti. Tatthāti subhakiṇhabrahmaloke. Puna tatthāti ābhassarabrahmaloke. Paṭhamakāleti tasmiṃ bhave paṭhamasmiṃ kāle. Ubhayanti atītaṃ attano nibbattaṭṭhānaṃ, tattha nibbattiyā hetubhūtaṃ attano katakammanti ubhayaṃ. Pamussitvā kālassa ciratarabhāvato. Vītināmeti paṭipajjantīti ca tadā tassā kiriyāya pavattikkhaṇaṃ upādāya pavattamānapayogo.
「Apāyesī」(令饮):即令其饮。「Pipāsiteti」(于渴者):对于口渴之人。「Ghammanī」(于热时):在炎热之时。「Samparete」(于被征服者):指为暑热之苦与渴所征服者。「nti」(如此):指施水。「Vatasīlavattanti」(誓戒与戒行):通过受持而为誓愿,并以常行戒之方式而遵行,故称为「sīlavattaṃ」(戒行)。「Suttappabuddhova anussarāmī」(我如从睡中醒者般随念):意为如同刚从睡眠中醒来者回忆梦境一般,我以宿住随念智随念你过去所住处,如同以一切知智现前亲见,此即其义。显示巴利原文
Apāyesīti pāyesi. Pipāsiteti tasite. Ghammanīti ghammakāle. Sampareteti ghammapariḷāhena pipāsāya abhibhūte. Nti pānīyadānaṃ. Vatasīlavattanti samādānavasena vatabhūtaṃ cārittasīlabhāvena samāciṇṇattā sīlavattaṃ. Suttappabuddhova anussarāmīti supitvā pabuddhamatto viya supinaṃ tava pubbanivutthaṃ mama pubbenivāsānussatiñāṇena anussarāmi, sabbaññutaññāṇena viya paccakkhato passāmīti attho.
「Karamare」:指被掠夺后带来之人。「Kammasajjaṃ」:战斗准备,意即提供武器等之人。显示巴利原文
Karamareti vilumpitvā ānīte. Kammasajjanti yuddhasajjaṃ, āvudhādāyininti attho.
“在羚羊岸”:指恒河岸边一处因多有羚羊出没而得名的地方。“被当作俘虏带走”:指被强盗当作俘虏,强行带往他们的地盘。显示巴利原文
Eṇīkūlasminti eṇīmigabāhullena ‘‘eṇīkūla’’nti saṅkhaṃ gate gaṅgāya tīrappadese. Gayhaka nīyamānanti gayhavasena karamarabhāvena corehi attano ṭhānaṃ nīyamānaṃ.
“通过嫁娶结交朋友”:指通过嫁娶的方式建立亲密的朋友关系。(他们说:)“我们正一起这样玩耍时,那头恒河的龙象竟突然发怒了”,他们甚至连想都没想到我。「Susukāraṃ」:指(龙象)发出‘苏苏’声的恐怖呼吸声。显示巴利原文
Āvāhavivāhavasena mittasanthavaṃ katvā. ‘‘Evaṃ amhesu kīḷantesu gaṅgeyyako nāgo kupito’’ti mayi saññampi na karontīti. Susukāranti susūti pavattaṃ bheravanāganissāsaṃ.
「Gahītanāvaṃ」:指船被夺取、被拦截。因为猎人欲加害他们,便以阻拦去路的方式夺船。「Luddena」:指那残忍(的猎人)所为。「Manussakappā」:是为了加害那些乘船而来的人。显示巴利原文
Gahītanāvanti viheṭhetukāmatāya gatinivāraṇavasena gahitaṃ niggahitaṃ nāvaṃ. Luddenāti kurūrena. Manussakappāti nāvāgatānaṃ manussānaṃ viheṭhetukāmatāya.
“Baddhacaro”意为生活受牵系、依附他人的行者,因此经中称他为‘内弟子’。“Taṃ nissāyeva”的意思是,即使那位行者受到国王的供养,他也舍弃国王,只依止那位内弟子。显示巴利原文
Baddhacaroti paṭibaddhacariyo. Tenāha ‘‘antevāsiko’’ti. Taṃ nissāyevāti raññā upaṭṭhiyamānopi rājānaṃ pahāya taṃ kappaṃ antevāsiṃ nissāyeva.
“Sambuddhimantaṃ vatinaṃ amaññi”:他心中这样想:‘此人确实是具足正自觉智与圆满行持的人’,并对他生起尊重与推崇。显示巴利原文
Sambuddhimantaṃ vatinaṃ amaññīti ayaṃ sammadeva buddhimā vatasampannoti amaññi sambhāvesi ca.
“Nānattabhāvesu”:指在种种不同、各各相别的生命形态(有身)当中。显示巴利原文
Nānattabhāvesūti nānā visuṃ visuṃ attabhāvesu.
「Addhā」意为确定无疑。「Mametamāyu」指如前面所述、于各种生存状态中流转的我的寿命。不仅知道我的寿命,您更了知其他一切应被了知的事物,没有什么是您不知的。佛陀啊,您确实是正自觉者。若非如此,此义理怎能被了知呢?正因为您是正自觉者,您那燃烧、闪耀的威神力,正照耀着整个梵天界,散放光辉,相续安住。以此言说,梵天宣说了导师那无可比拟、无与伦比的特质。显示巴利原文
Addhāti ekaṃsena. Mametamāyunti mayhaṃ etaṃ yathāvuttaṃ tattha tattha bhave pavattaṃ āyuṃ. Na kevalaṃ mama āyumeva, atha kho aññampi sabbaññeyyaṃ jānāsi, na tuyhaṃ aviditaṃ nāma atthi. Tathā hi buddho sammāsambuddho tuvaṃ. No ce kathamayamattho ñāto? Tathā hi sammāsambuddhattā eva te ayaṃ jalito jotamāno ānubhāvo obhāsayaṃ sabbampi brahmalokaṃ obhāsento dibbamāno tiṭṭhatīti satthu asamasamataṃ pavedesi.
「Pathavattena」意指以大地的地大特性。所以注释中说‘以大地本质’。此处,由于‘一切行寂止’等经文是从(涅槃)共通的角度而言,而‘彼处无地’等则从(涅槃)不共的角度而言,因此需要以超越大地自性的方式来理解涅槃;为了排除共通的理解,转而把握大地不与他物共有的特性,故说‘以大地的地大特性’。「Nāpahosiṃ」意为未能达到、无法抵达。于此,‘达到大地’是指通过‘这是我的’等方式对其产生执取,故说‘他并未以渴爱、邪见、我慢的执取方式来执取它’。显示巴利原文
Pathavattenāti pathavīattena. Tenāha ‘‘pathavīsabhāvenā’’ti. Ettha ca yasmā – ‘‘sabbasaṅkhārasamathoti’’ādinā (mahāva. 7; dī. ni. 2.64, 67; ma. ni. 1.281; saṃ. ni. 1.172) sādhāraṇato, ‘‘yattha neva pathavī’’ti asādhāraṇato ca pathaviyā asabhāvena nibbānassa gahetabbatā atthi, taṃ nivattetvā pathaviyā anaññasādhāraṇaṃ sabhāvaṃ gahetuṃ ‘‘pathaviyā pathavattenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Nāpahosinti na pāpuṇiṃ. Idha pathaviyā pāpuṇanaṃ nāma ‘‘etaṃ mamā’’tiādinā gahaṇanti āha ‘‘taṇhādiṭṭhimānaggāhehi na gaṇhi’’nti.
「Vāditāya」:因为他有好诤论、善辩论的习性。「Sabbanti akkharaṃ niddisitvā」:指出‘一切’一词后,即:世尊曾说过‘梵天,我确知一切’,他以此中的‘一切’一词,向世尊反诘道:‘君,若您对一切以一切的自性都未曾经历过’——通过如此复述的方式指出了此词。「Akkhare dosaṃ gaṇhanto」:当世尊是针对自身的五蕴而使用‘一切’一词时,他却以‘所有一切’的方式来解释其义,并利用‘一切’一词能指称多种含义的通性,挑出此词的毛病。因此注释中说‘但导师’等。其意谓:若世尊对‘一切’未曾经历,他是在问世间是否处于‘没有任何一切’的无余状态吗?若对于一切的一切自性,因其是无余的自性而未曾经历、未曾证得,则所谓‘一切’便如虚空花,什么都不会存在了。若他以为世尊确实有‘未曾经历’的事物,那么对他而言,若存在以一切自性为形式的‘未曾经历过的事物’,‘一切’一词便是错误的。显示巴利原文
Vāditāyāti vādasīlatāya. Sabbanti akkharaṃ niddisitvāti ‘‘sabbaṃ kho ahaṃ brahme’’tiādinā bhagavatā vuttaṃ sabba-saddaṃ – ‘‘sace kho te mārisa sabbassa sabbattena ananubhūta’’nti paccanubhāsanavasena niddisitvā. Akkhare dosaṃ gaṇhantoti bhagavatā sakkāyasabbaṃ sandhāya sabba-sadde gahite sabbasabbavasena tadatthaparivattanena sabba-saddavacanīyatāsāmaññena ca dosaṃ gaṇhanto. Tenāha ‘‘satthā panā’’tiādi. Tattha yadi sabbaṃ ananubhūtaṃ ‘‘natthi sabba’’nti loke anavasesaṃ pucchati. Sace sabbassa sabbattena anavasesasabhāvena ananubhūtaṃ appattaṃ, taṃ gaganakusumaṃ viya kiñci na siyā. Athassa ananubhūtaṃ atthīti assa sabbattena ananubhūtaṃ yadi atthi, ‘‘sabba’’nti idaṃ vacanaṃ micchā, sabbaṃ nāma taṃ na hotīti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘mā heva te rittakamevā’’tiādi.
当我说“我将说一切,也将说未曾经历”时,我的意图是:我既说“一切”,也说“未曾经历”,这有什么过失呢?“引证理由”是指他正在指出一切以一切性存在以及未曾经历者存在的理由。“应了知”指应通过道果省察智来了知,尤其是因为超越一切有为的殊胜状态而了知。“无示现”:这是以涅槃在有示现二法中的第二句义而说,意为“由于不进入眼识的范围,故称无示现”。或者由于远离一切有为,它没有示现,所以称为无示现。它没有边际,故称无边际。因此说“那即”等。显示巴利原文
Ahaṃ sabbañca vakkhāmi, ananubhūtañca vakkhāmīti ahaṃ ‘‘sabba’’nti ca vakkhāmi, ‘‘ananubhūta’’nti ca vakkhāmi, ettha ko dosoti adhippāyo. Kāraṇaṃ āharantoti sabbassa sabbattena ananubhūtassa atthibhāve kāraṇaṃ niddisanto. Vijānitabbanti maggaphalapaccavekkhaṇañāṇehi visesato sabbasaṅkhatavisiṭṭhatāya jānitabbaṃ. Anidassananti idaṃ nibbānassa sanidassanaduke dutiyapadasahitatādassananti adhippāyena ‘‘cakkhuviññāṇassa āpāthaṃ anupagamanato anidassanaṃ nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sabbasaṅkhatavidhuratāya vā natthi etassa nidassananti anidassanaṃ. Natthi etassa antoti anantaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘tayida’’ntiādi.
「有」指由缘所生的。「非有」指非由缘所生,意思是涅槃。由于完全没有令其暗淡的原因,它从一切处发光,故称「一切处光」。因此说「确实从涅槃……」等。正如所说:「那里没有黑暗。」(《导论》104)「普光」即是以显著、殊胜的方式存在。因为它无色,也没有方位,所以从一切处生起、存在,因此称为一切处光。因此说「在东方等方向中……」等。「进入」:此处他们进入,故为进入处;将此「进入」的「s」声变为「bh」声,再省略「vi」声,而说为「pabha」(光)。因此说「名为渡口」等。「建立自己的论点」:世尊说:如此,我既说了一切,也说了未曾经历,而你未理解我意,未经思择便贸然执取过失,这是错误的。世尊如此斥责梵天,建立了自己的论点。显示巴利原文
Bhūtānīti paccayasambhūtāni. Asambhūtanti paccayehi asambhūtaṃ, nibbānanti attho. Apabhassarabhāvahetūnaṃ sabbaso abhāvā sabbato pabhāti sabbatopabhaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘nibbānato hī’’tiādi. Tathā hi vuttaṃ – ‘‘tamo tattha na vijjatī’’ti. (Netti. 104) pabhūtamevāti pakaṭṭhabhāvena ukkaṭṭhabhāvena vijjamānameva. Arūpībhāvena adesikattā sabbato pabhavati vijjatīti sabbatopabhaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘puratthimadisādīsū’’tiādi. Pavisanti etthāti pavisaṃ, tadeva sa-kārassa bha-kāraṃ, vi-kārassa ca lopaṃ katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘pabha’’nti. Tenāha ‘‘titthassa nāma’’nti. Vādaṃ patiṭṭhapesīti evaṃ mayā sabbañca vuttaṃ, ananubhūtañca vuttaṃ, tattha yaṃ tayā adhippāyaṃ ajānantena sahasā appaṭisaṅkhāya dosaggahaṇaṃ, taṃ micchāti brahmānaṃ niggaṇhanto bhagavā attano vādaṃ patiṭṭhapesi.
「所执之执」是指以‘这是常’等方式所执取的执取。在被导师处处指出过失而斥责之后,他没有找到任何可执持的依处,为了掩盖失败,便想以嬉戏的方式舍弃辩论而逃避,或欲以神通变化展现游戏姿态。意思是:你如果能对我隐身,那就做吧,但你是做不到的。「想回到根本结生」是指想以自己原本的有身而站立。因为这与结生时所生起的相似,所以称为根本结生。「对其他」是指对其他身天人中较低等的梵天。他生起了这样的心:‘让他以变化身,而不是以本来的色身站着吧’,但未能如愿。因此他无法移除变化身,便开始制造遮蔽有身的黑暗。导师破除了那黑暗。因此说:「或者根本结生……」等。显示巴利原文
Gahitagahitanti ‘‘idaṃ nicca’’ntiādinā gahitagahitaṃ gāhaṃ. Tattha tattha dosadassanamukhena niggaṇhantena satthārā vissajjāpito kiñci gahetabbaṃ attano paṭisaraṇaṃ adisvā parājayaṃ paṭicchādetuṃ laḷitakaṃkātukāmo vādaṃ pahāya iddhiyā pāṭihāriyalīḷaṃ dassetukāmo. Yadi sakkosi mayhaṃ antaradhāyituṃ, na pana sakkhissasīti adhippāyo. Mūlapaṭisandhiṃ gantukāmoti attano pākatikena attabhāvena ṭhātukāmo. So hi paṭisandhikāle nibbattasadisatāya mūlapaṭisandhīti vutto. Aññesanti heṭṭhā aññakāyikānaṃ brahmūnaṃ. Na adāsi abhisaṅkhatakāyenevāyaṃ tiṭṭhatu, na pākatikarūpenāti cittaṃ uppādesi. Tena so abhisaṅkhatakāyaṃ apanetuṃ avisahanto attabhāvapaṭicchādakaṃ andhakāraṃ nimminituṃ ārabhi. Satthā taṃ tamaṃ viddhaṃseti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘mūlapaṭisandhiṃ vā’’tiādi.
“Bhavevāhaṃ”意为“我即在于有”。为显示此 eva 字乃强调处所,故说“我既见有中怖畏已”——即以智眼如实照见一切有中的生等怖畏。“七有”即所谓七种有。何以故?因以业有(kammabhava)为缘,于再生有(upapattibhava)中安立“有情”之名。“非有”即解脱。虽在寻求,然未得方便,唯见有而已。或此处应见如是义:既见诸有情之有,复见他们寻求非有、寻求寂灭者,仍于有中再生。“不称赞”指由无有“啊,实为乐!”这般称赞之状态,故我不乐著。此乃表相之言。又或“abhivāda”一词即执取义,故说“不执取”“不寻求”。于此,以执取“有”显苦圣谛,执取“喜”显集圣谛,执取“非有”显灭圣谛,以“不执取喜”显道圣谛,故云“如是开显四圣谛”。此是显示此偈颂中开显四圣谛。而导师随顺彼诸梵天之欲乐,详明开演诸谛,令其等生起观已,以阿拉汉果为教说之极顶而摄持。彼诸梵天中,或安立于入流果,或安立于一来果,或安立于不来果,或安立于阿拉汉果。故如是说:显示巴利原文
Bhavevāhanti bhave eva ahaṃ. Ayañca eva-saddo aṭṭhānapayuttoti dassento āha ‘‘ahaṃ bhave bhayaṃ disvāyevā’’ti, sabbasmiṃ bhave jātiādibhayaṃ ñāṇacakkhunā yāthāvato disvā. Sattabhavanti sattasaṅkhātaṃ bhavaṃ. Kammabhavapaccaye hi upapattibhave sattasamaññā. Vibhavanti vimuttiṃ. Pariyesamānampi upāyassa anadhigatattā bhaveyeva disvā. Bhavañca vibhavesinaṃ vibhavaṃ nibbutiṃ esamānānaṃ sattānaṃ bhavaṃ, bhavesu uppattiñca disvāti evaṃ vā ettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Na abhivadinti ‘‘aho vata sukha’’nti evaṃ abhivadāpanākārābhāvato na abhinivisiṃ, lakkhaṇavacanametaṃ. Gāhattho eva vā abhivāda-saddoti āha ‘‘nābhivadi’’nti, ‘‘nagavesi’’nti. Bhavaggahaṇenettha dukkhasaccaṃ, nandīgahaṇena samudayasaccaṃ, vibhavaggahaṇena nirodhasaccaṃ, nandiñca na upādiyinti iminā maggasaccaṃ pakāsitanti āha ‘‘iti cattāri saccāni pakāsento’’ti. Tadidaṃ catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ gāthāya vibhāvanadassanaṃ. Satthā pana tesaṃ brahmūnaṃ ajjhāsayānurūpaṃ saccāni vitthārato pakāsento vipassanaṃ pāpetvā arahattena desanāya kūṭaṃ gaṇhi. Te ca brahmāno keci sotāpattiphale, keci sakadāgāmiphale, keci anāgāmiphale, keci arahatte ca patiṭṭhahiṃsu. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘saccāni pakāsento satthā dhammaṃ desesī’’tiādi. Acchariyajātāti sañjātacchariyā. Samūlaṃ bhavanti taṇhāvijjāhi samūlaṃ bhavaṃ.
505 “超越了我的力量”:即通过完全超越欲界的行道,超越了我的领域。然则他如何了知他们已进入圣域?由理趣把握——以理趣把握而推知:“沙门乔达摩说法之时,开显轮回之过患与涅槃之功德,将可化导者带至亲见涅槃。其教说无虚、无空过,犹如因陀罗所掷金刚杵。安住于其教令者,绝不复见于轮回。”“若你如这些觉”:如你言他人之真实证觉,你自身亦当相应以自然智觉悟,通达于法而安住。“勿导引此法”:勿使你通达之法成为声闻之通达。此处之“此”,魔罗乃指紧接前文所说安立于梵天界而言。为显明他们,故说“因未生起……”等。而安立堕恶趣者,是指那些出家而具足邪命的外道、尼乾陀等外道师,或任何出家后行邪行的人而言。“未生起”即未产生,未达到之意。以“不再说任何多余之语”之方式,即如魔罗已不能更向上说任何更高之语,如是乃为无上教说。“劝请语”即告知语。因有最胜梵天之劝请,或有梵天之劝请在此,故为《梵天劝请经》。然此处未于义理作详细分别者,易可了知。显示巴利原文
505.Mamavasaṃ ativattitānīti sabbaso kāmadhātusamatikkamanapaṭipadāya mayhaṃ visayaṃ atikkamitāni. Kathaṃ panāyaṃ tesaṃ ariyabhūmisamokkamanaṃ jānātīti? Nayaggāhato – ‘‘samaṇo gotamo dhammaṃ desento saṃsāre ādīnavaṃ, nibbāne ca ānisaṃsaṃ pakāsento veneyyajanaṃ nibbānaṃ diṭṭhameva karoti, tassa desanā avañjhā amoghā indena vissaṭṭhavajirasadisā, tassa ca āṇāya ṭhitā saṃsāre na dissantevā’’ti nayaggāhena anumānena jānāti. Sace tvaṃ evaṃ anubuddhoti yathā tvaṃ paresaṃ saccābhisambodhaṃ vadati, evaṃ tvaṃ attano anurūpato sayambhuñāṇena buddho dhammaṃ paṭivijjhitvā ṭhito. Taṃ dhammaṃ mā upanayasīti tayā paṭividdhadhammaṃ mā sāvakapaṭivedhaṃ pāpesi. Idanti idaṃ anantaraṃ vuttaṃ brahmaloke patiṭṭhānaṃyeva sandhāya māro vadati, te dassento ‘‘anuppanne hī’’tiādimāha. Apāyapatiṭṭhānaṃ pana ājīvakanigaṇṭhādipabbajjaṃ upagate titthakare, ye keci vā pabbajitvā micchāpaṭipanne jane sandhāya vadati. Anuppanneti asañjāte, appatteti attho. Anullapanatāyāti yathā māro upari kiñci uttaraṃ lapituṃ na sakkoti, evaṃ tathā uttarabhāsanena. Nimantanavacanenāti viññāpanavacanena. Brahmaṃ seṭṭhaṃ nimantanaṃ, brahmuno vā nimantanaṃ ettha atthīti brahmanimantanikaṃ, suttaṃ. Yaṃ panettha atthato avibhattaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyameva.
第十、《斥责摩罗经》的注疏显示巴利原文
10. Māratajjanīyasuttavaṇṇanā
506 “进入仓”:因是粪便隐蔽处故为仓;此处“仓”指其内部。以相应之方式进入,故为“进入”。盖因他化作了与彼处相应的微细之身而入于其中。“重重”:即如同极重。此是将 u 音转为 o 音而作之说明,意为感觉极其沉重。或读作“garugaru viya”。“豆食”:以省略后分词之方式而说豆,意谓被豆食所积、所充满,如同豆满。故说“如食豆者之腹”等。为显示不省略后分词之义,而说“如满盛豆之袋”。“如湿豆”:即如湿豆之袋。意为“此先我腹中沉重,是何因由?如何产生?”“以方便”:即以途径、以正理。为从相违方面显示其非方便,而说“但若……”等。或是对自己而言:“莫恼害如来。”犹如有圣僧团在“如来为天人供养,我等礼敬僧众,愿得安乐”等语中被称为如来,同样,属于彼僧团之圣者个人亦复如是;又如先前之第二上首弟子,经一阿僧祇劫又十万大劫圆满波罗蜜而来,此大长老亦复如是而来,故为如来。“立于门闩外”:即站在门闩的外侧。显示巴利原文
506.Koṭṭhamanupaviṭṭhoti āsayo vaccaguttaṭṭhānatāya koṭṭhaṃ, tassa abbhantarañhettha koṭṭhaṃ. Anurūpo hutvā paviṭṭho anupaviṭṭho. Sukhumañhi tadanucchavikaṃ attabhāvaṃ māpetvā ayaṃ tattha paviṭṭho. Garugaro viyāti garukagaruko viya. U-kārassa hi o-kāraṃ katvā ayaṃ niddeso, ativiya garuko maññeti attho. Garugaru viya icceva vā pāṭho. Māsabhattaṃ māso uttarapadalopena, māsabhattena ācitaṃ pūritaṃ māsācitaṃ maññe. Tenāha ‘‘māsabhattaṃ bhuttassa kucchi viyā’’ti. Uttarapadalopena vinā atthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘māsapūritapasibbako viyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Tintamāso viyāti tintamāso pasibbako viya. Kiṃ nu kho etaṃ mama kucchiyaṃ pubbaṃ bhārikattaṃ, kiṃ nu kho kathaṃ nu kho jātanti adhippāyo? Upāyenāti pathena ñāyena. Byatirekato panassa anupāyaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sace panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Attānameva vā sandhāya ‘‘mā tathāgataṃ vihesesī’’ti āha. Yathā hi ariyasaṅgho ‘‘tathāgataṃ devamanussapūjitaṃ, saṅghaṃ namassāma suvatthi hotū’’tiādīsu (khu. pā. 6.18; su. ni. 241) tathāgatoti vuccati, evaṃ tappariyāpannā ariyapuggalā, yathā ca purimakā dutiyaaggasāvakā kappānaṃ satasahassādhikaṃ ekaṃ asaṅkhyeyyaṃ pāramiyo pūretvā āgatā, ayampi mahāthero tathā āgatoti tathāgatoti. Patiaggaḷeva aṭṭhāsīti aggaḷassa bahibhāge aṭṭhāsi.
507 “树神”指四大王天中身分低劣的天神,因其对人的气味早已习惯,故不特别厌恶,因此说“对于居于虚空的天神”。“作恼”指产生痛苦。“城市人”指娇生惯养的人。“极清净”指容貌全然美好。“亲属份额”指属于亲属的那一份。意思是:在这无始的轮回中,没有任何一个众生完全没有亲属份额。“此”指“那时你是我的外甥”这句话。“依照传统”即依“那时他是我的外甥,现在却站在魔罗的地盘上”这一传统而言。或者,“不同肩”指所承担的职责与其他人不同,因此说“与其他人不相似”。“以少苦”指轻松、不费力。“行道者”指旅途中的行人。“以此”指以此火葬堆附近的范围。“水洞”指由水流冲刷而成的洞穴。“从等至”指从灭尽定出。“等至果”指证入灭尽定的果报。显示巴利原文
507. Rukkhadevatā nāma cātumahārājikesu nihīno kāyo, tasmā nesaṃ manussagandho paricitattā nātijegucchoti āha ‘‘ākāsaṭṭhadevatāna’’nti. Ābādhaṃ karotīti dukkhaṃ janeti. Nāgarikoti sukumāro. Paricokkhoti sabbaso sucirūpo. Ñātikoṭinti ñātibhāgaṃ. Anādimati hi saṃsāre ñātibhāgarahito nāma satto kassacipi natthīti adhippāyo. Idanti ‘‘so me tvaṃ bhāgineyyo hosī’’ti idaṃ vacanaṃ. Paveṇivasenāti tadā mayhaṃ bhāgineyyo hutvā idāni māraṭṭhāne ṭhitoti imissā paveṇiyā vasena vuttaṃ. Aññassa vā vesamaṃ dhuro vidhuro. Tenāha ‘‘aññehi saddhiṃ asadiso’’ti. Appadukkhenāti sukheneva. Panthānaṃ avanti gacchantīti pathāvino. Ettakenāti ettāvatā citakasannisayena. Udakaleṇanti udakanissandanaleṇaṃ. Samāpattitoti nirodhasamāpattito. Samāpattiphalanti nirodhasamāpattiphalaṃ.
508 “以十种骂詈事”指运用这十种骂詈事,毫无遗漏地尽数使出。“责骂”即呵斥、指责。“抨击”指用无间断的话语去刺伤他们。“令苦”指令其心生痛苦。“对此”指对于那些比丘,由于你们的谩骂等行为,导致比丘们生起烦恼。因此,这里的意思是:破坏者魔罗由此得到了可乘之机。“应侍奉的仆人”指那些应被侍奉的仆人,即象夫等下贱职业者。由于他们以低贱的方式谋生,如同仆人,故被称为仆人,但在文句脉络中,连同他们的同伴,被统称为“居士”。“黑”指黑生类,出身低贱的人。“从足生”指从脚所生,意即脚的子孙。“生懈怠”指由于不从事农耕、经商等劳作而产生的懒惰。“除粪道”指从粪坑中排出粪便的通道。显示巴利原文
508.Dasahi akkosavatthūhīti dasahipi akkosavatthūhi, tato kiñci ahāpentā. Paribhāsathāti garahatha. Ghaṭṭethāti anūnāhi kathāhi imesu ovijjhatha. Dukkhāpethāti citte dukkhaṃ janetha. Etesanti tesaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ tumhākaṃ akkosanādīhi bhikkhūnaṃ kilesuppattiyā. Tenettha dūsī māro otāraṃ labhati nāmāti adhippāyo. Upaṭṭhātabbaṃ ibhaṃ arahantīti ibbhā, hatthibhaṇḍakā, hīnajīvikatāya hete ibbhā viyāti ibbhā, te pana sadutiyakavasena ‘‘gahapatikā’’ti vuttā. Kaṇhāti kaṇhābhijātikā. Pādato jātattā pādānaṃ apaccā. Ālasiyajātāti kasivaṇijjādikammassa akaraṇena sañjātālasiyā. Gūthaniddhamanapanāḷīti vaccakūpato gūthassa nikkhamapadeso.
人类之所以不会有不善,是因为他们没有那样的特殊业报条件。被附身者的心相续,因附身者的威神力而转变,此义前面已说。“不合宜的所缘”指在比丘们面前出现女人的形象,或在比丘尼们面前出现男人的形象;诸如此类,或其他不适合出家人的、不相应的所缘,即是“不合宜的所缘”。“懊悔所缘”指那些看到后会成为心生懊悔之因缘的事物。“涂胶杆”指涂了胶的捕鸟竿。显示巴利原文
Manussānaṃ akusalaṃ na bhaveyya tesaṃ tādisāya abhisandhiyā abhāvato. Āvesakassa ānubhāvena āviṭṭhassa cittasantati viparivattatīti vuttovāyamattho. Visabhāgavatthunti bhikkhūnaṃ santike itthirūpaṃ, bhikkhunīnaṃ santike purisarūpanti īdisaṃ, aññaṃ vā pabbajitānaṃ asāruppaṃ visabhāgavatthuṃ. Vippaṭisārārammaṇanti passantānaṃ vippaṭisārassa paccayaṃ. Lepayaṭṭhinti lepalittaṃ vākurayaṭṭhiṃ.
510 “以喜悦之力”指的是以世俗居家生活所引生的喜悦之力。“变成别样”是指变得兴奋踊跃的状态。“依前所说之理”,即如先前所述:“假使魔罗附着于人类的色身……”等道理。若魔罗果真如此而行,则人类便无善法,唯成魔罗之善;然而魔罗并未附着于色身,却能示现那般令人净信、可作为净信所缘之物,故说“正如……”。显示巴利原文
510.Somanassavasenāti gehassitasomanassavasena. Aññathattanti uppilāvitattaṃ. Purimanayenevāti ‘‘sace māro manussānaṃ sarīre adhimuccitvā’’tiādinā pubbe vuttanayena. Yadi mārova tathā kareyya, manussānaṃ kusalaṃ na bhaveyya, mārasseva bhaveyya, sarīre pana anadhimuccitvā tādisaṃ pasādanīyaṃ pasādavatthuṃ dassesi. Tenāha ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi.
511 “以不净想所熟习的”:以“全身皆为不净”而生起的想伴随的禅那,名为不净想;以此不净想反复熟习、反复修习。“以心”即由心意。“多”指频繁、常常。“住者”指多安住于不净等至者,意为多修习不净定之人。“回避”指内心退缩,因对彼不净所缘起厌恶而安住。“回缩”即退缩回去。“回还”即转身返回。正因如此,心恰恰不会对那所缘生起喜悦与信乐。“对于味爱”是指对于以甘甜等味道为对象的爱染。显示巴利原文
511.Asubhasaññāparicitenāti sakalaṃ kāyaṃ asubhanti pavattāya saññāya sahagatajjhānaṃ asubhasaññā, tena paricitena paribhāvitena. Cetasā cittena. Bahulanti abhiṇhaṃ. Viharatoti viharantassa, asubhasamāpattibahulassāti attho. Patilīyatīti saṅkucati tattha paṭikūlatāya saṇṭhitattā. Patikuṭatīti apasakkati. Pativattatīti nivattati. Tato eva na sampasāriyati. Rasataṇhāyāti madhurādirasavisayāya taṇhāya.
“于一切世间不乐想”:对欲有、色有、无色有这三种有皆不欣乐,依此而生起的毗婆舍那修习,这即是厌离随观。“于世间种种奇妙的事物”,指如大象、骏马、车乘、宫殿、楼阁等,以及园林、风景胜地等世间种种缤纷悦目之处。“已止息贪的”,指已止息了贪欲;“已止息嗔、痴的”,理亦同此。他们如此修学这些业处,乃因这些业处普适于一切类型的修行者。显示巴利原文
Sabbaloke anabhiratisaññāti tīsupi bhavesu aruccanavasena pavattā vipassanābhāvanā. Nibbidānupassanā hesā. Lokacitresūti hatthiassarathapāsādakūṭāgārādibhedesu ceva ārāmarāmaṇeyyakādibhedesu ca loke cittavicittesu. Rāgasantāni vūpasantarāgāni. Dosamohasantānīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Imesaṃ evaṃ kammaṭṭhānaggahaṇaṃ sabbesaṃ sappāyabhāvato.
512 “握着石子”:指手持一把碎石,即破裂的石块,因此说“能握在拳头里大小的石头”。意为能被拳头容纳的。这确实是石头大小的下限。“象王”即巨大的象。有些论师认为,“那伽”一词有“巨大”的义涵。或者为了区别于“龙”等含义,特意说“象王”以作区分。为了阐明“以整个身体转回来观望”这句话的义理,才说了“正如……”等语。此处的“vā”字表示决定义,所以说“完全不知道分寸”。而所谓“连同回转观望”等说法,只是按字面意思去理解罢了。“于崇高者”:即对于具足崇高功德的世尊。因为在当时含摄天神的世间中,除了世尊之外,确实没有任何众生具备如此殊胜的功德特质。显示巴利原文
512.Sakkharaṃgahetvāti sakkharāsīsena tattakaṃ bhinnapāsāṇamuṭṭhinti āha ‘‘antomuṭṭhiyaṃ tiṭṭhanapamāṇaṃ pāsāṇa’’nti. Muṭṭhipariyāpannanti attho. Ayañhi pāsāṇassa heṭṭhimakoṭi. Hatthināgoti mahāhatthī. Mahantapariyāyo nāga-saddoti keci. Ahināgādito vā visesanatthaṃ hatthināgoti vuttaṃ. Sakalasarīreneva nivattitvā apalokesīti vuttamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Na vāyanti ettha vā-saddo avadhāraṇatthoti āha ‘‘neva pamāṇaṃ aññāsī’’ti. Sahāpalokanāyāti ca vacanatoti iminā vacanena imaṃ vacanamattaṃ gahetvāti adhippāyo. Uḷāreti uḷāraguṇe. Bhagavantañhi ṭhapetvā natthi tadā sadevake loke tādiso guṇavisesayuttoti.
各自领受的、与铁矛一起存在的六种触处,名为“六触处”,这里指的就是苦。因为那地狱中存在这种六触处,所以称为“有六触处的”地狱。因此说:“六触……缘……”。“被贯穿的”:即被刺穿的意思,在此地狱中,有被数百种桩子贯穿的各种状况,所以称为“被桩贯穿的”地狱。因为它是特殊缘力所生的感受,故名“应被感受的”;不需依靠其他因缘造作,唯由自身各别一一领受,故名“各自分别领受的”。“与铁矛一起”:指的是从脚底开始,无间断以击打方式到来,并由五十人一起执持的铁矛,与从头顶到来的铁矛,两者同时加身。因为这一切都同属铁矛,所以这里用了单数词,而实际上落下的是成百上千根铁矛。通过这样观想彼处所,是假借能观想的心来称呼所观想的依处。“如是所说”是指佛说的:“那时,你将能知道自己已经在地狱中受苦一千年了”这段话。“升起之量”:指存在于最终出离地狱那一刻的感受,即最终的感受。因此解释说:“异熟生起的感受”,意思是异熟果报即将结束时的感受。“变得更为剧烈痛苦”,犹如油灯在将熄之际。显示巴利原文
Visuṃ visuṃ paccattavedaniyo ayasūlena saddhiṃ bhūtāni cha phassāyatanāni etassāti cha phassāyatanaṃ, dukkhaṃ. Taṃ ettha atthīti cha phassāyataniko, nirayo. Tenāha ‘‘chasu phassā…pe… paccayo’’ti. Samāhanatīti samāhato, anekasatabhedo saṅkusamāhato ettha atthīti saṅkusamāhato, nirayo. Visesapaccayatāya vedanāya ṭhitoti vedaniyo, kāraṇākārakena vinā paccattaṃ sayameva vedaniyoti paccattavedaniyo. Ayasūlena saddhiṃ ayasūlanti pādapadesato paṭṭhāya nirantaraṃ abhihananavasena āgatena paṇṇāsāya janehi gahitena ayasūlena saha sīsapadesato paṭṭhāya āgataṃ. Ayasūlabhāvasāmaññena cetaṃ ekavacanaṃ, satamattāni patitāni sūlāni. Iminā te ṭhānena cintetvāti nissitavohārena nissayaṃ vadati. Evaṃ vuttanti ‘‘tadā jāneyyāsi vassasahassaṃ me niraye paccamānassā’’ti evaṃ vuttaṃ. Vuṭṭhānimanti vuṭṭhāne bhavaṃ, antimanti attho. Tenāha ‘‘vipākavuṭṭhānavedana’’nti, vipākassa pariyosānaṃ vedananti attho. Dukkhatarā hoti padīpassa vijjhāyanakkhaṇe mahantabhāvo viya.
513 “击打、敲击”。“生起各别感受的”:指那些能一一独立产生巨大痛苦的。与铁无关的地狱,应依照《天使经》(中部第三集261经)来说明。关于它的详细义解,后文自然会出现。然而,大目犍连长老为了震慑魔罗,引用这段过去的事,借机显示自己的智慧威力,而说出此偈颂:“凡是能现量了知此事的……”。其意为:那位有大神通的人,对于此业与业果,犹如观掌中余甘子果,现前亲证。偈中的“比丘”:因已断尽一切烦恼,故为世尊的上首弟子;这位具足如此崇高功德的比丘,以“击打、敲击”的方式对你施压。黑暗的魔罗啊,因你一向唯具黑暗恶法,未来必定遭受巨大痛苦。显示巴利原文
513.Ghaṭṭayitvā pothetvā. Pāṭiyekkavedanājanakāti paccekaṃ mahādukkhasamuppādakā. Ayato apagato nirayo, so devadūtasuttena (ma. ni. 3.261) dīpetabbo. Atthavaṇṇanā panassa parato sayameva āgamissati. Imaṃ pana atītavatthuṃ āharitvā attano ñāṇānubhāvadīpanamukhena māraṃ santajjento mahāthero ‘‘yoetamabhijānātī’’ti gāthamāha. Tassattho – yo mahābhiñño etaṃ kammaṃ kammaphalañca hatthatale ṭhapitaṃ āmalakaṃ viya abhimukhaṃ katvā paccakkhato jānāti. Sabbaso bhinnakilesatāya bhikkhu sammāsambuddhassa aggasāvako, tādisaṃ uḷāraguṇaṃ āsajja ghaṭṭayitvā ekantakāḷakehi pāpadhammehi samannāgatattā kaṇha māra āyatiṃ mahādukkhaṃ vindissasi.
「以水为基」:以那些在水中投生的有情共同的业果——大海之水,作为所依止的基地。实际上,那些天宫能持续一劫之久,因此说「持续一劫的」。「它们的」指那些天宫的。对于上述天宫的所在、那些天女的成就,以及这成就的原因,他都亲自现前了知。「用脚趾摇动」:在东园,他用脚趾摇动了由大优婆夷毘舍佉所建造、饰有千间楼阁的大殿堂,所以有说「此事应依《摇动殿堂经》来说明」。这里的「此」:指「凡是韦迦亚塔……」这首偈颂所含的义理,应依《小爱尽解脱经》(中部第一集393经)本身来说明。显示巴利原文
Udakaṃ vatthuṃ katvāti tattha nibbattanakasattānaṃ sādhāraṇakammaphalena mahāsamuddaudakameva adhiṭṭhānaṃ katvā. Tathā hi tāni kappaṭṭhitikāni honti. Tenāha ‘‘kappaṭṭhāyino’’ti. Tesanti vimānānaṃ. Etaṃ yathāvuttavimānavatthuṃ tāsaṃ accharānaṃ sampattiṃ, tassa ca kāraṇaṃ attapaccakkhaṃ katvā jānāti. Pādaṅguṭṭhena kampayīti pubbārāme visākhāya mahāupāsikāya kāritaṃ sahassagabbhapaṭimaṇḍitamahāpāsādaṃ attano pādaṅguṭṭhena kampesi. Tenāha ‘‘idaṃ pāsādakampanasuttena dīpetabba’’nti. Idanti ‘‘yo vejayanta’’nti imissā gāthāya atthajātaṃ cūḷataṇhāsaṅkhayavimuttisutteneva (ma. ni. 1.393) dīpetabbaṃ.
那位梵天大众才这样一想,立刻在梵天界中前往善法梵天集会堂。「他们」指大目犍连等长老。「各自于一方」意思是:大目犍连长者在东方,大迦叶长者在南方,摩诃劫宾那长者在西方,阿那律长者在北方。这样,四位长老在梵天众的聚会中,分别坐于四方,而世尊则坐在中央。所说的偈颂,是指「凡是询问梵天的……」这首偈颂。「依《某梵天经》」:应依照大品所收《某梵天经》(相应部第一集176经)来说明,即:「那个时候,刚好有一位梵天生起了这样的恶见……」等等。显示巴利原文
Tassa brahmagaṇassa tathācintanasamanantarameva tasmiṃ brahmaloke sudhammaṃ brahmasabhaṃ gantvā. Tepīti mahāmoggallānādayo. Paccekaṃ disāsūti mahāmoggallānatthero puratthimadisāyaṃ, mahākassapatthero dakkhiṇadisāyaṃ, mahākappinatthero pacchimadisāyaṃ, anuruddhatthero uttaradisāyanti evaṃ cattāro therā brahmaparisamatthake majjhe nisinnassa bhagavato samantato catuddisā nisīdiṃsu. Gāthā vuttāti ‘‘yo brahmaṃ paripucchatī’’ti gāthā vuttā. Aññatarabrahmasuttenāti – ‘‘tena kho pana samayena aññatarassa brahmuno evarūpaṃ pāpakaṃ diṭṭhigataṃ uppannaṃ hotī’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 1.176) mahāvagge āgatena aññatarabrahmasuttena.
「以禅那解脱而触」:依止禅那与八解脱,以神通智来触证。「林」:指触赡部洲,这是根据上下文来解说的。因为赡部洲洲森林茂密,所以在这里称为「林」;因此说「阎浮林之主」。「东毗提诃人之洲」:指属于东毗提诃洲居民的那片洲,即东毗提诃洲。「名为『地上卧者』的人们」:指西牛货洲人和北俱卢洲人,因为他们不执著房屋财物,只睡在地上,不住于宫殿等建筑中。「获得」:即生起。「勿存此期望」:正如过去对付顽恶魔罗一样,你的这种期望长时以来唯有无益;因此,不要怀有这样的期望——这是大目犍连长老给魔罗的教导。其余各处皆容易了知。显示巴利原文
Jhānavimokkhena phusīti jhānavimokkhasannissayena abhiññāñāṇena phassayi. Vananti jambudīpaṃ aphassayīti sambandho. Jambudīpo hi vanabahulatāya idha ‘‘vana’’nti vutto. Tenāha ‘‘jambusaṇḍassa issaro’’ti. Pubbavidehānaṃ dīpanti pubbavidehavāsīnaṃ dīpaṃ, pubbavidehadīpanti attho. Bhūmisayā narā nāma aparagoyānakā uttarakurukā ca. Yasmā te gehapariggahābhāvato bhūmiyaṃyeva sayanti, na pāsādādīsu. Paṭilabhīti uppādesi. Etaṃ āsaṃ mā akāsīti esā yathā pubbe dūsimārassa, evaṃ tuyhaṃ āsā dīgharattaṃ anatthāvahā, tasmā edisaṃ āsaṃ mā akāsīti mārassa ovādaṃ adāsi. Sesaṃ sabbattha suviññeyyameva.